|
ABAI Business Meeting |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
8:00 AM–8:50 AM |
209 (CC) |
Domain: Theory |
Chair: Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Panelists: CHRISTY A. ALLIGOOD (Special Interest Group Board), JENNIFER L. AUSTIN (Education Board Coordinator), GORDON BOURLAND (Affliated Chapters Board), MARTHA HÜBNER (University of Sao Paulo), MARIA E. MALOTT (ABAI), M. JACKSON MARR (Membership Board Coordinator), MARK A. MATTAINI (Program Committee Senior Co-Chair), M. CHRISTOPHER NEWLAND (Science Board Coordinator), ANNA I. PETURSDOTTIR (Publications Board), JENNIFER R. ZARCONE (Practice Board Coordinator) |
Abstract: This is an annual ABAI Business Meeting where the leadership of the Association will provide an update of on-going activities and major developments in the Association. Attendees will learn from ABAI's president the direction of the ABAI Council and from the ABAI's CEO the status of finances and administration. Attendees will also hear from the board coordinators including Science, Education, Practice, Program, Membership, Affiliated Chapters and Publications. |
CHRISTY A. ALLIGOOD (Special Interest Group Board) |
JENNIFER L. AUSTIN (Education Board Coordinator) |
GORDON BOURLAND (Affliated Chapters Board) |
MARTHA HÜBNER (University of Sao Paulo) |
MARIA E. MALOTT (ABAI) |
M. JACKSON MARR (Membership Board Coordinator) |
MARK A. MATTAINI (Program Committee Senior Co-Chair) |
M. CHRISTOPHER NEWLAND (Science Board Coordinator) |
ANNA I. PETURSDOTTIR (Publications Board) |
JENNIFER R. ZARCONE (Practice Board Coordinator) |
Keyword(s): ABAI Business, Business Meeting, Finance, President |
|
|
|
|
Diagnostic, Language, and Barriers Assessments for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
217B (CC) |
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Berenice de la Cruz (Autism Community Network) |
CE Instructor: Berenice de la Cruz, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Various types of assessments are needed when assessing children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). This symposium will discuss diagnostic, language, and barrier assessments. Obtaining a medical diagnosis for ASD at an early age is important in order to allow children to obtain early intervention. This symposium will discuss a multidisciplinary diagnostic process for diagnosing young children, ages 2-5, with ASD with an emphasis on the role of the behavior analyst. Data will be presented on agreement between diagnostic tools. Information on common barriers to learning identified in young children with ASD will also be presented. Once children receive a diagnosis of ASD and are referred for ABA therapy, an assessment is needed. Data on the use of functional analysis vs. task analysis of verbal behavior for this assessment process will be presented. |
Keyword(s): assessment, diagnostic, functional analysis, verbal behavior |
|
Autism Diagnosis in Children Ages 2-5: DSM IV-TR, DSM 5, and ADOS-2 Agreement |
BERENICE DE LA CRUZ (Autism Community Network), Lupe Castaneda (Autism Community Network), Adriana I Sanchez (Autism Community Network), Megan G. Kunze (Autism Community Network) |
Abstract: A multidisciplinary team consisting of a developmental pediatrician or licensed psychologist, a speech pathologist, an occupational therapists, and a behavior analyst assessed children ages 2-5 at risk for Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). The diagnostic team utilized various measures including the Diagnostics and Statistics Manual of Mental Disorders (IV-TR; DSM IV-TR; American Psychiatric Association [APA], 2000), the Diagnostics and Statistics Manual of Mental Disorders (5th ed; DSM-5; APA, 2013), and the Autism Diagnostic Observation Schedule-Second Edition (ADOS-2; Lord & Rutter, 2012). Children were scores on both DSM IV-TR and DSM 5 criteria. The ADOS-2 is considered the “gold standard” of diagnostic instruments for individuals at risk for ASD. The ADOS-2 measures communication, social interactions, play, and repetitive/restrictive behaviors. The multidisciplinary evaluation process will be described with an emphasis on the role of the behavior analyst. Data on agreement between the DSM IV-TR, DSM 5, ADOS-2 scores, and overall diagnosis for children who underwent comprehensive diagnostic evaluations will be presented. |
|
Learning Barriers in Young Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder |
LUPE CASTANEDA (Autism Community Network), Berenice de la Cruz (Autism Community Network), Adriana I Sanchez (Autism Community Network), Megan G. Kunze (Autism Community Network) |
Abstract: Individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) present with strengths and deficits that affect their overall development. The deficits or “barriers” often impede the development of new skills and should be a primary target of intervention. The Verbal Behavior Milestones and Placement Program (VB-MAPP; Sundberg, 2008) includes a Barriers Assessment that assesses 24 common language and learning barriers in individuals with autism and developmental disabilities. The Barriers Assessment was conducted by a Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA or BCBA-D) or Board Certified Behavior Analyst – Doctorate (BCBA-D) during a comprehensive, multidisciplinary diagnostic evaluation for children ages 2 to 5 at risk for ASD. Data for children diagnosed with ASD during comprehensive evaluations in 2013 and 2014 (N=105) indicate that the most common barriers were defective mands, instructional control, negative behaviors, failure to make eye contact, and defective listener skills. A description of the procedures utilized to identify the common barriers in diagnostic evaluations and discussion of future research in common barriers of children diagnosed with autism will conclude the presentation. |
|
Functional Analyses of Verbal Behavior as an Efficient Alternative to Language Assessment |
STEPHANIE CURTIS (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Lee L. Mason (The University of Texas at San Antonio) |
Abstract: Learning Skills-Revised (ABLLS-R; Partington, 2006), are frequently employed in clinical settings for both assessment and curricular purposes. However, these tools can take an inordinate amount of time to accurately administer and score, and often exceed the time limitations for assessments allowed by insurance. Lerman et al. (2005) proposed a functional assessment of verbal behavior that may provide an alternative means of expediently measuring the present levels of stimulus control over an individual’s verbal behavior. Extending the procedures described by Lerman and colleagues, we present a comparison of the results between a functional analysis of verbal behavior and corresponding domains from VB-MAPP assessments for children with an autism spectrum disorder diagnosis. Results are presented in terms of a stimulus control ratio among four primary verbal operants: mands, tacts, echoics, and sequelics. |
|
|
|
|
From the Ground Up: Developing an Ethical ABA Center in the Dominican Republic |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC) |
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Kaitlin Maguire, M.Ed. |
Chair: Molly Ola (Global Autism Project) |
STEPHANIA PATIN (APRENDO Center for Autism and other Developmental) |
KARLA DEWINDT (APRENDO Center for Autism and other Developmental Disabilities) |
KAITLIN MAGUIRE (Global Autism Project) |
Abstract: When ABA services in a developing country are so limited the need for creating services that are ethical and include best practices are essential. During this panel the audience will learn the steps involved in the process of building an ABA center in the Dominican Republic through a partnership with the Global Autism Project. One of the main objectives in creating local services through an international partnership is to ensure the sustainability of services and the ability to building capacity in the professional field of ABA. Critical components such as the importance of remote supervision provided by a BCBA both in a clinical and administrative setting, therapist training, family intake process and center policies, will be shared with participants. Since autism knows no borders, anyone providing services in an under-served community with the desire to learn and build capacity can very well become a service provider with the right plan and support. |
Keyword(s): autism, ethical dissemination, international service, organization collaborations |
|
|
|
|
Towards Developing ABA Soft Skills: Opening the Gate to More Effective Parent Collaboration |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
Grand Ballroom C1 (CC) |
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Linda S. Heitzman-Powell (The University of Kansas Medical Center) |
LISA K. DWORKIN (Autism Home Support Services) |
LAURA MCKEE (Autism Home Support) |
MARYANNE NUGENT (Autism Home Support Services) |
Abstract: Soft skills are personal attributes that enable someone to interact effectively and harmoniously with other people. Examples include communication styles, effective problem-solving, active listening, diplomacy, and collaboration skills. Beyond technical abilities, soft skills are imperative as BCBAs initiate, develop, and sustain relationships with clients and families. Going a step further, it is not enough to identify and design effective and sustainable interventions; rather, clinical effectiveness also hinges on the ability of the BCBA to master more traditional psychology domains (e.g., active listening, establishing a therapeutic relationship, and promoting parent acceptability/treatment adherence; Heitzman-Powell, White, & Perrin, 2007). To date, it is largely unknown to what extent these critical areas are addressed in pre-service training of practitioners in the field of ABA (Kelly & Tincani, 2013; Heitzman-Powell et al., 2007). Soft skills, like technical skills, can be introduced, acquired, and shaped in our professional repertoires. Because of the necessity of these skills, in-service training may be an effective method to develop this repertoire of skills in the growing ABA community. Longitudinal data were collected on gains in BCBAs background information (e.g., years of experience), knowledge, attitudes, and potential behavior change, as a result of these initiatives. Specifically, 76% of BCBAs surveyed (n = 79) responded that the in-service training presentations were ‘very much’ or ‘quite a bit’ relevant to their work as a BCBA. Additionally, 68% of BCBAs surveyed feel ‘quite a bit’ or very much’ more prepared to provide services to children and families following the presentation. The panel will discuss the systematic and organizational efforts a large in-home ABA provider made to establish, implement, and teach soft skills. The panel discussion will bring key stakeholders together; panelists will include the CEO, Director of Clinical Services, and a parent of a child with autism. Participants will have the opportunity to dialogue with the panelists. Future directions and recommendations for research and practice at the organizational, professional, and individual level will be discussed. |
Keyword(s): professional development |
|
|
|
|
The Behavior Analyst and Cultural Competency |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
204A (CC) |
Area: CSE/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Elizabeth Hughes Fong (Fielding Graduate University ) |
SUSAN JARMUZ-SMITH (University of New England) |
RICHARD W. SERNA (University of Massachusetts Lowell) |
KIMBERLY D WOOLERY (Unknown) |
REBECCA KATE DOGAN (OT&P Medical Practice) |
Abstract: Given the critical nature of behavioral intervention and its growing application across populations and countries, training behavior analysts in culturally competent practice is an ethical imperative. Culturally competent behavior analysts: 1) understand that their own cultural conditioning affects personal beliefs, values, and attitudes; 2) know their ethical responsibility to be knowledgeable about the world views of individuals and groups of differing cultures; and 3) build skills in using culturally appropriate communication, assessment, and intervention. Although the topic of culturally competent services has circulated for a while, anecdotal data demonstrate that professionals in our field report their initial or ongoing training has been inadequate to achieve these required practice standards. Currently, there exist few research-based resources of self-measurement and skill building with respect to culturally competent services. This panel discussion will explore culture competency and include data from a needs assessment of Board Certified Behavior Analysts. From this discussion we aim to better define the current state of culturally competent practice and outline what training, continuing education, and/or practice frameworks would support behavioral intervention across cultures. This is an initial step toward a larger discussion about what tools and strategies are required for culturally competent practice. |
Keyword(s): competency self-assessment, cultural competency, differing populations |
|
|
|
|
For the Greater Good: Community Applications of ABA |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
204B (CC) |
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Byron J. Wine (Florida Institute of Technology) |
CE Instructor: Byron J. Wine, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium presents three studies that address community based problems across populations. The first presentation involves children with a diagnosis of autism being taught to avoid poison hazards. The second presentation presents an intervention to increase "green" driving in adults. The final presentation presents a video modeling intervention to teach undergraduates to correctly install car seats. Taken together, this symposium demonstrates the potential breadth of behavior analysis. |
Keyword(s): Community Applications |
|
Evaluation of Video Modeling to Teach Children Diagnosed with Autism to Avoid Poison Hazards |
SHANNON KING (USF), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of video modeling to teach four children diagnosed with ASD to avoid poison hazards. Results showed that video modeling was not effective for any of the participants, but that in situ training was effective for three participants while the fourth participant required an additional incentive. Three out of four of the participants maintained the safety skills at 1-, 3-, and 5-week follow up assessments. |
|
Increasing Green Driving in Adults Using Prompts and Goal Setting |
ANITA LI (Florida Institute of Technology), Joshua K. Pritchard (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: Green driving in this study is defined as hard acceleration and braking, excessive speeding, and hard turns. These measures were tracked by GPS, accelerometers, and gyroscopes. A combination of prompts and goal setting was effective in increasing green driving behavior across three participants. |
|
A Comparison of First Person Video Modeling and Third Person Video Modeling to Teach Car Seat Installation |
BYRON J. WINE (Florida Institute of Technology), Nicholas Green (FIT) |
Abstract: Video modeling has proven to be an effective teaching procedures across a number of skills. This study compared two different methods of implementing video modeling (first person and third person view) to teach car seat installation. Results suggested that both methods were effective in teaching undergraduates to install car seats. |
|
|
|
|
Translational Research: Behavioral economics and conditioned suppression |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
214C (CC) |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Keith Lit (Nova Southeastern University) |
Discussant: Duncan Pritchard (Aran Hall School) |
Abstract: The past 35 years have seen a growing recognition of the importance of linking basic and applied research in order to develop effective behavioral treatments and establish the generality of basic behavioral relations. This coordinated effort has come to be known as translational research. The most common approach is to translate basic research findings into behavioral technologies that are often novel and of benefit to human problem behavior in applied settings. The first study utilizes behavioural economics to examine stimuli that are functionally similar and functionally dissimilar. A competing stimulus and brief substitutability assessment were conducted and the results from the assessment were used to inform treatment for mouthing, disruption and self-injurious behavior in a five-year old boy. The second study examined obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD). OCD is characterized by recurrent and ritualized acts that often have no social behavioral function. These behaviors commonly co-occur with anxiety. We used mild reprimands to suppress compulsive behaviors in a 16 year-old male diagnosed with OCD. Both these studies highlight the benefit that translational research can have on improved clinical treatments for serious behavior disorders. |
Keyword(s): Behavioral economics, Conditioned suppression, Translational research |
|
Are open or closed-behavioral economics models better predictors of favorable responses to treatment of automatically reinforced problem behavior? |
STEPHANIE TRAUSCHKE (Nova Southeastern University), Joelle Krantz (Nova Southeastern University), Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute), Danielle Tarver (Nova Southeastern University), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Kennedy Krieger Institute), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University) |
Abstract: Behavioral economics can be helpful in understanding how behavior is allocated. The present study utilizes behavioral economics to examine stimuli that are functionally similar (matched) and functionally dissimilar (unmatched) to a five-year old male’s mouthing behavior and efficacy of the stimuli in treatment. A competing stimulus assessment and brief substitutability assessment were conducted. Results from the assessments were utilized to inform treatment. For treatment, the participant was exposed to differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) for matched and unmatched stimuli, as well as an ignore condition. Data were collected on the participant’s mouthing, self-injurious behavior, disruptive behavior, and engagement in the stimuli. The DRO schedule interval was increased. Results suggest that mouthing decreased more in the unmatched stimulus condition than the matched stimulus condition. In addition, the decrease in mouthing in the unmatched stimulus condition was more durable as the DRO schedule interval was increased. |
|
Conditioned Suppression of Compulsive Behavior in an Adolescent Diagnosed with Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder |
HEATHER PENNEY (Aran Hall School), Duncan Pritchard (Aran Hall School), Marguerite L. Hoerger (Bangor University), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University) |
Abstract: A distinction can be made between conditioned suppression and stimulus control of punishment effects. The former occurs when a neutral stimulus predicts the onset of an aversive stimulus independent of responding (i.e., an S-S contingency) or contingent on a reinforced response (i.e., an S-R-S contingency). Both contingencies can result in cessation of reinforced behavior in the presence of the stimulus. By contrast, stimulus control of punished responses may be difficult to unambiguously establish. Obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD) is characterized by recurrent and ritualized acts that often have no social behavioral function. These behaviors commonly co-occur with anxiety. We used reprimands to suppress compulsive behaviors in a 16 year-old male diagnosed with OCD. We paired reprimands with red paper and systematically reduced paper size and added a red wristband while continuing to reduce paper size. Conditioned suppression by the wristband was then generalized to a novel setting and staff. |
|
|
|
|
A Discussion With the 2015 Presidential Scholar, Dr. Sarah Blaffer Hrdy |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC) |
Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Discussant: Sarah Hrdy (University of California-Davis professor emerita) |
CE Instructor: Linda J. Parrott Hayes, Ph.D. |
Panelists: SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas), INGUNN SANDAKER (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences), FRANCES K. MCSWEENEY (Washington State University) |
Abstract: The aim of this panel is provide an opportunity for commentary on and discussion of the works of Dr. Sarah Blaffer Hrdy as a follow-up to her address as the 2015 Presidential Scholar. Dr. Hrdy's scholarly works pertain to intellectual domains of considerable relevance to the behavior analytic community, including anthropology, primatology and evolutionary theory. Of particular interest to our members are her views on the nature of motherhood and its role in the evolution of the human species, including the evolutionary origins of empathy and mutual understanding. The panelists will offer behavior analytic commentary on various features of Dr. Hrdy's views as presented in her address and other works, with opportunity for discussion with the author. |
Instruction Level: Basic |
Target Audience: Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to: (1) discuss the nature of motherhood and its role in the evolution of the human species, including the evolutionary origins of empathy and mutual understanding; (2) discuss the psychological implications of humankind’s long legacy of shared child-rearing; and (3) discuss the reproductive and parental investment strategies of both human and nonhuman primates. |
SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas) |
Dr. Sigrid Glenn's passionate commitment to the future of behavior analysis has resulted in numerous contributions to her chosen field. She has co-authored four books and more than 45 articles and book chapters. Although her early research was mainly in applied areas, she is widely recognized for her later conceptual work on selection at behavioral and cultural levels. As founding chair of the Department of Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas, Dr. Glenn established master's and bachelor's degree programs in behavior analysis, leading the faculty in the first accreditation of a graduate program by ABAI. With characteristic prescience about important developments in the field, Dr. Glenn, a charter certificant of the Behavior Analysis Certification Board (BACB), also led the faculty in developing the first Internet sequence of behavior analysis courses approved by the BACB. Dr. Glenn has served as editor of The Behavior Analyst and on the editorial boards of several other journals. She is a former president of ABAI (1993-1994), a fellow of Division 25 of the American Psychological Association, and Regents Professor of Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas. |
INGUNN SANDAKER (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences) |
Dr. Ingunn Sandaker is a professor and program director of the Master and Research Program Learning in Complex Systems at Oslo and Akershus University College. She also initiated the development of the first Ph.D. program in behavior analysis in Norway. She has been the program director since it was established in 2010. She received her Ph.D. in 1997 at the University of Oslo with a grant from the Foundation for Research in Business and Society (SNF) at the Norwegian School of Economics and Business Administration (NHH). Her thesis was a study on the systemic approach to major changes in two large companies; one pharmaceutical company and one gas and petroleum company. During preparations for the Olympic games in Sydney, Australia, and Nagano, Japan, she was head of evaluation of a program aiming at extending female participation in management and coaching and assisting the Norwegian Olympic Committee’s preparations for the games. For a number of years, Dr. Sandaker worked as an adviser on management training and performance in STATOIL and Phillips Petroleum Co. in Norway. She also was project manager for Railo International who in cooperation with the Norwegian School of Economics and Business Administration ran a project preparing the electricity supply system in Norway for marked deregulations. Serving as a consultant on top level management programs in Norwegian energy companies, her interest has been focused on performance management within a systems framework. Trying to combine the approaches from micro-level behavior analysis with the perspective of learning in complex systems, and cultural phenomena, she is interested in integrating complementary scientific positions with the behavior analytic conceptual framework.
|
FRANCES K. MCSWEENEY (Washington State University) |
Dr. McSweeney has made significant empirical and theoretical contributions in the experimental analysis of short term changes in reinforcer effectiveness and has demonstrated the generality of her findings across species and conditions. Her work exemplifies the power of programmatic behavior analytic research on basic behavioral processes, and the value to the larger scientific community of such research, as evidenced by support she has received from the National Institutes of Health and the National Science Foundation. Dr. McSweeney has published more than 100 articles in a broad range of very high quality journals. She has also served multiple appointments on several editorial boards and as president of ABAI. Her scholarly achievements have been recognized both within her university and within her discipline by many honors and awards including Washington State University's Eminent Faculty Award. |
Keyword(s): evolutionary theory, motherhood |
|
|
|
|
The Impact of the Science of Applied Behavior Analysis on Adult Education Outcomes |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
212AB (CC) |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Peter F. Gerhardt (JPG Autism Consulting, LLC) |
CE Instructor: Marlene J. Cohen, Ed.D. |
Abstract: There is increased interest in investigating adult education outcomes in our field. As behavior analysts, we are quite adept at studying the outcomes of our clients, but sometimes miss the opportunity to apply the use of our science to our own professional behavior. This symposium details some current research on adult education outcomes in three different settings. The data will be detailed and the impact of these outcomes on future research will be discussed. |
Keyword(s): Adult Education |
|
Higher Education Outcomes: How Do the Outcomes of Online Delivery Compare with On Ground and Blended Formats? |
MARLENE J. COHEN (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Lacey Weber (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology) |
Abstract: The rigor of online education in the field of applied behavior analysis has often been challenged. It is common for professionals to believe that face to face interaction is necessary to provide good educational outcomes. The Chicago School of Professional Psychology offers on ground, blended and online educational options for our certificate and MS in ABA programs. These programs have been aligned to allow for direct comparison of results. Several comparative measures will be presented in an effort to determine if program delivery affects student outcomes. The used of learning management system and assessment software to measure outcomes across a variety of variables will also be discussed. Plans for the longitudinal effects of program delivery have been established. |
|
Re-Assessing Adult Learning: A behavior analytic account of reflection and its effect on performance |
KEVIN ROESSGER (Seattle University) |
Abstract: Reflection has been described as the defining characteristic of adult learning (Mezirow, 1991). Formative adult learning texts (e.g., Kolb, 1984; Mezirow, 2000) continue to tout activities for occasioning reflection as ways to increase generalization and contingency adduction. From a behavioral perspective, though, reflection remains difficult to define. Further, activities meant to occasion it are largely unsubstantiated. Dewey’s early conceptualization of reflection is used here to generate a behavioral account that consists of covert elaborative rehearsal, relational contingency framing, and relational coordination framing. Interdisciplinary data is then presented to illustrate the effect of reflective activities on measurable learning outcomes along the novice to expert continuum. Two studies are highlighted: (a) an inferential statistical analysis of reflective activities and paver setting skills and (a) a multiple baseline investigation of reflective activities and concision writing skills. Implications for research and practice are discussed. |
|
Teaching Exercise as a Recreational and Leisure Skill to Adults with Intellectual Disabilities in an Inclusive Setting |
SARA C. BICARD (Auburn University at Montgomery), Erin Blanton (Auburn University of Montgomery), Angela Russel (University Of Alabama), Michael Esco (University of Alabama) |
Abstract: Individuals with intellectual disabilities have a higher prevalence of inactive lifestyles and lower levels of fitness than the general population. Lack of physical activity increases the risk for developing chronic diseases such as obesity, type 2 diabetes and heart disease. Numerous studies point to the unanimous consensus that regular exercise dramatically improves health. However, there is limited research on increasing the physical activity of adults with intellectual disabilities. WarhawkFit is a program that teaches exercise as a recreational and leisure skill to increase the physical activity of adults with intellectual disabilities. As part of this program, behavior analysts collaborate with exercise scientists to identify and teach appropriate fitness activities. Experiences from two-years years of implementation, suggestions for practitioners, and future research will be provided. |
|
|
|
|
Using Technology and ABA to Foster Professional Development of Education |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
210AB (CC) |
Area: EDC |
Keyword(s): Technology |
Chair: Trudi Gaines (University of West Florida) |
|
Utilizing Technology and ABA Practices for Effective Professional Development for Paraprofessionals Supporting Students with Autism |
Domain: Service Delivery |
ROZ PRESCOTT (Rethink), Patricia I. Wright (Rethink) |
|
Abstract: Paraprofessionals are pivotal to the success of special education students. There are more than 400,000 FTE paraprofessionals engaged in the education of special education students (U.S. Department of Education, 2010). The vast majority of special education paraprofessionals, 97%, report providing one-to-one instruction to students with disabilities (Carter, O’Rourke, Sisco, & Pelsue, 2009). Unfortunately many paraprofessionals do not receive adequate training to meet the high demands of this profession (However, Ghere and York-Barr (2007)
This session provides participants a go-to strategy for effective paraprofessional training. Learn how the largest school district in Florida utilizes video-based training and on-site coaching to increase the knowledge, skills, and behavior of paraprofessionals supporting children with autism and other disabilities. Quantitative outcome data and qualitative narratives regarding the impact and success of this model will be shared. Paraprofessionals must receive quality professional development. This session will illustrate the importance of the paraprofessional role for student success, and an effective professional development model to enhance this important role in today’s school system. |
|
Web-Based Professional Development for Novice Teachers in Urban Settings: WIISE (Wireless, Internet, Induction, & Skype for Educators) Strategy for 21st Century Induction and Professional Development |
Domain: Service Delivery |
TRUDI GAINES (University of West Florida), Wanda Wade (University of South Florida) |
|
Abstract: As school districts, especially those in urban settings, face the challenge of retaining novice teachers and better preparing all teachers for delivering instruction in fully inclusive classrooms, induction programs have become an integral ingredient in meeting this challenge. Effective induction programs have been shown to include mentoring, observation, and feedback, all of which can now be enhanced by utilizing evolving technologies and thereby making their delivery more available in a greater variety of settings. This study examines the utilization of Bug-In-Ear (BIE) Bluetooth technology for novice teachers in an urban elementary school setting using a single case design across participants, and the results support implementing this technology. The research questions that were developed to examine the effectiveness of supporting novice teachers utilizing BIE Bluetooth technology were: (1) Does immediate teacher prompting by an instructional coach via BIE Bluetooth technology increase the average rate of specific positive feedback given to students by the teacher? and, (2) Given an increase, to what extent does the increased average rate of specific positive feedback sustain during the maintenance phases of BIE? |
|
Training Board Certified Behavior Analysis Supervisers to Teach College Developmental Algebra: A Treatment Package Incorporating a Flipped Classroom, Teacher Training and Applied Behavior Analysis |
Domain: Applied Research |
SCOTT BECKETT (Jacksonville State University), Courtney S. Peppers-Owen (Jacksonville State University) |
|
Abstract: Many entering students are unprepared for college math, and developmental math courses delay graduation and deplete financial aid. To address this problem, Board Certified Behavior Analysts in the Department of Learning Skills lowered the typical student:teacher ratio in developmental math classrooms from 35:1 to 4:1 by training psychology graduate students to teach algebra in exchange for supervising their certification hours. The graduate students learn precision teaching, explicit instruction, and behavior analytic techniques for classroom management, and they make data-based decisions on a daily basis. Supervisors collect and analyze longitudinal data to monitor the math students' progress through required math courses. Central to the treatment package is the diagnosis and remediation of cumulative dysfluencies in prerequisite math skills related to fraction operations. Other components for the algebra students include a flipped classroom using teaching videos provided by the National Repository of Online Courses and a workbook that incorporates continual review and progressive difficulty. Training for the graduate students includes weekly data-sharing and training meetings, and continual modeling and supervision by the on-site behavior analyst and certified mathematics teacher. |
|
Keyword(s): Technology |
|
|
|
|
Education Implementation |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
211 (CC) |
Area: EDC |
Chair: Tonya Lambert (Syracuse University) |
|
Identifying Effective Ways to Increase Teachers' Implementation Integrity Through Brief Experimental Analysis |
Domain: Applied Research |
TONYA LAMBERT (Syracuse University), Brian K. Martens (Syracuse University), Matthew Halstad (Towson University) |
|
Abstract: Teachers are often responsible for implementing evidence-based interventions in regular education classrooms with support from pupil service teams, however; past research has shown that in many cases interventions are not implemented with integrity, thus limiting conclusions regarding a student's response to intervention. Although research indicates that provision of scripts, performance feedback, and reinforcement are useful at increasing implementation integrity, their effects vary across teachers. In the present study, a brief experimental analysis (BEA) with a reversal was used to identify the most effective method for increasing the integrity with which 4 regular education teachers implemented a DRA procedure using verbal praise as a reinforcer for student on-task behavior. An extended analysis using a multiple baseline design across teachers was then conducted to assess the predictive validity of the BEA. Student on-task behavior was also observed to determine its relationship to teachers' levels of implementation integrity. Results showed the BEA to be an effective and valid means of identifying an effective support method for 3 of the 4 teacher-student dyads. Although task engagement increased for all students to above 90%, it correlated with implementation integrity for only 2 of 4 dyads. Implications for future research and clinical practice will be discussed. |
|
Implementing a Function-Based Social Skills Program in a General Education Classroom |
Domain: Service Delivery |
LEFKI KOUREA (University of North Carolina at Charlotte) |
|
Abstract: This presentation presents the results of an experimental research study conducted in a second-grade classroom, which included students with behavioral problems. The study examined the effects of a function-based social skills intervention program on the disruptive behavior and academic performance of four male students identified at risk for school failure. A social skills instruction with a self-monitoring strategy comprised the intervention program. Results of the study showed a positive functional relationship between student behavior and intervention program. Student off-task behaviours were reduced by at least 53% during classroom observation period. Student academic performance improved by at least one letter grade. Effect sizes were strong. Presenters will address the educational implications of the study and they will provide information on (1) the importance of function-based interventions in classroom settings and (2) the implementation steps followed to develop effective social skills instruction and self-monitoring system. Research study limitations will also be addressed. |
|
|
|
|
|
Special and Ethical Considerations in Behavioral Feeding Programs |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
213AB (CC) |
Area: PRA/CSE; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Melissa L. Olive (Applied Behavioral Strategies) |
CE Instructor: Melissa L. Olive, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Children with and without disabilities may encounter feeding difficulties. This difficulties can include but are not limited to food selectivity by texture, color, and manner of presentation. Feeding difficulties may also include rigidity related to the feeder and/or meal time location. This session will provide a discussion of the issues related to the provision of behavioral feeding services to children with and without disabilities. The first speaker will identify some of the barriers to behavioral feeding programs. She will then identify strategies for reducing the response effort for parents. The second speaker will discuss the importance of individualizing the assessment and intervention process. For example, various medical assessments may be needed prior to the onset of services. Additionally, parents and children have distinct preferences that should be considered when selecting intervention components. Finally, planning and ensuring generalization and maintenance of feeding skills is critical. Thus, the third speaker will identify strategies that have been used successfully to promote both maintenance and generalization. The discussant will summarize the issues and facilitate question and answers from participants. |
Keyword(s): ethical issues, feeding |
|
Possible Risks of Behavioral Feeding Programs |
STEPHANIE REINOSO (Creative Interventions) |
Abstract: In the process of completing a master's thesis on behavioral feeding, the author encountered several risks to the therapy process. This paper will present the study, identify the risks encountered, discuss how to prevent and address risks, and discuss strategies for future research. |
|
Addressing Maintenance and Generalization within Behavioral Feeding Programs |
ABIGAIL HOLT (Applied Behavioral Strategies LLC) |
Abstract: This author coordinates an outpatient behavioral feeding clinic. She will identify strategies used to address maintenance and generalization of acquired feeding skills. Case studies will be used to illustrate the effectiveness of intervention as well as maintenance and generalization. |
|
|
|
|
Changing Neurobiology With Behavior: How Expectation of Reward and Punishment Influence Learning and Remembering Via Distinct Brain Systems |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
006AB (CC) |
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory |
Instruction Level: Basic |
CE Instructor: Edward K. Morris, Ph.D. |
Chair: Edward K. Morris (The University of Kansas) |
R. ALISON ADCOCK (Duke University) |
Dr. R. Alison Adcock is an assistant professor of psychiatry, neurobiology, psychology, and neuroscience at Duke University, and core faculty in the Center for Cognitive Neuroscience. Dr. Adcock received a B.A. in psychology from Emory University with one year of training at St. Hilda's College Oxford and an M.D./Ph.D. in neurobiology from Yale University. She was trained in general psychiatry at the University of California San Francisco. Her research fellowship integrated clinical work at UCSF and the San Francisco Veterans Affairs Medical Center with human neuroimaging research at Stanford. Work in her laboratory aims to understand how the neural circuit implementation of motivation--in particular motivation to learn--influences the explanatory models of the world we construct, and in turn, behavior. Her laboratory uses conventional and real-time fMRI, pharmacological challenges, physiology, and behavior to understand how the neuromodulatory systems involved in motivated behavior shape long-term memory. The work extends from learning in the laboratory to real-world exploration of space, to collaborations funded in Singapore to examine these functional systems in youth at risk for severe mental illness. A recent National Institutes of Health Biobehavioral Research Awards for Innovative New Scientists (BRAINS) funds efforts to translate her basic findings about memory enhancement into "behavioral neurostimulation" strategies for better mental health and educational practice. |
Abstract: Although researchers often discuss how the brain produces behavior, it is also true that behavior and experience influence the brain. Dr. Adcock's research has shown that distinct motivational states can be elicited by expectation of reward or punishment, and influence learning and memory via distinct brain systems. These different motivational states correspond to differential activity and connectivity in brain circuits implicated not only in motivation but also in learning and memory. This selectivity in memory mechanisms, in turn, determines whether the information in memory is detailed versus general or flexible versus rigid. Dr. Adcock's recent work has shown that people can self-induce activation of in neuromodulatory systems capable of broadly influencing brain function and thus shaping learning during therapy--a finding with implications for the treatment of mental illness. |
Target Audience: Clinicians and basic scientists. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to: (1) name at least two constraints on the development of pre-emptive interventions; (2) describe at least two cognitive foundations for learning-based therapies that involve the medial temporal lobe memory systems; (3) describe two different mechanisms of motivational control of medial temporal lobe function and discuss their implications for learning-based therapies; (4) name one therapeutic implication of the critical role of dopamine (and other neuromodulators) in neural plasticity; and (5) describe two methods of modulating neural plasticity that could be used for targeted enhancement of learning during a therapeutic experience. |
Keyword(s): learning, motivational states, neural circuits, reward/punishment |
|
|
|
|
From Analysis to Application: Using Multiply Controlled Verbal Behavior to Teach Generalized Question Discrimination to Children With Autism |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
Grand Ballroom C3 (CC) |
Area: VBC; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Judah B. Axe, Ph.D. |
Chair: Judah B. Axe (Simmons College) |
FRANCESCA DEGLI ESPINOSA (Private practice) |
Francesca degli Espinosa has worked with children with autism for nearly 20 years. Her clinical and research interests focus on advanced applications of contemporary analyses of verbal behavior (Horne & Lowe, 1996; Lowenkron, 1998, 2008; Michael, Palmer, & Sundberg, 2011) not only as a basis for teaching generalized verbal repertoires, but, thereby, as a means of minimizing the need to teach specific individual verbal responses. During her time as the University of Southampton's lead clinician for the first United Kingdom-based early intensive behavioral intervention outcome study (Remington et al., 2007), Dr. degli Espinosa developed the Early Behavioral Intervention Curriculum (EBIC) as a framework for intervention derived from functional analyses of language--work that subsequently formed a principal focus for her doctoral thesis (degli Espinosa, 2011). She currently teaches verbal behavior across a range of BACB-approved European postgraduate courses and remains committed to broadening international knowledge and understanding of just how meaningfully ABA can improve people's lives. She provides applied behavioral interventions for families and educational institutions both in the UK and in Italy, where she has mentored many of her home country's currently certified BCBAs and continues to supervise Italian behavior analysts of the future. Dr. degli Espinosa lives in Southampton, UK, with her partner and three children. |
Abstract: Although in recent years an increasing number of single-case studies have focused on teaching language skills to children with autism using Skinner's (1957) analysis of verbal behavior, the majority have concentrated on establishing primary operants at the single-word level. Nevertheless, from 2 to 3 years of age, typically developing children naturally demonstrate generalized and multiply controlled verbal behavior, including autoclitics: They are, for example, able to provide full-sentence answers to novel questions about ongoing and past events, to describe their own experiences, and to respond to a diversity of novel instructions. One of the greatest challenges currently facing applied behavior analysts remains, therefore, how to teach such complex verbal behavior to children with autism. This presentation will propose that contemporary analyses of multiple control (Lowenkron, 1998; Michael, Palmer, & Sundberg, 2011) offer a conceptually coherent practical basis for the development and curricular organization of procedures to meet this challenge. A program of instruction will be presented in which language objectives are organized along a continuum of increasingly complex stimulus control, and discussion thereby provided of how best to move from establishment of basic vocabulary in primary operants to mastery of complex verbal conditional discriminations across both primary and secondary operants. Special emphasis will be placed on the role of autoclitic frames and intraverbal control in teaching generalized question answering at the tact and intraverbal level and as means of avoiding the discrimination errors that commonly result from teaching specific individual responses to specific individual questions. |
Keyword(s): autism, conditional discrimination, language, multiple control |
|
|
|
|
Best Practices in Intensive Behavioral Intervention: Increasing the Efficiency of Teaching Procedures |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
217D (CC) |
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Ivy M. Chong Crane (Florida Institute of Technology: The Scott Center) |
Discussant: Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento) |
CE Instructor: Ivy M. Chong Crane, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Research in the area of intensive behavioral intervention continues to examine methods to improve learning outcomes for individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorders. Especially in the area of early intervention, many questions remain unanswered about the types of children for which certain procedures may be most beneficial. An emerging area of research aims to improve or refine the efficiency of teaching procedures. Presenters in this symposium will provide data from four studies conducted through university autism centers. The first study examines the extent to which pre-arranged stimulus sets produced untrained relations (learning without explicit teaching). The second study systematically evaluates the extent to which multiple exemplar training (MEI) using videos can lead to rule derivation. The third study compares two variations of the stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure on novel vocalizations. Finally, the fourth study examines the effect of generalized imitation training on functional speech acquisition during Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) Training. Dr. Caio Miguel will provide remarks as our discussant. |
Keyword(s): autism, best practice, emergent relations |
|
Evaluation of stimulus equivalence training to produce class mergers |
Ivy M. Chong Crane Crane (Florida Institute of Technology: The Scott Center), JEANINE R TANZ (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment at Florida I), Michael E. Kelley (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: Using a multiple probe nested into a multiple baseline design, stimulus equivalence procedures were used to teach three children with ASD categories and their corresponding items using pre-arranged stimuli sets. The stimulus equivalence procedures produced untrained relations (learning without explicit training) for all three participants. For at least two the of the participants, class merger (see fig. 1) was demonstrated after teaching two sets of associated stimuli. For the third participant, additional teaching was required. Results indicate that stimulus equivalence (i.e., equivalence based instruction) procedures are an efficient way to produce generalization. Participant characteristics and implications for practice are discussed. |
|
Teaching Children with Autism to Derive Rules |
MELISSA NISSEN (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sarah A. Lechago (University of Houston-Clear Lake) |
Abstract: Rule-governed behavior is behavior that occurs from contact with the rules that describe the contingency, rather than prior contact with contingency itself (Skinner, 1969). Following and deriving rules are important skills (Bentall & Lowe, 1987; Rosenfarb, I. S., Newland, M. C., Brannon, S. E., & Howey, D. S., 1992; Vaughn, 1985). This study employed a multiple-baseline design across participants to investigate the effects of multiple exemplar instruction (MEI) using videos to teach rule derivation to two children with autism. Thus far, the results demonstrate that the MEI procedure was effective for teaching rule derivation to both participants, and emergent responding was observed to untrained sets of rules. However, in the dyad probes, only one participant derived rules independently, while the other participant did not. Additional data are being collected with four more participants. |
|
A Comparison Of Two Variations Of A Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure On Novel And Infrequent Vocalizations Of Children With Autism |
ANDREW BULLA (Western Michigan University), Jessica E. Frieder (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Despite the growth in a behavioral technology for the treatment of autism, a small population of individuals with autism fails to develop functional language. One procedure used for inducing vocalizations in non-verbal children is a stimulus-stimulus pairing (SSP) procedure. In an SSP procedure a vocalization is paired with a reinforcer over a period of time to establish the vocalization as a learned reinforcer, and any utterance of the target vocalization is believed to be automatically reinforced thus increasing the frequency of the vocalization. Past research has yielded mixed results with the SSP procedure, and more research is warranted to identify the key components of the procedure that are necessary to produce an effect. This study extended the literature in two ways, by (1) comparing two variations of the SSP procedure; a 5:1 condition in which the target vocalization was emitted five times and presented with one delivery of a reinforcer and a 1:1 condition in which the target vocalization was emitted one time with the delivery of one reinforcer, and (2) comparing the effects of a SSP procedure on the frequency of novel and low frequency vocalization. Results suggest that both pairing procedures were effective in increasing target vocalizations over baseline levels, and target vocalizations could be brought under the control of more direct acting contingencies. Additionally, results suggest that infrequent vocalizations may be increased to higher frequencies more easily than the novel vocalization. Implications for applied work will be discussed, and related to previous research findings. |
|
Effects of Generalized Imitation Training on Functional Speech Acquisition During Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) Training |
MINDY NEWHOUSE (Western Michigan University), Jessica E. Frieder (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated that some children with autism exhibit increases in speech during Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) training, but factors influencing this speech gain have not been widely studied. Some research suggests a link between motor as well as vocal imitation and language acquisition in general. This study examined generalized motor imitation as one potential factor influencing speech gains during PECS training. Participants included children diagnosed with autism with no previous history of formal motor imitation training prior to the study. Participants were divided into two groups, one that received PECS training without any prior imitation training and one which received imitation training prior to PECS training. A multiple baseline design across subjects design was implemented within each group to examine the effects of these procedures on vocal mands, echoics, and other forms of speech. Results of the study will be highlighted and implications for utilizing this information to better inform early intervention practices aimed at improving the communication skills of children with autism will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Recent Innovations in Procedures for Teaching Children with Autism |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
217C (CC) |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children) |
Discussant: Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children) |
CE Instructor: Chata A. Dickson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Four innovative teaching procedures for children with autism spectrum disorders will be presented in this symposium of empirical papers. The first paper, by Farber, Dube, Chiaccio, and Dickson details a procedure for teaching compound matching, addressing the common problem of stimulus overselectivity. The second paper, by Whalen, Casale, Stahmer, Mittal, Small, and Quicho describes effects of an innovative video game with embedded video modeling on social understanding. The third paper, by Niemand and MacDonald, applies matrix training instructional design to teach a general repertoire of recipe following in adolescents with autism spectrum disorders. Finally, the fourth paper, by Weiss, McKay, Dickson, and Ahearn, identifies and compares effective prompting procedures; and discusses the relative simplicity of implementing these procedures. Attendees who are charged with education children with autism spectrum disorders should come away with this symposium with awareness of innovative developments in teaching children in this population, and these innovations should be directly applicable to their own work. |
Keyword(s): autism, stimulus overselectivity, teaching, video modeling |
|
Teaching Compound Matching with a Sorting-to-Matching Procedure |
RACHEL FARBER (University of Massachusetts Medical School-Shriver), William V. Dube (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Individuals with autism often have difficulty attending to multiple features in a compound stimulus (e.g., pictures with multiple objects, words with multiple letters, or signs with multiple symbols). This restricted attending can be detrimental to learning. Participants were 4 children with autism who had low to intermediate accuracy scores (49-84%) on a computer-presented simultaneous matching-to-sample (SMTS) task with compound stimuli. Sample stimuli had 2 elements (e.g., pictures of a chair and tree), the correct comparison was identical to the sample, and each incorrect comparison had one feature in common with the sample (e.g., chair and sun, airplane and tree). A tabletop sorting-to-matching procedure was used to teach compound SMTS. There were 5 steps in the procedure, and an additional prompted scanning step was imposed if progress stalled. The first step required the participants to sort 3 single pictures; subsequent steps gradually changed the task requirements until it simulated the compound SMTS task. Following mastery of the sorting-to-matching procedure, the participants were retested on the computer-presented compound SMTS task; accuracy improved (93-99%) for all 4 children. This procedure illustrates one way to expand attending to multiple features of a complex stimulus. |
|
Development of a Video Game Using Video Modeling and Embedded Discrete Trials to Teach Social Understanding to Children with ASDs |
Christina Whalen (West Health Institute), MICHAEL CASALE (West Health Institute), Aubyn C. Stahmer (Rady Children Hospital), Asim Mittal (West Health Institute), Matthew Small (West Health Institute), Jovy Quicho (West Health Institute) |
Abstract: While video modeling has been demonstrated as an effective procedure, it is often difficult and time-consuming. Research has also shown that children can learn through characters and that gaming can help facilitate executive function skills. With the intent of developing a game that could potentially teach social skills to children with ASDs, a series of studies were completed to determine naturally occurring social behaviors in neuro-typical and ASD children (n=24), assess usability of a new ABA-based video game (n=16), and assess the feasibility, potential effectiveness, and generalizability through single-subject research (n=12). Data obtained through each phase drives the development and changes are made as the data indicates is necessary through an iterative development process. Observational data helped to establish the behaviors to target. Video modeling, embedded discrete trials, prompt fading, thinning of reinforcement, and naturalistic behavioral interventions are the procedures used. Animated peer models are used in the game with real childrens voices in the social scenes to enhance generalization. Data from the iterative process, a demonstration, and initial findings will be presented from all 3 studies. Implications for increasing accessibility, motivation, and data efficiency will be discussed, as well as potential impact on cost for existing social skills programs. |
|
Teaching Cooking Skills Using Matrix Training and Video Prompting |
LAUREN-ASHLEIGH NIEMAND (The New England Center for Children), Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to teach cooking skills to children with autism using matrix training in combination with video prompting. A non-concurrent multiple baseline design across two participants was used. Participants were first taught to imitate cooking related actions on objects using matrix training and video prompting. The video prompt was then removed. If recombinative generalization occurred with untrained actions, then training began with the subsequent matrix. Three different 3x3 matrices were used to teach the various cooking skills. After mastery and recombinative generalization occurred for each matrix, the students were presented with three picture recipes (brownies, pudding and rice) that included untrained matrix relations and instructed to complete the recipes. Interobserver agreement was collected in over 50 percent of sessions and ranged between 96-100% agreement. Results indicated that matrix training was effective in teaching cooking skills to children diagnosed with autism. The participants were able to complete the three picture recipes as a result of the cooking skills taught during matrix training and video prompting. |
|
A Comparison of Prompting Hierarchies in the Acquisition of Play Skills |
JULIE S. WEISS (New England Center for Children), Julie McKay (Cambridge Public Schools), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: The purpose of the study was to compare the effectiveness and efficiency of prompting hierarchies on the rate of acquisition of a behavior chain to teach play skills. Two comparisons were made: manual guidance with constant delay vs. most-to-least physical prompting with constant delay and (b) manual guidance with constant delay vs. modeling with constant delay. Three individuals diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder participated, and the dependent variable was the number of sessions and number of trials to acquisition for two 12-step play construction figures. Each session consisted of one probe trial and 10 training trials; generalization probes across a novel teacher and one new setting were conducted after acquisition. Results for the first experiment showed that both teaching procedures were effective. Results from the second comparison also demonstrated effective teaching procedures. Findings generalized across new teachers and settings. Inter-observer agreement data were collected in at least 33% of sessions and averaged 96%. Procedural integrity data were collected in at least 33% of sessions and averaged 99%. |
|
|
|
|
Empirical Evidence of Treatment Outcomes from All Four Modules of the PEAK relational training system |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
217A (CC) |
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas) |
Discussant: Seth W. Whiting (Yale University) |
CE Instructor: Jacob H. Daar, M.A. |
Abstract: Behavior analytic language instruction for children with a diagnosis of autism has traditionally focused on the reinforcement of psycholinguistic (expressive vs. receptive) targets or elementary verbal operants such as mands, tacts, echoics, and intraverbals. While generally successful in establishing functional repertoires of basic communication, therapies targeting these basic language units often fail to provide adequate learning histories necessary to achieve flexible and generative language use. One reason for this deficit may be due to the over-emphasis of direct training contingencies across a limited range of verbal skills and the lack of explicit generalization goals within language repertoires. Furthermore, methods to produce stimulus equivalence that promote the emergence of symbolic and generative language have remained virtually unincorporated in behavior analysis’s most popular language curriculums. In an effort to address these issues, the PEAK Relational Training System was developed. PEAK is a verbal behavior and academic curriculum designed to emphasize learning through direct contingencies, generalization learning, stimulus equivalence, and relational responding. The current presentations will present field research collected on each of these learning modalities as described in the PEAK curriculum and discuss the importance of incorporating these types of contemporary behavior analytic concepts into current verbal behavior therapy treatment programs. |
Keyword(s): Autism, Language Acquisition, PEAK, Verbal Behavior |
|
Direct Training Module: Evaluating the Efficacy of the PEAK Relational Training System using a Randomized Treatment/Control Design of Children with Autism |
AUTUMN N. MCKEEL (Aurora University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale) |
Abstract: The present investigation sought to examine the efficacy of the instructional curriculum described in the Direct Training Module of the PEAK Relational Training System on the language repertoires, as measured by the PEAK Direct Assessment, of children diagnosed with autism or related developmental disabilities. Twenty-seven children diagnosed with pervasive developmental disorders were evaluated using the protocol Direct Assessment prior assignment to a control and experimental group. Participants in the experimental group received additional language instruction derived from the curriculum programs of the Direct Training Module while participants in the control group received treatment as usual. Both groups were then re-assessed using the PEAK Direct Assessment after 1 month. A repeated-measures ANOVA indicated that participants in the experimental group made significantly more gains in language skills than those who were assigned to the control group, F(1, 25) = 11.394, p = .002. Implications for evidence-based practice and future research are discussed. |
|
Generalization Module: How PEAK Assesses and Promotes the Emergence of Untrained Verbal Behavior |
JORDAN BELISLE (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Caleb Stanley (The University of Mississippi), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Promoting the Emergence of Advanced Knowledge Relational Training System (PEAK) is an approach to language development that synthesizes our current understanding of complex verbal behavior. The PEAK-Generalization (PEAK-G) module is the second iteration of PEAK, which is designed to promote the emergence of a generalized verbal repertoire in individuals with- or without- disabilities. Psychometric data suggest that PEAK-G is a valid and reliable measure of an individual’s generalized verbal repertoire, and that generalization is a learning modality that interacts with direct training systematically. Participant scores on PEAK-G have been shown to predict intelligence and autism severity, and normalization of the PEAK-G provides a comparative tool for clinicians working with individuals with disabilities. Outcome data at the single-subject level suggest that the PEAK-G curriculum is effective in training simple and complex verbal behaviors, as well as in promoting the systematic emergence of untrained verbal responding. The existing data have several implications for our understanding of verbal generalization as a learning process, and provide avenues for future research. |
|
Equivalence Module: Using the PEAK To Promote Equivalence Responding |
KYLE ROWSEY (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Jordan Belisle (Southern Illinois University), Stephanie Negrelli (student), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Over the last few decades, advancements in behavior analysts' understanding of learning and language have led to new methodologies which may increase the efficiency with which education is delivered. One such advancement is stimulus equivalence which utilizes training procedures that promote the derivation of skills without direct training. While the effectiveness of stimulus equivalence is well supported within the literature, no packaged treatment or assessment protocols have been researched within the field of behavior analysis. The Promoting the Emergence of Advanced Knowledge Relational Training System (PEAK) is one such package. The PEAK is an assessment and curriculum protocol which utilizes behavior analytic principles to train academic, language, and social skills. The PEAK incorporates basic behavior analytic research including Skinner's Verbal Behavior as well as contemporary behavior analytic principles such as stimulus equivalence and Relational Frame Theory. The current study sought to investigate the effectiveness of the PEAK: Stimulus Equivalence Module in training novel skills to individuals with disabilities. The results indicated gains in all skills taught using stimulus equivalence procedures from the PEAK. |
|
Transformation Module: Incorporating Relational Frame Theory into skills training using the PEAK Relational Training System |
JACOB H. DAAR (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jordan Belisle (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Since its inception, practitioners of behavior analysis have striven to understand all aspects of human behavior. One of the more daunting tasks has been the study one particular area of the complex human repertoire: verbal behavior. While some progress has been made in this area, research on the application of behavior analytic techniques to both understand and teach verbal behavior in applied settings remain lacking. One contemporary approach, Relational Frame Theory (RFT), provides a promising base for launching behavior analysis into a greater understanding of both the theory and practice of teaching and understanding verbal behavior. The current study sought to extend the applied research on RFT incorporating programs from the PEAK Relational Training System: Transformation Module (PEAK). Several advanced language skills were taught to individuals with autism supporting the utility of RFT as a basis for training procedures as well as the effectiveness of the PEAK in training skills to individuals with autism. Data collected in the course of training derived relational responding will be presented along with discussion concerning the methodological and logistical aspects of teaching such complex language. |
|
|
|
|
Advancements in the Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Texas Ballroom Salon C (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: CBM/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Danielle N. Dolezal (Seattle Children's Hospital and The Autism Center) |
Discussant: Sean D. Casey (The Iowa Department of Education) |
CE Instructor: Danielle N. Dolezal, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Children diagnosed with pediatric feeding disorders present with a variety of difficulties such as food refusal, difficulties advancing texture, and restrictive diets. In the treatment of these disorders, a number of consequent procedures have been shown to be effective. Given the heterogeneity of the population, further advancements in targeted procedures to improve outcomes are necessary. This symposium will present data that exemplify innovative treatments that improve outcomes for these children. The first investigation evaluates a skill training protocol to increase oral-motor skills and improve the consumption in one child. In the second investigation, the authors evaluated the influence of response effort, quality of reinforcement, and the interaction of these two dimensions on advancing texture in a small child. Study 3 examined the utility of telehealth in training parents to implement interventions to treat food selectivity. Results suggested this may be a suitable method for training parents to expand their childrens diets. The final investigation evaluated the impact of positive reinforcement in the treatment of feeding disorders and began to identify for whom the inclusion of this treatment component was beneficial. These studies will be discussed in terms of variables that influence the development of empirically derived treatments for pediatric feeding disorders. |
Keyword(s): feeding difficulties, reinforcement quality, response effort, telehealth |
|
The Effects of Skills Training on Consumption and Preference in Children with Pediatric Feeding Disorders |
ASHLEE MATRIGALI (Clinic 4 Kidz), Meeta R. Patel (Clinic 4 Kidz) |
Abstract: Children with feeding problems display a variety of inappropriate behaviors to avoid eating. Avoidance behaviors are often related to negative experiences that have been paired with eating (i.e., gagging, choking, and vomiting). However, some children, especially those who do not consume food orally but instead via feeding tube for prolonged periods of time, may not develop the adequate oral motor skills to manage different textures or types of food. These skill deficits may increase the aversive properties of eating. To address these skill deficits it is common to implement a skill training protocol to train the necessary oral motor skills. Therefore, the purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of a training protocol to increase consumption of fruits. In addition, we evaluated the effects of the training protocol on preference. A preference assessment was conducted pre and post training to evaluate preference shifts. Independent consumption increased for the first fruit after training occurred for that food. Interestingly, generalization occurred for the other two fruits and training was not necessary. The results from the post-skills training preference assessment indicated an increase in preference for all fruits presented. These data are discussed in relation to negative reinforcement and establishing operations. |
|
Outpatient Evaluation of the Effects of Response Effort and Quality of Reinforcement on Increasing Bite Acceptance of Food |
BROOKE M. HOLLAND (The University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (The University of Iowa), Linda J. Cooper-Brown (The University of Iowa), Ashley Willms (The University of Iowa), Kelly M. Schieltz (The University Of Iowa) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the influence of response effort, quality of reinforcement, and the possible interaction of these two dimensions on food consumption. The participant, Neil, was a 35-month-old male who had a history of feeding difficulties. Response effort was defined as the combined and regulated oral-motor manipulations required to consume different types and textures of food. Quality of reinforcement was defined as the type of presentation of a particular food. Bites accepted were the dependent variable. Interobserver agreement was assessed across 42.4% of feeding sessions with an average IOA of 97.8%.The evaluation was conducted within two phases: Phase I, conducted within a reversal design, and Phase II, conducted within a changing criterion design. . Phase I results demonstrated quality and effort influenced bites accepted. Specifically, Neil accepted bites of the blended foods (medium effort) via spoon and graham cracker self-fed (higher quality with high effort), but he did not accept bites of fork-mashed foods (high effort). Phase II results demonstrated that the stimulus fading plan of gradually increasing the blended texture to a fork-mashed texture was successful in increasing bites accepted of the high effort food. |
|
Examining the Utility of Telehealth in Training Parents to Implement Interventions to Treat Food Selectivity |
Abby Greif (Florida Institute of Technology and The Scott Cent), ALISON M. BETZ (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: We trained 4 parents of children with food selectivity to implement treatment procedures during mealtime. Prior to training all children engaged in disruptive behaviors such as vocal protests, aggression, and refusal behaviors (e.g. covering mouth and head turns) when presented with a nonpreferred or novel food. A Behavior Skills Training model was used to train parents to implement a treatment package consisting of 3-step prompting, differential reinforcement, and escape extinction. During training parents were first provided with a description of the protocol via didactic training and role playing with the researchers (in vivo) and had an opportunity to ask questions. The researchers then provided immediate feedback during mealtimes via telehealth. Results showed increases in parents’ appropriate implementation of mealtime procedures as well as increases in appropriate child behaviors. Further, high levels of parent integrity maintained following the removal of immediate feedback. Overall, results suggest telehealth may be a suitable method for training parents to implement interventions to treat food selectivity. |
|
On the Effects of Differential and Noncontingent Reinforcement in the Treatment of Feeding Disorders |
AARON D. LESSER (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Suzanne M. Milnes (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jennifer M. Kozisek (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska), Cathleen C. Piazza (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center) |
Abstract: Clinicians commonly use positive reinforcement in conjunction with escape extinction (EE) in the treatment of feeding disorders. Some evidence suggests EE is effective to increase acceptance with or without positive reinforcement; however, the addition of positive reinforcement to EE may result in lower levels of inappropriate mealtime behavior (IMB) and/or negative vocalizations for some children (Piazza, Patel, Gulotta, Sevin, & Layer, 2003; Reed et al., 2004). The purpose of the current investigation was to further evaluate the impact of positive reinforcement in the treatment of feeding disorders and begin to identify for whom the addition of positive reinforcement is beneficial. We conducted an assessment comparing differential (DRA), noncontingent (NCR), and no reinforcement on the acceptance, IMB, and negative vocalizations of 31 children with feeding disorders. We observed no difference for acceptance across all conditions for all children and lower IMB and/or negative vocalizations in NCR for 29% of children. We later evaluated NCR or DRA with and without EE on the same behaviors. If we observed no benefit to NCR or DRA across all behaviors during the earlier assessment, we again observed no benefit when NCR or DRA was combined with EE. Additional findings and implications will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Behavioral Economics of Chronic Disease: The Role of Discounting Process in Health Decisions |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Texas Ballroom Salon B (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: CBM/EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas) |
Discussant: Suzanne H. Mitchell (Oregon Health & Science University) |
CE Instructor: Derek D. Reed, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Since the inception of behavioral economics in the early 1980s, the intersection of behavioral science and microeconomic principles has yielded novel insights into health-related behaviors and their promotion. Early applications primarily explore the abuse liability of pharmacological agents in nonhumans. However, as behavioral scientists began translating behavioral economics outside the operant chamber, researchers and policymakers soon discovered that behavioral economic principles and applications could be taken to scale to inform public health policies and preventative healthcare. This symposium highlights cutting-edge applications of behavioral economic principles and procedures to health decision making. The presentations featured in this symposium range from basic decision making studies on episodic future thinking regarding cancer to applications of mindfulness to alter delay discounting of food. Despite the novel applications across each of the four presentations, a common thread unifying these studies is the reliance on discounting processes and assays to evaluate health decision making under uncertainty or in the face of intertemporal tradeoffs common attributes in most real-world health decisions. These use-inspired studies underscore the translational utility of behavioral economics for health promotion and advancing the fields understand of healthy decision making. |
Keyword(s): behavioral economics, discounting, health, mindfulness |
|
The Effects of Modified Episodic Future Thinking on Risky Long-Term Health Decisions |
BRENT KAPLAN (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Many of our everyday choices are associated with outcomes that are both delayed and probabilistic. The temporal attention hypothesis suggests that individuals’ decision making can be improved by focusing attention to temporally distal events and reducing the desire for proximate outcomes. Viewing discounting this framework implies that environmental manipulations that expand the limits of an individual’s temporal perspective by bringing focus on temporally distal outcomes, and thereby reducing present bias, may alter his/her degree of discounting. One such manipulation, episodic future thinking, has shown to successfully lower discount rates. Several questions remain as to the applicability of episodic future thinking to domains other than temporal discounting. The present experiments examine the effects of a modified episodic future thinking procedure on probability discounting in the context of both a delayed health gain and loss. Eleven college-aged participants responded on a probabilistic discounting task when the outcome was either a health gain or loss. Results indicate the modified episodic future thinking procedure effectively altered 9 out of the 11 participants’ degree of discounting in the predicted directions and lend further support to the temporal attention hypothesis. |
|
Measurement and Validation of a Novel Delay Discounting Measure for Hypothetical Food: The Food Kirby |
ERIN B. RASMUSSEN (Idaho State University), Kelsie Hendrickson (Idaho State University), Steven R. Lawyer (Idaho State University) |
Abstract: This study established a brief measure of delay discounting for food, the Food Choice Questionnaire (FCQ), and compared it to other established measures of food and money discounting. Over 140 participants completed either two hypothetical money discounting measures [a computerized monetary adjusting amount (AA) procedure or the Monetary Choice questionnaire (MCQ)] or two hypothetical food discounting (a computerized food AA procedure or the FCQ) measures. Monetary discounting measures highly correlated, replicating previous work. The novel FCQ yielded highly consistent data that strongly correlated with the AA food discounting task. There were also significant magnitude effects across the FCQ and the MCQ. Finally, individuals with higher PBF discounted food more steeply than individuals with lower PBF in the FCQ and AA food discounting procedure. This study is the first to show that the Food Kirby (FCQ) yielded consistent data that strongly correlated to an established measure of food discounting and is sensitive to PBF. |
|
Costs, Benefits, and the Propensity to Take Pills: On the Behavioral Economics of Medication Adherence in Multiple Sclerosis Patients |
DAVID P. JARMOLOWICZ (The University of Kansas), Jared M. Bruce (University of Missouri-Kansas City), Amanda S. Bruce (University of Missouri-Kansas City), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Discounting analyses have robustly contributed to our understanding of clinical disorders such as addiction, problematic gambling, and obesity. Importantly, individuals rates of discounting predict the progression of addiction and the success of addiction treatments. That success suggests that discounting analyses may help predict health behavior in other clinical populations. For example, individuals with Multiple Sclerosis (MS) frequently have low levels of medication adherence. Predicting which individuals will have adherence difficulties may help direct treatment resources to those that need it the most. The current study developed a novel probability discounting paradigm which assessed the effects of differing probabilities of medication efficacy and side effects in a sample of MS patients whom typically were (n=35) or where not (n=35) adherent with their treatments. Discounting was both different across groups and was predictive of group membership, even when accounting for other MS related variables (fatigue, depression, etc.). |
|
Mindful Eating Training Reduces Food Discounting Rates in Adolescents and Adults |
KELSIE HENDRICKSON (Idaho State University), Erin B. Rasmussen (Idaho State University) |
Abstract: The present study examined the effects of a brief mindful eating training on temporal discounting rates (preferences between smaller sooner and larger later outcomes) for hypothetical food and money. In Session 1, 348 participants (176 adults and 174 adolescents) completed a variety a modified Food Choice Questionnaire (FCQ) and Monetary Choice Questionnaire (MCQ) as baseline measures of food and money discounting, respectively. In Session 2, participants were randomly assigned to one of three conditions: a 50-min mindful eating workshop, a 50-min clip of a DVD on nutrition, or an unstructured activity. All participants completed the discounting tasks for food and money again as a post-manipulation measure. Individuals in the mindful eating group evidenced lower rates of food, but not money, discounting after the training, compared to baseline. Participants in the two control conditions did not exhibit changes in their discounting patterns. This study replicates our research with mindful eating and discounting with adults and extends our findings to adolescents. |
|
|
|
|
Issues in and Application of Meta-Analyses and Syntheses of Single-Case Experimental Research in Autism and Developmental Disabilities |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
214B (CC) |
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jennifer Ganz (Texas A&M University) |
Discussant: Kimberly Vannest (Texas A & M University) |
CE Instructor: Jennifer Ganz, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Recently, the field has seen an increase in the publication of meta-analyses and systematic reviews of treatments for people with autism spectrum disorder and developmental disabilities, which are critical in providing practitioners and other stakeholders with information regarding for whom and in what contexts particular treatments are most effective. However, many controversies remain regarding these advances. To that end, this symposium will include conceptual and applied presentations and discussions by nationally/internationally-recognized researchers who publish cutting-edge work in meta-analysis and synthesis of single-case research and in autism spectrum and developmental disabilities. The four included presentations will cover current debates in the use of meta-analysis and research synthesis, effects of measurement methods on estimation of effect sizes, and two meta-analyses of studies on caregiver- and family member-implemented interventions. Single-case researchers will gain an understanding of the state of the science in regard to the use of meta-analyses and research syntheses to evaluate single-case experimental research in autism spectrum and developmental disabilities. |
Keyword(s): Effect size, Meta-analysis, Research synthesis, Single-case experiment |
|
Current Issues in Research Synthesis and Meta-Analysis of Single-Case Experiments on Autism Treatment |
OLIVER WENDT (Purdue University) |
Abstract: For single-case researchers in autism and their audiences it is critical to stay informed on current advances and issues related to research synthesis of single-case designs (SCDs). This presentation will highlight the current status of three ongoing debates: 1. Critical appraisal: Evaluating the quality of SCDs is crucial for research synthesis and documenting evidence-based practice. Seven different checklists and evaluation scales have recently emerged for this purpose. The strengths and weaknesses of each will be discussed alongside the results of a field trial comparing their performance on assessing study quality. 2. Selection of effect size metrics: Controversy exists as to which techniques are most appropriate to analyze between-phase differences in SCDs and derive meaningful effect size estimates. Two general strategies have been proposed: Regression approaches versus non-overlap metrics. Advantages and disadvantages of each will be outlined and scenarios will be described when one approach is preferable over another. 3. Mixed methods synthesis: Autism researchers are increasingly confronted with heterogeneous forms of research evidence including both quantitative and qualitative designs; these can be combined using a mixed methods approach. Staying abreast of these recent methodological advances will assist with the production of high quality syntheses of autism treatment research. |
|
The Effects of Interval-Based Measurement on the Estimation of Effect Sizes |
JENNIFER LEDFORD (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: Interval-based measurement systems (partial interval, whole interval, and momentary time sampling systems) are widely used in behavioral research. These systems result in different types of predictable or random measurement error (e.g., partial interval recording systematically overestimates occurrence). Historically, this error was considered acceptable because research suggested it might not interfere with accurate determination of the existence of a functional relation, given appropriate measurement constraints (e.g., small intervals). However, the use of interval systems may result in biased effect sizes that are not directly comparable to effect sizes derived from direct measurement. The presenter will provide a brief overview of interval-based measurement systems and their error patterns and will show several examples of how the use of data collected using interval-based systems can result in effect size estimates that are not comparable to those derived from duration recording. Suggestions will be provided for syntheses including both interval-based and non-interval-based systems. |
|
A Meta-Analytic Review of Single-Case Studies on Primary Caregiver-Implemented Communication Interventions with Individuals with ASD |
EE REA HONG (Texas A&M University), Jennifer Ganz (Texas A&M University), Leslie Neely (Texas A&M University), Margot Boles (Texas A&M University), Stephanie Gerow (Texas A&M University), Jennifer Ninci (Texas A&M University) |
Abstract: Children with ASD who acquire spoken language by five to six years old tend to have better long-term outcomes, such as high rate of employment, better academic outcomes and positive social relationships (Howlin & Charman, 2011). For this reason, providing early and intensive social and communication interventions has been emphasized by researchers and educators (Flippin, Reszka, & Watson, 2010). Since young children with ASD who receive special education services spend most of their waking hours at home with their families, involving family members in interventions may provide more communication opportunities to their children with ASD regardless of time and settings (Steiner, Koegel, Koegel, & Ence, 2012). Some studies have found that caregiver- and sibling-implemented interventions promote generalization of acquired skills of those children with ASD (e.g., Schreibman & Stahmer, 2013). In addition, it is expected that caregiver- and sibling-implemented interventions are more cost-effective than clinician-delivered interventions (Minjarez, Williams, Mercier, & Hardan, 2011). The purpose of this meta-analysis is to determine whether family member-implemented interventions are effective in promoting social and communication skills of individuals with ASD. This meta-analysis will include comparisons of effectiveness differentiated by critical moderator variables. In addition, overall and specific effect sizes of family-implemented social and communication interventions according to each moderator variable will be identified. Those moderator variables will include participant characteristics, type of communication interventions, training duration or number of training sessions provided to family members, and design quality of a study. Finally, the gaps in the literature will also be discussed regarding social and communication interventions that family member implemented for individuals with ASD. |
|
Parent Implemented Interventions: Evaluation of Utility of 3 Effect Size Estimates and Visual Analysis |
WENDY A. MACHALICEK (University of Oregon), Sarah Hansen (University of Oregon), Tracy Raulston (University of Oregon) |
Abstract: For children with intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDD) including autism spectrum disorder, intervention participation is mediated by caregivers, necessitating increased awareness by researchers about how to support parents as interventionists and the effects of parent implemented interventions on child outcomes. WWC 2010 standards for single-case research (SCR) designs recommend reporting multiple effect size estimates alongside regression estimates and visual analysis and researchers are increasingly doing so. We are unaware of any comparison of effect size estimates for parent implemented interventions. The 55 SCR studies for the current analysis were selected from a recently completed review (1997-2013) of parent implemented interventions for children, birth to twelve years of age, with IDD. Following coding of demographic variables, intervention procedures, and social validity outcomes, Tau-U, NAP, and R-IRD were applied to each case. 3 raters independently used visual analysis procedures to evaluate data. Pearsons r was calculated to determine agreement between estimates and visual analysis. Effectiveness of parent training on treatment fidelity and of parent implemented interventions on child outcomes will be discussed. Data analysis will be finished before May. This review offers information on the relative utility and efficaciousness of effect size estimates when applied to parent implemented interventions. |
|
|
|
|
Examinations of outcome data from clinical programs that address behavior disorders |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
214D (CC) |
Area: DDA/CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University) |
Discussant: Joel Eric Ringdahl (Southern Illinois University) |
CE Instructor: Henry S. Roane, Ph.D. |
Abstract: A core feature of ABA is its focus on data collection and analysis. Typically, these data permit an evaluation of an individual’s responding across an observation period and allow for the examination of functional relations. Organizations that conduct such data on individuals often assess those data on a program level. Information gleaned from such analyses can inform a number of organization parameters such as service delivery, treatment implementation, and research – areas that can, in turn, affect the larger practice of ABA. This symposium will describe outcomes from clinics that specialize in the treatment of behavior disorders. The first presentation describes outcomes from a clinic that conducts brief (30-60 min) appointments, including the prevalence of referral concerns, diagnostic profiles of clients, cancellation rates, and percent reduction in problem behavior. The second talk will discuss the evaluation of noncontingent reinforcement across 28 individuals and will compare differences between socially and non-socially mediated behaviors. The third talk details follow-up data on the use of an outpatient approach to address enuresis and encopresis. The final talk will describe the effects of using brief outpatient visits to treat feeding disorders. Each talk will include case examples, and Dr. Joel Ringdahl will discuss the results. |
|
Outcome data from a pediatric outpatient clinic specializing in the treatment of severe problem behavior |
NICOLE DEROSA (Update Medical University), Leah Phaneuf (Upstate Medical University), Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University) |
Abstract: A number of clinics exist worldwide that employee functional analysis-based treatments for severe problem behavior. This presentation will describe the organization and outcome data from a pediatric outpatient clinic at Upstate Medical University. Unique to this clinic is the fact that all services are provided within the constraints of psychotherapy current procedural terminology (CPT) codes. One facet of this method of billing is that all psychotherapy CPT codes are time-limited (e.g., 60 min) which could impact a number of client-related factors such as response to treatment and cancellation rates. We will discuss clinical procedures that have been developed to address these issues while maintaining the technical requirements of the functional analysis process. Case examples will be provided to illustrate the utility of the model. We will also provide outcome data on the types of problems addressed, diagnostic profiles of clients, cancellation rates, and percent reduction in problem behavior (presently over 90% reduction relative to baseline levels of problem behavior). These outcomes will be discussed in terms of factors to consider for clinic development, program evaluation, and client retention. |
|
Noncontingent Reinforcement for the Treatment of Severe Problem Behavior: A Consecutive Case Analysis of 28 Applications |
Cara Phillips (Kennedy Krieger Institute and the Johns Hopkins Un), JULIA IANNACCONE (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Noncontingent reinforcement (NCR) is a commonly used treatment for severe problem behavior displayed by individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities. The purpose of the current study was to expand on the existing literature on NCR by reporting outcomes achieved with 28 applications of NCR as the primary treatment across consecutive cases with severe problem behavior using a collective case series to minimize selection bias. Participants ranged in age from 5 to 33 years and had intellectual and developmental disabilities. 14 application were for behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement, 13 for behavior maintained by social reinforcement (i.e., attention, escape, tangible), and one for behavior with unknown function (i.e., inconclusive FA). Results suggest that the effectiveness of NCR may in part be determined by behavioral function. NCR resulted in a 90% or better reduction in problem behavior for only 7 of 15 cases in which problem behavior was maintained by automatic reinforcement. In these cases, additional treatment components were added to bolster effects. In contrast, when NCR in isolation was applied to socially maintained behavior, the result was a 90% or better reduction for 12 of 13 cases. Results suggest that NCR is an effective treatment for socially maintained problem behavior. |
|
Refinements and Outcomes from a Toileting Program Targeting the Treatment of Enuresis and Encopresis for Individuals with Developmental Delays |
JOANNA LOMAS MEVERS (Marcus Autism Center), Nathan Call (Marcus Autism Center), Mynaria Everett (Marcus Autism Center) |
Abstract: Toilet training is a critical self-help skill. Whereas typically developing children generally achieve continence by 2-4 years of age (Blum, Taubman, & Nemeth, 2003) individuals diagnosed with developmental disabilities are often delayed in achieving independent continence or never achieve it at all. Incontinence has many negative side effects, such as an increased burden of care for parents, poor hygiene, physical discomfort, lack of independence, and social stigma (Cicero & Pfadt, 2002). In addition, incontinence can lead to exclusion from many settings, such as regular educations classrooms, camps, or extracurricular activities. Despite the social significance and importance of achieving continence there have been few advances beyond the procedures outlined in the study by Azrin and Fox (1971), which presented an early treatment for enuresis. Furthermore, there are no well-established procedures for the treatment of encopresis. The current study includes datasets from a clinical protocol for the treatment of enuresis that includes several refinements to previous methods. In addition, data from a novel procedure developed for the treatment of encopresis will be presented, as well as long-term outcomes that show sustained continence and emergence of skills that were not specifically targeted for intervention (e.g., self-initiation). |
|
A Presentation of Outcome Data from an Intensive Pediatric Feeding Program |
AARON BOYCE (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jennifer M. Kozisek (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska), Valerie M. Volkert (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Suzanne M. Milnes (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center) |
Abstract: The behavior analytic literature indicates multiple effective interventions to address pediatric feeding disorders (Milnes & Piazza, 2013; Sharp, Jaquess, Morton, & Herzinger, 2010). While the breadth of published interventions affirms that clinicians are developing effective treatments to progress children diagnosed with feeding disorders toward age-typical eating, these published studies provide information on only a small percentage of the children being treated. Furthermore, while there are a few published reviews summarizing which interventions clinicians are using to successfully treat feeding disorders (Volkert & Vaz, 2010), these reviews do not provide information about the totality of successful interventions used in their clinics. Success could be indicated by decreases in enteral feedings and disruptive mealtime behavior or increases in oral intake and integrity when transitioning to caregivers feeding (i.e., rather than a trained therapist). Thus, to contribute to our understanding of successful interventions for pediatric feeding disorders, we preliminarily evaluated outcomes for 46 children from a well-established Midwestern pediatric feeding disorders clinic, which included evaluation of the interventions we used to treat each child. These data may assist in bridging the gap between science and practice in determining which interventions are successful and used most often by clinicians to treat pediatric feeding disorders. |
|
|
|
|
First World Problems: Behavior Economic Analyses of Running, Tanning, Borrowing, and Exotic Dancing |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
006D (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Shea M. Lemley (The University of Kansas) |
Discussant: Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota) |
CE Instructor: Shea M. Lemley, M.A. |
Abstract: Behavior economics has provided insight into a variety of real world problems, including substance use, gambling, and overeating. Areas of interest to behavior economic researchers are expanding to include a broader array of potential behavior problems. This symposium focuses on relatively novel areas of behavior economic interest. Mahoney and Lawyer examine delay and probability discounting in users of short term loans. Speelman, Rowsey, Daar, and Dixon examine delay discounting by women in service positions requiring varying degrees of revealing attire. Sofis, Simmons, and Jarmolowicz study long distance runners’ delay discounting of money and both demand and delay discounting of minutes running. Becirevic, Kaplan, and Reed examine demand for ultra-violet indoor tanning (UVIT) in groups of tanners defined as non-users, ex-users, and current users. These talks demonstrate how behavior economic analyses continue to provide valuable data regarding patterns of decision-making across a number of real world problems. |
Keyword(s): behavior economics, delay discounting, demand, impulsivity |
|
Delay and Probability Discounting among Payday and Title Loan Recipients |
COLIN MAHONEY (Idaho State University), Steven R. Lawyer (Idaho State University) |
Abstract: Impulsive choice patterns are associated with the use of payday or title loans
(Gathergood, 2012), which are short-term loans that provide an immediate and certain monetary
reward, but also include a delayed and uncertain aversive outcome in the form of exorbitant fees
and interest. Delay discounting (DD) and probability discounting (PD), which measure different
aspects of impulsive choice, offer a unique opportunity to understand the impulsivity-related
aspects of payday and title loans. In this study, community-dwelling participants between the
ages of 18 and 30 completed delay and probability discounting tasks for hypothetical money.
Patterns of discounting were characterized using area under the curve and compared among
participants who reported taking out a payday and/or title loan in the past (n = 41) and those who
did not (n = 255) using t-tests. There was a significant difference between individuals who
endorsed taking out payday and/or title loans versus those who did not on delay discounting
tasks, but not probability discounting tasks. These findings suggest that these individuals are
more likely than controls to devalue monetary outcomes as a function of delay, but not
probability. |
|
Monetary Discounting Across Exotic Dancers and Waitresses of Varying Establishments |
RYAN C. SPEELMAN (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Behavioral problems are correlated with decreased sensitivity to larger delayed rewards (Dixon, Marley, & Jacobs, 2003). Delay discounting, a measure of impulsivity, is a reliable indicator of problematic behavior patterns including pathological gambling (Dixon et al., 2003), alcohol consumption (Moore & Cusens, 2010) and smoking (Odum, Madden, & Bickel, 2002). Participants employed in various service positions including exotic dancers, waitresses at Hooters and waitresses of restaurants where revealing clothes are not part of the work attire were recruited. Participants were asked to make several hypothetical choices between $1000 available immediately and an equal or lesser amount available after a delay. Women who were willing to expose themselves or wear revealing clothing as part of a job requirement were found to discount the value of delayed rewards more than women who work in professions where this is not required. For women working as exotic dancers or in establishments in which wearing revealing clothing is a requirement, impulsive behavior patterns may be problematic as the long term benefits and job security of these professions may be negligible. Protocols to help teach self-control and decrease impulsive behavior patterns may be especially warranted for individuals seeking these types of professions. |
|
Two Steps Forward, One Step Back? A Behavior Economic Analysis of Long Distance Runners’ Valuation of Running |
MICHAEL SOFIS (The University of Kansas), J. Simmons (University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: In the current study, 38 trail runners (14 ultra-marathoners, 7 full marathoners, and 18 half-marathoners) completed two delay discounting tasks. Participants’ valuation of immediate vs. delayed money was assessed in one discounting task whereas the other discounting task measured valuation of immediate vs. delayed minutes of running. Participants reported the number of miles they ran each week and completed a hypothetical purchase task that asked how many minutes they would run across a range of prices. No significant differences observed for demand of minutes of running whether comparing between groups or as a function of weekly mileage. Amongst all participants, minutes of running was discounted at a higher rate than money (p= .009). When comparing self-reported mileage and minutes of running discounting, there was a negatively correlated trend (r= -.367) from 0 to 40 miles and a positively correlated trend from 40 miles and greater (r= .507). This significant difference between trends (p= .008) suggests a potential U-shaped relation wherein discounting of minutes of running is greatest when running mileage is closer to zero or over 40 miles per week. Results suggest that discounting of minutes of running might be a sensitive measure of running as a commodity. |
|
The Essential Value of Ultra-Violet Indoor Tanning: A Behavioral Economic Analysis of an At-Risk Population |
AMEL BECIREVIC (The University of Kansas), Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Ultra-violet indoor tanning (UVIT) is a pervasive issue affecting over 30 million Americans annually, despite well-publicized links to skin cancer (Fisher & James, 2010; Woo & Eide, 2010). UVIT users are predominantly non-hispanic white females between the ages of 18 and 25 (Boniol et al. 2012). Recent studies on UVIT have demonstrated that frequent users are able to distinguish between UV- and non-UV-emitting tanning beds, with some users even displaying withdrawal symptoms, thus providing support for physiological reinforcing effects of UV exposure (Feldman et al., 2004; Kaur et al., 2006). Despite calls for research, relatively little behavioral research has been done on UVIT use. This presentation examines UVIT use within the framework of the reinforcer pathologies model of addiction. Specifically, 222 (Mage = 19.69; SDage = 2.5 years) college-aged females completed a hypothetical purchase task for tanning packages where consumption (probability of purchase) was a function of increasing prices. Data were fitted according to the Hursh and Silberberg (2008) exponential demand equation. Results show differences in consumption between non-users, ex-users, and current users; the latter group yielding higher scores across all metrics of demand. Our findings indicate that applied behavioral economics offers unique insights in the study of UVIT. |
|
|
|
|
The Behavior Analysis of Music: Experimental and Theoretical Perspectives |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
007B (CC) |
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Michael Domjan (University of Texas at Austin) |
Discussant: Jose A. Martinez-Diaz (Florida Institute of Technology and ABA Tech) |
Abstract: Virtually everyone listens to music and many participate in various types of musical activities. Music has been studied from a variety of perspective. For example, much of what is referred to as the "psychology of music" explores music from the perspective of cognitive psychology and cognitive neuroscience. In contrast to the "psychology of music," the present symposium will explore music from the perspective of behavior analysis. Presenters will discuss how behavior analysis can be applied to the study of the nature of music and the training of musical skills. |
Keyword(s): music, pitch discrimination, RFT, verbal behavior |
|
A Relational Frame Theory approach to Learning Music |
JASON LEWIS (Florida Institute of Technology), Joshua K. Pritchard (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: In this presentation, we will explore the utility of relational frames and the impact this approach has on teaching music theory. Relational Frame Theory has yielded behavior analytic technologies that could enhance instruction of music theory and we will describe a deliberate method by which naïve students to music theory can be led through learning trials to rapidly acquire foundational skills to play and compose music. This theoretical paper will showcase the utility of viewing music as a form of language as a method to design instructional modules compared to the traditional approach to teaching the art of music. It will conclude with ideas for research lines as well as technological implications for behavior analysts who wish to diversify their career options. |
|
The Shaping of Absolute Pitch as a Higher Order Relative Pitch and Verbal Repertoire |
BENJAMIN REYNOLDS (University of Nevada, Reno), Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Abstract: Absolute pitch, or the presentation of an accurate note in the absence of an auditory prompt, is often treated as an innate ability in musicology. This study sought to improve absolute pitch accuracy among 2 trained and 2 untrained singers through the use of a changing criterion multiple baseline with criterion level probe design which shaped mimicked, relative, and absolute pitch. Results showed absolute pitch acquisition across all 4 participants as well as unique response acquisition curves between both groups. Further refinements of the existing study and implications of absolute pitch as verbal behavior are proposed for further investigation. |
|
Musical Instrument Manipulation as Verbal Behavior |
THOMAS LARUM (St. Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University) |
Abstract: A functional account of language, or verbal behavior, opens up the analyses to many areas of exploration and application. B. F. Skinner (1957) defined verbal behavior as “behavior reinforced through the mediation of other persons” (p. 2) with the caveat that such listener behavior has “been conditioned precisely in order to reinforce the behavior of the speaker” (p. 225). Given this definition, it stands to reason that verbal behavior can encompasses behavior of any form or medium. Indeed, it is possible that the act of playing a musical instrument may meet Skinner’s definition of verbal behavior. As Henry Wadsworth Longfellow said, “Music is the universal language of mankind.” It is in light of arguments of music as language that we offer a preliminary analysis of the verbal and non-verbal effects of playing a musical instrument. Limitations of such an analysis are presented in addition to possible conceptualizations in response to these limitations. |
|
Training Intonation Using Shaping and Response Cards |
Conny M. Raaymakers (Evidence Based Consultants), DON RAAYMAKERS (Caledonia Community Schools) |
Abstract: The traditional method of training intonation is just having students sing pitches and over time they will just automatically gain the knowledge of playing “in tune.” This paper takes a look at whether playing “in tune” became trained quicker through the use of shaping, using response cards and a couple apps called Tonal Energy (TE) and APS Trainer. Students are first given a reference pitch, then a determinant pitch that is a major third higher or lower. Students utilized response cards to identify if the determinant pitch (DP) was higher, lower, or the same. Over time the pitches were brought closer together until the DP was only one half step away from the RP, which is 100 cents higher or lower. After this, we start using APS Trainer which can make the DP anywhere from 1 cent to 50 cents higher or lower than the RP. We start with 50 cents higher and lower and gradually decrease the difference.
We ran a multiple baseline design on 4 groups of 6th graders from the same school. Students were called in individually and given a pitch. The students would then play the pitch on their instrument. After 5 seconds the recorder would write how many cents the student was above or below the pitch. Data was taken and treatment started every two weeks after baseline. It is early yet to make any conclusions from the data as students are still developing their technique. Results will be more clear toward the end of the school year. |
|
|
|
|
Investigations of derived relational responding with nonhuman subjects |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
007A (CC) |
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas) |
Discussant: Mark Galizio (University of North Carolina Wilmington) |
Abstract: Recent empirical and conceptual developments (e.g., Wasserman & Frank, 2005; Urcuioli, 2008) have suggested that the failure to observe derived relational responding in nonhuman subjects is the result of procedural artifacts. Procedures that preclude the development of these artifacts have begun to produce reliable evidence of associative symmetry in pigeons. This symposium brings together from four different laboratories investigating derived relational responding with nonhuman subjects. Stancato & Vaidya present a review of investigations of derived relational responding with nonhuman subjects and identify experimental procedures that correlate with successful nonhuman demonstrations of derived relational responding. Galizio and colleagues present data on rats performance on the go/no-go task and document failures on symmetry trials despite highly accurate performance on tests for generalized identity matching. Velasco and Tomanari present results suggestive of emergent transitivity and equivalence with pigeons with signal durations serving as sample stimuli and the nodal stimulus. Finally, Swisher and Urcuioli arranged procedures expected, by Ucuiolis theory, to lead to emergent reflexivity without a history of identity matching. The data collected so far are consistent with these predictions. |
Keyword(s): go/no-go procedure, nonhuman subjects, Stimulus Equivalence |
|
Successive Matching and Associative Symmetry: A Review |
STEFANIE S. STANCATO (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: The classical method of studying associative symmetry in non-human animals has been to use match-to-sample procedures, in which the comparison stimuli are shown concurrently in spatially different locations. Within the recent decade however, investigators have utilized a go/no-go (successive) matching procedure to investigate associative symmetry, in which all stimuli are presented in one spatial location. In light of this change of procedures and positive results (Frank & Wasserman, Exp. 1, 2005, and Urcuioli, Exp. 3, 2008), we reviewed the literature of successive matching in the investigation of associative symmetry. Studies that met criteria for inclusion were evaluated along the dimensions related to the characteristics of subjects, training structure, sample/comparison modality and location, sample/comparison duration, inter-stimulus/ inter-trial interval durations, and the overall methodology. Particular attention was paid to the manner in which data were analyzed and what analyses suggest. The results of this review identified the best procedural practices that facilitate the emergence of associative symmetry. |
|
Emergent Same-Different but not Symmetry Relations in Rats |
MARK GALIZIO (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Ashley Prichard (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Katherine Ely Bruce (University of North Carolina Wilmington) |
Abstract: It has proven difficult to demonstrate emergent stimulus control in rats with visual or auditory stimuli, but recent work in our laboratory has shown evidence of generalized matching- and non-matching-to-sample (M- or NMTS) using a non-automated simultaneous conditional discrimination procedure with olfactory stimuli. We will now present data from rats trained on Go-No Go conditional discriminations using olfactory stimuli in an automated olfactometer in an effort to assess emergent same-different and symmetry relations. Rats were trained to make nose-poke responses to ports through which odor stimuli were presented. Seven rats completed baseline training using procedures patterned after Urcuioli (2008), but none showed evidence of emergent symmetry relations. However, using similar procedures, identity and oddity relations have emerged in eight of the nine rats tested. These studies suggest that use of olfactory stimuli provides a promising technique to study emergent relations in rats, but that even with these procedures, symmetry remains elusive. |
|
Reflexivity, not Generalized Identity |
MELISSA J. SWISHER (Purdue University), Peter Urcuioli (Purdue University) |
Abstract: Most demonstrations of reflexivity are actually evidence for generalized identity matching. We used Urcuioli’s (2008) theory to predict emergent reflexivity after training pigeons on three arbitrary matching baseline tasks. The Reflexivity group matched form comparisons to hue samples (AB), hue comparisons to form samples (BC), and different hue comparisons to other hue samples (AC) in training. The Control group received training on the first two tasks only. When tested on form-form (BB) reflexivity probes, five of six Reflexivity pigeons showed evidence for reflexivity; only one of three Control pigeons showed did. We believe that these results are the first demonstration of true reflexivity in any animal (including humans). |
|
Equivalence relations in pigeons following training with temporal samples |
Saulo Missiaggia Velasco (Universidade de Sao Paulo), GERSON YUKIO TOMANARI (Universidade de Sao Paulo) |
Abstract: The present experiment investigated equivalence relations in pigeons using a symbolic matching-to-sample task with temporal stimuli as the samples and hues as the comparisons. The experiment comprised three phases. In Phase I, four pigeons learned to choose a red keylight (R) but not a green keylight (G) after a 1-s signal. They also learned to choose G but not R after a 4-s signal. In Phase II, correct responding consisted of choosing a blue keylight (B) after a 4-s signal and a yellow keylight (Y) after a 16-s signal. Comparisons G and B were both related to the same 4-s sample, whereas comparisons R and Y had no common sample. In Phase III, R and G were presented as samples, and B and Y were presented as the comparisons, and vice versa. On half of the trials, the choice of B was correct following G, and the choice of Y was correct following R. On the other half of the trials, the choice of G was correct following B, and the choice of R was correct following Y. If an equivalence relation between comparisons that shared a common sample were to emerge, then responding to B given G and G given B would be more likely than responding to Y given R and R given Y. The results were consistent with this prediction for two of the four pigeons, thus suggesting the formation of an equivalence class involving the hues related to the same temporal stimulus as nodal sample. |
|
|
|
|
Practice, Principles, and Progressive Contingencies |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
006C (CC) |
Area: EAB/PRA; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University) |
Discussant: Peter R. Killeen (Arizona State University) |
CE Instructor: Kennon Andy Lattal, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Progressive contingencies of reinforcement involve successively increasing response and/or temporal requirements for reinforcement. As in symposia on, respectively, reducing reinforcement availability and delay discounting, arranged by Drs. Call and Lattal during two the past two ABAI conferences, this symposium brings together both basic and applied researchers to explore dimensions of the theoretical and applied significance of progressive reinforcement contingencies. Such contingencies are important in both arenas not only because of their utility as tests of the relative efficacy of different reinforcers and circumstances of reinforcement, but also because of what they reveal of how organisms adjust to gradually but consistently changing conditions. One of the papers (Kincaid & Lattal) examines reestablishing responding once it has reached the point where a session normally is terminated (the breakpoint). The others consider progressive ratio contingencies in the context of reinforcer discounting in organizational (Henley et al.), clinical (Call et al.), and laboratory (Jarmolowicz et al.) contexts. |
Keyword(s): basic-applied integration, progressive contingencies |
|
Beyond the Break Point: Recurrence of Responding under Progressive-Ratio Schedules |
STEPHANIE L. KINCAID (West Virginia University), Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: If more and more responding is required to earn a reinforcer, as in progressive ratio schedules, behavior eventually becomes “strained,” characterized by long pauses and irregular response patterns. If the response requirement continues to escalate, behavior reaches a “break point” and ultimately ceases altogether for a period of time. The present experiments investigated whether responding can be regenerated after the break point has been reached, using techniques that are known to produce recurrence of behavior that was eliminated by extinction. Pigeons responded on progressive ratio schedules until stable performance was observed. Then, test sessions were conducted in which a recurrence procedure (reinstatement, resurgence, or renewal) was applied after the break point had been reached. Control sessions were also conducted in which no recurrence procedure was applied but the session was simply extended. Recurrence procedures were assessed in terms of amount of responding regenerated by the procedure, and latency to the first response following the break point. Implications of the findings for understanding recurrence procedures and the dynamics of ratio-strained behavior are discussed. |
|
On the Efficacy of delayed and probabilistic reinforcers: A concurrent progressive ratio analysis |
ALEXANDRIA DARDEN (University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas), Jennifer L. Hudnall (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Immediate reinforcers have greater subjective value than delayed reinforcers and certain reinforcers have greater subjective value than probabilistic reinforcers. These findings, widely explored in the literatures on delay and probability discounting, have had wide implications for clinical populations (e.g., addicted individuals, the obese, and problem gamblers). The causal mechanisms behind these behavioral patterns, however, remain unclear. The first study examines the reinforcer efficacy of delayed rewards using concurrent progressive ratio (PR) schedules of reinforcement. One lever consistently resulted in immediate reinforcement whereas the other lever resulted in reinforcement that after a delay that varied across conditions (0-s to 81-s). . The second study evaluated the efficacy of reinforcer probabilistic reinforcers under a similar arrangement with probabilities which ranged from 100% to 12.5% likelihood of reinforcement. Our general findings demonstrate reinforcer efficacy systematically declined for more probable and delayed rewards. |
|
A Crowdsourced Experiential Procedure for Generating Breakpoints of Worker Responding |
AMY J. HENLEY (The University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas), Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Behavioral economics is an approach to understanding decision-making and behavior using principles of behavioral science and economics (Hursh, 1980). It allows researchers to examine persistence of behavior in the face of increasing cost (i.e., demand). Experimental preparations with humans commonly adopt hypothetical purchase tasks to assess demand, but recent technological advancements offer alternatives that increase the feasibility of experiential methods. The purpose of this study was to examine the utility of an experiential method using crowdsourcing to assess worker responding in the face of increasing response requirements. Participants included experienced workers of Amazon Mechanical Turk who completed a task of progressively increasing ratios to earn a specified bonus. The work task required participants to slide a visual analog scale to match a random target number between -100 and 100. Sixty participants have completed the study to date. The rate at which participants discontinued responding was well explained by the exponential model of demand (r2 = .96; Hursh & Silberberg, 2008). Data collection for additional participants is underway. These data can inform future studies that utilize crowdsourcing methods to evaluate schedules of reinforcement and worker responding. |
|
Use of Progressive Ratio Schedules for the Assessment of Reinforcer Efficacy in Clinical Settings with Children with Autism and Related Disorders |
NATHAN CALL (Marcus Autism Center), Joanna Lomas Mevers (Marcus Autism Center), Ally Coleman (Marcus Autism Center) |
Abstract: The use of progressive ratio (PR) schedules of reinforcement as an assessment of reinforcer efficacy is well-established in experimental research. There are fewer but a growing number of studies demonstrating the use of PR schedules in applied contexts. Most of these studies have involved identifying stimuli that will function as reinforcers for adaptive behaviors or for use in treatments for destructive behavior (e.g., Roane, Lerman, & Vorndran, 2001). This study will present a series of datasets in which PR schedules have been used to address issues of relevance in clinical populations. These will include results of a study that used PR schedules to compare the relative reinforcing efficacy of social attention and leisure items in 8 children with autism spectrum disorder and 9 typically developing peers. Participants in the ASD group exhibited higher breakpoints and Omax for leisure items than for attention, whereas children in the typically developing group exhibited the opposite pattern. Results will be discussed in terms of the contributions of PR methods for research with clinical populations. |
|
|
|
|
Marketer-Consumer Contingencies in an Online Environment |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
202AB (CC) |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University) |
Discussant: Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University) |
Abstract: Marketer and consumer behavior are closely interconnected. They are mutually reinforced and entail literal exchange. The primary purpose of the theory of the marketing firm (TMF) is therefore to retain customers profitably. In such a scenario, for an organization to be successful, it has to adopt a consumer-centric approach for which a thorough knowledge of consumer behavior is mandatory. The Behavioral Perspective Model (BPM) was developed to explain consumer choice behaviors in affluent environments. It is an elaboration of the three-term contingency and matching applied to the context of economic behavior. In this symposium we will discuss recent theoretical developments and empirical analysis in online behavior analysis from the standpoint of the BPM and TMF. The symposium starts with a theoretical paper on the inter-relationships between a firm and the collective behaviors of consumers. The second paper extends the discussion to the current digital marketplace where the authors emphasize the importance of studying online consumer behavior from a behavioral perspective and explore the contingency categories from the view point of the digital marketer. The third paper extends the BPM to Facebook marketing using alternating treatment designs and the final paper explores the impacts of advertisements on social media marketing. |
Keyword(s): BPM, Consumer behavior, Facebook, Marketing Firm |
|
The Marketing Firm: Bilateral Contingency and Organizational Behavior |
GORDON R. FOXALL (Cardiff University) |
Abstract: Given the dynamic interaction between marketing organizations and their publics, it is unusual for theories of corporate behavior to be based firmly on theories of consumer behavior. However, consumer behavior analysis (Foxall, 2001, 2002) provides an operant understanding of consumption as the result of the scope of the consumer behavior setting and the pattern of reinforcement that maintains it, which is directly compatible with the theory of the marketing firm (Foxall, 1999; Vella & Foxall, 2011), that shows how organizations respond to consumer behavior by managing consumer behavior setting scope and pattern of reinforcement. The question remains how we can understand the complex inter-relationships between a contextual system like a firm, the behavior of which is predictable and controllable by considering its emergent operant consequences, and the collective behaviors of consumers, each of whom is a contextual system responding uniquely to the peculiar pattern of contingencies that shapes and maintains its behavior. The paper seeks the solution in terms of an analysis of bilateral contingencies, relating these to issues arising from the theory of metacontingency and macro-behavior. |
|
Consumers and Marketers – Interdependent Behaviors in the Digital World |
VISHNU MENON (Reykjavik University), Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University), Gordon R. Foxall (Cardiff University) |
Abstract: The digital environment has changed the way organizations and consumers behave. In order to understand their nature, a thorough account of marketer actions and subsequent consumer behavior is necessary. According to Foxall (1999) consumer and marketer behaviors are mutually reinforced and necessarily entail literal exchange. Considering the outreach of digital activities by both consumers and marketers, there exists an opportunity to understand marketer action and consumer choice from a behavioral perspective by conducting online marketing experiments using real time measurement tools. In this paper we discuss the importance of studying online consumer research from a behavioral perspective and also look into the contingency categories from a marketer point of view. We discuss the possibilities of experimental analysis of online consumer behavior through social media applications in the context of Foxall’s Behavioral Perspective Model (BPM) (Foxall, 1990/2004), which is an elaborate attempt to combine behavioral psychology and consumer behavior in real life settings. |
|
Marketing a Behavior Analysis Program with Facebook: An Extension of the Behavioral Perspective Model |
TODD A. WARD (University of North Texas), Sandy Magee (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: Over the past decade, Consumer Behavior Analysis has emerged as a cohesive sub-discipline of behavior analysis. Central to the CBA approach is the shift in focus of the organization from one that is “management-centered” to one that explicitly includes an interaction with consumers of the goods and services produced by the company. Within this field, the Behavioral Perspective Model (BPM) emerged as an interdisciplinary framework that brings together behavior analysis and marketing. The BPM has evoked numerous studies in recent years, some of which pertain to online marketing. The current study extends the BPM to a Facebook marketing effort geared towards a behavior analysis program. Using an alternating treatments design across 17 weeks, researchers manipulated informational, utilitarian, and control posts consisting of text and graphics. Each week, three posts in the same condition were released on Monday, Wednesday, and Saturday at noon. Each condition was separated by a “break” week with no posts to control for carryover effects between weeks. The posts centered on themes related to BACB certifications and continuing education opportunities. Data was gathered from Facebook Insights and Google Analytics to track Facebook activity as well as the program’s website referrals coming directly from Facebook. Results indicate that the informational posts evoked the highest number of website referrals but received the fewest number of clicks on Facebook. This finding suggests a potential “potency” effect for informational posts in that a higher proportion of interactions led to referrals to the program’s page. The utilitarian posts were least effective at generating referrals. The study has implications for the interaction of the consumer behavior setting via visual media with accompanying marketing messages. Lastly, the study could expand the concept of consumer behavior beyond monetary transactions to include the consumption of information. |
|
Understanding the Impacts of Advertisements in Social Networking Sites |
ASLE FAGERSTROM (Westerdals � Oslo School of Arts, Communication and Technology), Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University), Maria Lillemoen (Oslo and Akershus University College) |
Abstract: Social network advertising is a term that is used to describe a form of online advertising that is distributed through social networking sites. This study investigates the impact advertisement in social media has on a target segments behavior, and to investigate whether there is a difference in the response to different type of advertisements. A Norwegian drug helpline service that provides the public with information about alcohol, drugs and substance abuse, wanted to enhance traffic to its website. Their target segment is mainly youths interesting in and experimenting with drugs. A pre-study of focus group interviews were conducted to identify the use of social media within the target segment. After this, a social networking advertisement campaign was arranged according to ABAB research design. Referring traffic from Facebook to the website of the case organization was measured during the first week with no advertisements running (A). The second week, six advertisements were published on Facebook and the traffic was measured (B). The advertisements were then withdrawn in the third week (A), and in the forth week the same advertisements as in week two were published on Facebook. Results show that traffic to the website was higher in the weeks with advertisements running (week 2 and 4), compared to the weeks without advertisements (week 1 and 3). In addition, results show differences in responses to different advertisements. Discussion of the results are given in relation to verbal behavior, rules, and rule-governed behavior. Implications for marketers as well as suggestions for future research are given. |
|
|
|
|
The State of Functional Behavioral Assessment |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
214A (CC) |
Area: PRA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles) |
Discussant: Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles) |
CE Instructor: Michele D. Wallace, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium looks at the current trends regarding Functional Behavioral Assessment. The first paper addresses the validity of an online indirect assessment, the mini-FBA, compared to a functional analysis. The second paper looks at the application of the transition functional analysis in two naturalistic settings (home and a after school program). The third address demonstrates the use of pyramidal training to train two different staff levels how to conduct trial-based functional analyses. The final paper, looks at using video-recorded lectures and videoconferencing as a service-delivery model to train teachers in Saudi Arabia on how to conduct trial-based functional analyses. Thus, this symposium will present current research in Functional Behavior Assessment ranging from indirect assessments, to implementation of functional analyses in natural settings, to two different training methodologies to train individuals how to conduct such assessments. |
Keyword(s): FBA, Indirect assessment, pyramidal training, transition FA |
|
Agreement Between the Insights to Behavior FBA Tool and Comprehensive Functional Behavioral Assessments Conducted by Clinicians |
CATHERINE ANNE MILTENBERGER (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Linda A. LeBlanc (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Kerry A. Conde (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Tyra Sellers (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Hal Houseworth (BCBA), Jennifer Lynn Hammond (Intercare Therapy, Inc.) |
Abstract: Functional behavior assessment is essential to the effective treatment of problem behavior and includes indirect informant assessment, descriptive assessment, and functional analysis. Functional analysis is the only experimental method of identifying the function(s) of problem behavior but may require extensive time and resource. An indirect informant assessment that accurately identifies the function of problem behavior would facilitate more immediate, effective treatment of problem behavior. To date, findings on the validity of existing tools have been mixed with most studies indicating only a small to moderate correlation between the results of experimental analyses and informant assessments. One reason why these informant assessments may not correlate well with functional analyses is because all items on the tool are typically weighted equally even if certain items might be more predictive than others. A technology-based assessment might address this problem by allowing researchers to a) examine the specific questions that correlate most strongly with functional analyses results and b) create scoring algorithms that incorporate empirically derived weightings of individual items. The mini-Functional Behavior Assessment (mini-FBA) is an online informant assessment tool composed of 16 questions designed to identify the extent to which a problem behavior is maintained by attention, access to tangibles, escape, or sensory stimulation. Presented findings will assess the validity of this tool by evaluating the degree of correspondence between the results of the mini-FBA and a subsequently conducted functional analysis. Individual item analyses will be calculated to determine optimal item weightings to produce a maximally predictive tool. Data collection is ongoing with eight completed participants and one additional participant in progress at the time of submission. Findings will be discussed in relation to implications for efficient clinical practice in assessment and treatment of problem behavior. |
|
Conducting Transitions Functional Analyses in the Real World |
SARA GONZALEZ (SEEK Education, Inc.), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles) |
Abstract: The current study extends previous literature by applying the functional analysis methodology to problem behaviors associated with transitions for children with developmental disabilities across both home and classroom settings. Four participants were exposed to variations of transitions including activity initiations and terminations, non-preferred activity initiations, and terminations, each with and without a location change, and finally a location change with no presented activities. Results indicated that location change was a major contribution to problem behaviors during transitioning from activity to activity for three out of four children. Given that transitions between tasks my be difficult for yound children with developmental disabilities, the ability to transition smoothly can assist learning time and create a stress-free environment in any setting. Therefore, conducting a functional analysis to identify the maintaining variables during transition times should be done in the applied setting. Further extension of the functional analyses is suggested to create intervention plans based on the findings to reduce problematic behaviors. Intervention results will also be presented and discussed. |
|
Application of a pyramidal training model on the implementation of trial-based functional analysis |
Faisal Alnemary (University of California, Los Angeles), LUSINEH GHARAPETIAN (Special Education for Exceptional Kids), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles), Jordan Yassine (LSU), Fahad Alnemary (University of California, Los Angeles) |
Abstract: We employed a pyramidal training model (PTM) to teach the correct implementation and data collection of trial-based functional analysis (TBFA) for self-injurious behaviors. In the first phase, a non-concurrent multiple baseline design was used to evaluate the effectiveness of group-format training for four behavioral consultants (BCs). In the second phase, each BC trained one behavior technician (BT) by applying the same training content in an individualized setting. Treatment integrity data were collected for their implementation of the training procedures (i.e., didactic training, video modeling, role play). The results demonstrate that the PTM was successful in teaching all BCs and BTs to implement the TBFA correctly. In addition, a generalization probe with a different topography of problem behavior (i.e., aggression) was conducted for one BC and four BTs and all performed with 100% accuracy. These findings corroborate the utility of PTM in clinical settings, when access to experts such as BCBA might be limited. |
|
Reaching the Unreachable: Providing Intentional Staff Training on Trial-Based Functional Analysis |
FAISAL ALNEMARY (University of California, Los Angeles), Jennifer B.G. Symon (California State University), Fahad Alnemary Alnemary (CSULA/UCLA), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles) |
Abstract: This study aim to extend to literature of tele-consultation by examining the effectiveness of utilizing video-recorded lectures and videoconferencing as a service-delivery model to train teachers in Saudi Arabia (i.e,who do not have access to experts in a regular basis) on how to assess problem behavior that are exhibited by their students with ASD. A multiple baseline design was used to evaluate the effect of video-recorded training on the procedural integrity of trial-based functional analysis across four teachers. Although teachers’ performances were high following reading enhanced-written instruction during baseline, their performances improved following watching the video-recording training to reach 100 fidelity for at least two conditions. However, all teachers needed additional specific feedback for at least one condition. These findings suggest that video-recorded training can be a promising service-delivery model when access to expert on a regular basis is not feasible. |
|
|
|
|
Putting Our Minds to Mindfulness: An Interactive Experiment for Experimentation |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
9:00 AM–10:50 AM |
007C (CC) |
Area: TPC/CBM; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology) |
Discussant: Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette) |
CE Instructor: Thomas G. Szabo, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium is an exploration about mindfulness. This is going to be a different sort of symposium. Most symposia feature a series of speakers who take turns telling the audience what they think or what they know or what they think they know and perhaps showing data from experiments that were grounded in that thinking and knowing. The presentations in this series are grounded in not knowing. For an hour and 50 minutes, we are going to pretend we really don’t know anything about mindfulness. We don’t know what it is. We don’t know how to measure it. And we certainly don’t know what questions to ask about it. Each speaker in this series will lead an inquiry. Following a brief review of what we, as a science, thought we knew about mindfulness, the speakers will lead the group through a series of questions aimed at exploring what we would want to know, what we could know, how we might go about knowing it, and the problems we will likely encounter along the way. |
|
Experimental Control: The Rules of the Game |
SCOTT A. HERBST (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Thomas G. Szabo (Easter Seals Southern California) |
Abstract: Following a brief synopsis of the series of events that gave rise to this series of talks, this paper will serve as an introduction to the inquiry based presentations, which will function as a cooperative game. This paper will explore the nature of games. Games have certain properties. For example, they generally have rules. The first part of this talk will lay out the rules of play, and specify the consequences of following them or not. Games also have winners and losers and often have some way of tracking whether the game is being won or lost. As a cooperative game, either everyone present wins, or everyone present loses. As such, this presentation will also lay out the conditions for saying that everyone won or lost the game. Following this, attendees will have the opportunity to choose to participate in the game or not, and after that, the game will start. |
|
Let’s Talk: Defining Mindfulness |
KATE KELLUM (University of Mississippi), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Thomas G. Szabo (Easter Seals Southern California), Timothy M. Weil (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: In recent years, mindfulness practices have received increasing attention in clinical psychology and in western societies. At face value, the psychological term, “mindfulness,” seems problematic for behavior analysis as it includes the often avoided tact, “mind.” Yet, the tact occurred in multiple symposia at our 40th conference. Given the occurrence in popular culture and in our scientific discussions, it seems appropriate to delineate a behavioral definition, the objections to the term “mind”, and the potential benefits of examining interactions between the environment and this behavior(s). This collaborative discussion will remind participants that behavior analysis "does not insist upon truth by agreement and can therefore consider events taking place in the private world within the skin" (Skinner, 1945). The aim of the discussion is to define “mindfulness” from a behavior analytic perspective and describe the potential benefits of studying this behavior(s) for our science. This discussion will likely result in the development of descriptions of the function of “mindfulness” as well its’ topography as covert and overt behavior. |
|
Minding the Behavior Analysis Shop: Mindfulness as a Topic for Behavior Analytic Research |
THOMAS G. SZABO (Easter Seals Southern California), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Timothy M. Weil (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: Behavior analytic research into the improvement of complex stimulus control by verbally able humans is in its infancy. One strain of current interest involves the use of “mindfulness” strategies to bring behavior under either broad or narrow stimulus control, depending on the moment-to-moment needs of the learner. Although operationally defining “mindfulness” poses conceptual issues for behavior scientists, these problems are solvable when investigators limit their focus to directly observable behavior. The current paper addresses basic and applied issues in need of behavioral research. The presenter will outline a) basic principles that allow for precise identification of the functions mindfulness strategies target and b) components of applied mindfulness-based treatment packages that have not yet been evaluated for their individual utility. Based on the current body of empirical evidence, the presenter and attendees will generate a list of behavior-environment relations of basic and applied relevance for future research. |
|
Paying Attention to the Present Moment: Inspiring Increased Behavior Analytic Inquiry into Mindfulness |
MICHAEL BORDIERI (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Thomas G. Szabo (Easter Seals Southern California) |
Abstract: Recent years have witnessed an explosion of empirical investigations into mindfulness across multiple basic and applied psychological domains. In the past 10 years alone there have been over 2,000 peer-reviewed empirical publications indexed in PsycInfo containing the keyword of “mindfulness.” In contrast, there has been a relative paucity of behavior analytic inquiries into the phenomenon, with a search of JABA yielding no publications and JEAB yielding only five publications in which mindfulness was referenced. With the primary exception of works guided by relational frame theory, mindfulness has not yet been addressed by the behavior analytic community. This paper endeavors to serve as a call to arms for behavior analysts to design and conduct basic and applied studies of mindfulness and related behaviors. The aim of this discussion is to collaboratively develop a set of concrete mindfulness research proposals that are 1) consistent with behavior analytic methodology and theory, 2) focused on socially meaningful behaviors, and 3) achievable within the next year with no or minimal funding required. |
|
|
|
|
A Comparison of the Effects of Sensory-Integration Therapy and Behavioral Intervention on Challenging Behaviour |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC) |
Area: AUT |
Chair: Helena Lydon (Behavior Analysis in Ireland) |
|
A Comparison of the Effects of Sensory-Integration Therapy and Behavioural Intervention on Challenging Behaviour |
Domain: Applied Research |
HELENA LYDON (National University of Ireland, Galway), Olive Healy (Trinity College Dublin) |
|
Abstract: Autism spectrum disorder (ASD) is a neurodevelopmental disorder and presents as a complex and often puzzling category of conditions. This research evaluates Sensory Integration Therapy (SIT), one of the most popular non-validated treatments for ASD, by comparing the effectiveness to Behavioural Intervention (BI) in altering challenging behaviour. Two studies were carried out to evaluate the effects of SIT and BI on challenging behaviour maintained by environmental variables and automatic reinforcement. Study 1 used an AB counterbalanced group design across 10 participants to compare SIT and BI on behaviours maintained by various functions. Study 2 used a multiple baseline across participants to compare the effects of SIT and Sensory Integration techniques delivered within a behavioural intervention package. The outcome of Study 1found that SIT was not effective at reducing behaviours maintained by environmental variables (e.g., escape from demand, access to tangibles and attention). In contrast, the findings for Study 2 suggest that SIT was somewhat effective in reducing behaviours maintained by automatic reinforcement, and the Sensory Integration techniques were more effective when delivered within the framework of a Behavioural Intervention package. |
|
|
|
|
|
Verbal Operants of Corruption |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:20 AM |
204B (CC) |
Area: CSE |
Keyword(s): Corruption |
Chair: Tete Kobla Agbota (Oslo and Akershus University College) |
|
Corruption Language: A Study of Avoidance in Corruption Behaviour |
Domain: Basic Research |
TETE KOBLA AGBOTA (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sc), Ingunn Sandaker (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sc), Gunnar Ree (Akershus University College, Norway) |
|
Abstract: This paper offers an analysis of metaphors in corruption language based on positive and avoidance contingencies of reinforcement. Corruption is illegal and universally shameful; participants in corrupt transactions conduct their business in secrecy. What do beans for the kids in Kinshasa, a glass of wine in Paris and little carps in Prague have in common? The phrases say something about local cuisines, but they are also euphemisms for bribes. The public officer-citizen relationship is characterized by what behaviour analysts describe as, a give and take of stimuli and consequences. The use of corruption language, a common phenomenon associated with the demand and supply sides of corruption behavior demonstrates aspects of this public officer-relationship. Our data show that parties to corrupt transactions in Ghana would use expressions that accentuate this secrecy, whether demanding or giving bribe. The study demonstrates that corruption language (metaphor or euphemism) as a verbal stimulus can be topographically similar to another verbal utterance, but functionally different. Public officials and citizens use metaphors to avoid prosecution and social embarrassment, whiles positive reinforcement contingencies apply when demanding or offering bribes as regards the processing of applications or delivery of service. |
|
Keyword(s): Corruption |
|
|
|
|
Behavioral Economics: Fundamentals and Implications for Intervention in ASD |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Grand Ballroom C3 (CC) |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Jennifer N. Fritz, Ph.D. |
Chair: Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Houston-Clear Lake) |
Presenting Authors: : ISER GUILLERMO DELEON (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Behavioral economics is a productive blend of behavioral principles and micro-economic theory. Behavioral economic research has revealed that the concepts, principles, and methods that economists conventionally apply to decision-making at the population level have important parallels at the individual level. Armed with this understanding, behavior analysts gain a variety of useful analytic tools with potential for enhancing instructional and therapeutic arrangements. In this tutorial, Dr. IserGuillermo DeLeon will describe some basic tenets of behavioral economics, what one needs minimally to grasp its relevance for practice. He will then review and discuss studies, some from the behavior analytic literature and some from his own work, that show how these tools have been used to enhance our understanding of functional relations and improve our outcomes in work with people with autism spectrum disorder.
|
Instruction Level: Basic |
Target Audience: BCBAs, BCaBAs |
Learning Objectives:
- Participants will be able to explain basic behavioral economic concepts that include the law of demand, demand elasticity, substitutability, complementarity, and the impact of open vs. closed economies.
- Participants will be able to discuss how these concepts map onto common behavioral interventions to address the instructional or therapeutic needs of persons with ASD.
- Participants will understand what demand curves can offer beyond more conventional methods of gauging relative reinforcer effectiveness.
|
|
ISER GUILLERMO DELEON (University of Florida) |
Dr. Iser Guillermo DeLeon received his Ph.D. in psychology from the University of Florida in 1997 and previously held appointments at the Kennedy Krieger Institute, Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, and the University of Maryland, Baltimore County. Currently, he is an associate professor at the University of Florida and serves on the Board of Directors of the Behavior Analysis Certification Board. Prior commitments include associate editor for the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, president of the Maryland Association for Behavior Analysis, and member of the Science Board of the Association for Behavior Analysis International. Dr. DeLeon's research has focused on the variables that give rise to severe behavior problems in individuals with developmental disabilities and the hypothesis-driven development of interventions for behavior disorders. Separate, often related, lines of research examine choice and determinants of stimulus value in individuals with developmental disabilities. Dr. DeLeon has been the principal investigator or co-investigator for several National Institutes of Health-funded grants, largely translational in nature, that explore the applied implications of basic behavioral processes and related theories (e.g. behavioral economics, behavioral momentum). |
|
|
|
|
Dissemination and Evaluation of Early Intervention for Autism based on Skinner's Analysis of Verbal Behavior |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
217B (CC) |
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Michelle Ennis Soreth (Rowan University) |
Discussant: Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic) |
CE Instructor: Mary Louise E. Kerwin, Ph.D. |
Abstract: As the incidence rates of autism spectrum disorder (ASD) continue to rise, innovative delivery models for wide-scale dissemination of effective, empirically validated treatments for ASD are urgently needed. Early Intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) has been firmly established as one of the most effective treatments for young children diagnosed with autism; however, intensive time commitments required by traditional Lovaas model EIBI (i.e., up to 40 hours per week) and a shortage of trained professionals are barriers to accessing effective treatment. An alternative EIBI delivery model that has grown in popularity involves the treatment model based specifically on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior (VB). Although there has been little outcome research evaluating VB as a treatment package directly compared to other interventions, single-subject studies have suggested that VB may be able to produce outcomes similar to the Lovaas model in fewer hours of direct treatment delivery. Further, disseminating EIBI through parent training programs has great potential to conserve resources while increasing access to empirically supported intervention. This symposium will explore critical issues in the dissemination and evaluation of the VB delivery model, including the design of competency-based training to improve treatment fidelity and the development and evaluation of a parent-implemented VB intervention. |
Keyword(s): competency-based training, EIBI, parent training, verbal behavior |
|
Competency-based Procedures for Training Staff, Training Parents, & “Training the Trainer” in a Center-based Program |
KRISTIN M. ALBERT (Carbone Clinic) |
Abstract: Behavior analysts who work in applied settings to teach children with autism regularly make use of the principles and technologies of applied behavior analysis (ABA) to guide their instructional practices. The organizational structure and services provided within these applied settings can, however, be even more in line with a behavior analytic approach by making use of the organizational behavior management (OBM) literature. Of particular importance are the OBM guidelines for competency-based training and ongoing performance management. This paper provides a case-study description of how a center-based program for teaching children with autism structured its training programs around this research from the field of OBM. First, competency-based procedures for training bachelor’s and master’s level, 1:1 instructional staff will be discussed. Ongoing staff performance management procedures–including competency-based evaluations, performance-based monetary incentives, and public posting–will also be described. Next, competency-based procedures for training parents of children with autism will be described. Finally, competency-based procedures for training 1:1 instructional staff to conduct parent training will be discussed. Examples of program-specific competencies and summary data on staff performance management will be provided. |
|
Development & Evaluation of a Parent-implemented ASD Intervention based on Skinners Analysis of Verbal Behavior |
MARY LOUISE E. KERWIN (Rowan University), Michelle Ennis Soreth (Rowan University), Moran Amit Dahan (Rowan University) |
Abstract: ABA-based early interventions for autism have not traditionally been designed for parent-implementation. Parent-implemented interventions for ASD offer multiple advantages, and a number of non-behavior analytic, developmental interventions for ASD have distinguished themselves from ABA-based interventions by explicitly centering on parent-implementation. Non-behavior analytic, parent-implemented developmental interventions have also been the focus of multiple randomized clinical trials (RCTs), and despite mixed outcomes, contribute to an increasing volume of ASD intervention research in disciplines outside behavior analysis. To pilot and prepare for RCT evaluation, a 16-session adjunctive, parent-implemented treatment for young children with ASD based on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior was developed and manualized. The Verbal Behavior Milestones Assessment and Program Placement (VB-MAPP) and Sundberg and Partingtons (1998) Teaching Language to Children with Autism or other Developmental Disabilities were adapted for parent implementation and served as the basis of the treatment manual. Preliminary pilot results indicated that a parent-implemented intervention based on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior produced gains in joint attention and verbal behavior, as well as decreased levels of problem behavior post-treatment. In this presentation, the process of developing, packaging, and piloting a parent-implemented behavior analytic intervention for preschool children with ASD will be discussed, and preliminary outcome data presented. |
|
|
|
|
Psychedelics as Adjunct Medications in Behavioral Treatments of Addiction |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
006AB (CC) |
Area: BPH/CBM; Domain: Basic Research |
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Matthew W. Johnson, Ph.D. |
Chair: Paul L. Soto (Texas Tech University) |
Presenting Authors: : MATTHEW W. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: Converging evidence suggests that 5-HT2AR agonist psychedelics (classic hallucinogens) may hold a future in addiction treatment. Observational studies have reported addiction recovery associated with the ceremonial use of 5-HT2AR agonists (mescaline, dimethyltryptamine) by indigenous cultures. A meta-analysis of randomized studies from several decades ago showed that administration of 5-HT2AR agonist lysergic acid diethylamide (LSD) in alcoholism treatment resulted in significantly less alcohol misuse than randomized control conditions, with a large effect size (odds ratio ~2). Research with 5-HT2AR agonist psilocybin in nonaddicted individuals shows effects suggestive of antiaddiction efficacy, including positive behavior change as assessed by experimentally blinded community observers, increased personality openness, and high ratings of personal meaning at long-term follow ups. In a recent open-label pilot study of psilocybin as an adjunct to cognitive behavioral smoking cessation therapy in 15 treatment-refractory participants, 80% showed biologically verified smoking abstinence at 6-month follow-up. Although not definitive, these results are substantially greater than typical treatments. Another recent pilot study suggested safety and efficacy of psilocybin as an adjunct to Motivational Enhancement Therapy for alcoholism. This presentation will review this research, describe ongoing randomized trials, and discuss potential behavioral mechanisms. |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
Target Audience: Applied and basic behavior analysts interested in research on the use of hallucinogens in the treatment of addiction. |
Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will describe multiple lines of evidence suggesting potential efficacy of classic psychedelics in addictions treatment. 2) Participants will describe the results of a recent pilot study examining psilocybin in the treatment of tobacco addiction. 3) Participants will describe potential mechanisms by which psychechedelics may improve addiction treatment outcomes. |
|
MATTHEW W. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine) |
The underlying theme of Dr. Matthew Johnson's career has been to understand and facilitate human behavioral change, particularly behavioral change in addiction recovery. Toward that end, much of Dr. Johnson's research has applied behavioral economic concepts such as delay discounting and demand elasticity to decision making underlying addiction. His recent research has applied these models to understand the high rates of sexual HIV risk behavior associated with certain abused drugs (e.g., cocaine, methamphetamine, alcohol). This line of research has suggested that delay discounting is a critical but under-appreciated variable influencing sexual risk behavior. Another focus of Dr. Johnson's research involves laboratory studies determining the behavioral effects of psychoactive drugs in humans, including novel or atypical drugs. This work has examined psychedelics including psilocybin, dextromethorphan, and salvinorin A (from the plant Salvia divinorum), stimulants including cocaine, methamphetamine, nicotine, and caffeine, and various sedatives including GHB and alcohol. Current research with the psychedelic drug psilocybin is examining its potential for facilitating behavior change. These studies include a trial determining the ability of psilocybin to increase engagement in a meditation program, a trial testing if psilocybin can decrease anxiety and depression in cancer patients, and a study examining psilocybin as an anti-addiction medication for tobacco smoking cessation. |
Keyword(s): addiction treatment, cognitive behavioral, psilocybin, psychedelic |
|
|
|
|
Behavioral Activation as a Treatment for Adolescent Depression |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Texas Ballroom Salon A (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Steven R. Lawyer, Ph.D. |
Chair: Steven R. Lawyer (Idaho State University) |
Presenting Authors: : SCOTT T. GAYNOR (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: From a behavioral perspective, depression is a summary label for a set of responses emitted in a context, not an internal (neurobiological or psychological) defect within a person. As such, depressive symptoms should be treatable by changing environment-behavior interactions and the context in which they occur. Behavioral activation (BA) is a well-developed approach to treating depressive symptoms in adults with an emerging literature for adolescents. The goal of BA is to promote contact with positive reinforcement by engaging clients in focused activation strategies to counter passive avoidance/withdrawal and to increase goal-directed and values-guided behavior. The tutorial will briefly review of major components of BA, including: (1) the rationale and model of depression; (2) mood and activity monitoring; (3) conducting a values assessment; and (4) scheduling pleasurable, mastery-related, and values-based activities. |
Instruction Level: Basic |
Target Audience: Anyone interesting in the seeing the application of behavior analysis to depression, a common mental health problem. Also attendees, particularly students, who may have broad applied interests. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to: (1) describe the BA rationale and model of treatment; (2) describe how to introduce mood and activity monitoring; (3) describe how to assess values; and (4) describe how to select and schedule relevant activities. |
|
SCOTT T. GAYNOR (Western Michigan University) |
Scott Gaynor received his Ph.D. in clinical psychology from the University of North Carolina at Greensboro, where he had the good fortune to be mentored in behavior analysis by Rick Shull and clinical behavior analysis by Scott Lawrence and Rosemery Nelson-Gray. He completed his clinical internship and a post-doc at the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center’s Western Psychiatric Institute and Clinic. The next stop was Western Michigan University where has been on the faculty for 13 years, serving as the co-director of clinical training for the past six years. His research and clinical interests focus on evaluating the efficacy and mechanisms of action of contemporary behavior therapies. |
Keyword(s): behavioral activation, depression |
|
|
|
|
Effective Academic Interventions for Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities at the Postsecondary Education Setting |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
211 (CC) |
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Doreen J. Ferko (California Baptist University) |
Discussant: David L. Lee (Penn State) |
CE Instructor: David L. Lee, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The passage of the Higher Education Opportunity Act of 2008 increased the opportunities for learners with intellectual disabilities (ID) to receive postsecondary education. Benefits of the postsecondary education for leaners with ID include better employment opportunities, increased financial security, and general well-being. It is critical that educators should address the academic skill deficit of learners with ID at the postsecondary education setting. Reading and study skills are the two areas essential for success at the postsecondary level. Unfortunately, these are the two primary areas learners with ID struggle with. The symposium will include two experimental studies on effective academic interventions for young adults with ID at a postsecondary education setting. The first study will investigate the effects of a reading intervention on narrative comprehension skills of young adults with ID. The second study focuses on teaching a four-step guided note-taking strategy on information retention of young adults with ID. We will discuss the implication of the findings in the context of designing and delivering effective academic interventions for young adults with ID. |
|
Effects of the Repeated Reading and Comprehension Monitoring on Narrative Comprehension of Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities. |
SAEED ALQAHTANI (University of Iowa), Amanda Kern (The University of Iowa), Kevin Preckel (University of Iowa), Abdullah Alwahbi (University of Iowa), Youjia Hua (The University of Iowa) |
Abstract: Reading is a primary area of difficulty for individuals with intellectual disabilities (ID). Effective reading interventions for learners with ID should address both code- and meaning-based learning. The purpose of the study is to investigate the effects of a reading intervention on oral reading fluency (ORF) and comprehension of narrative texts for young adults with ID. We incorporated a repeated reading component, a narrative text comprehension strategy, and goal setting procedure in the intervention. Five young adult learners with ID participated in the study. We recorded their ORF and passage retell scores as the two dependent measures. We conducted the study using the masked visual analysis procedures in the context of a multiple-baseline across the participants design. The interventionists randomly selected the participants for the intervention. The data analyst who is blind to participant selection will determine the treatment assignment and compute the p value at the conclusion of the study. We will complete the study by the end of the November, 2014. |
|
Effects of Guided Notes and Strategy on Learning Outcomes of Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities |
KRISTIN MONROE-PEI (University of Iowa), Chengan Yuan (University of Iowa), Derek Rodgers (University of Iowa), Youjia Hua (The University of Iowa) |
Abstract: Guided note-taking requires learners to write critical information on partially completed notes while listening to the lecture. It is considered an effective intervention designed to improve learners’ study skills and learning outcome. The purpose of the study is to investigate the effects of teaching a four-step guided note-taking strategy (GRIP) on learning outcomes of young adults with intellectual disabilities (ID) at the postsecondary education setting. Eighteen students diagnosed with ID enrolled in a postsecondary education program will participate in the study. We will randomly assign the participants to the control and experimental group. Students assigned to the experimental group will receive the instruction on how to take guided notes using the four-step strategy. During the posttest, we will provide the experimental group with the guided notes and the control group with the completed lecture notes before they watch a recorded lecture. We will measure and compare immediate and delayed recall of the information from the lecture by students from the two groups. We will complete the study by the end of December, 2014. |
|
|
|
|
In Honor of William Abernathy's Contributions to the Field of Behavior Analysis |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
201 (CC) |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Panelists: |
Abstract: Friends and colleagues of William Abernathy will gather to celebrate his life and his many contributions to the field. Dr. William Abernathy received his doctorate in I/O psychology from The Ohio State University and taught at Ohio University. He was an associate professor of psychology at Southeastern Louisiana University and vice-president of performance systems at Aubrey Daniels, International. Dr. Abernathy developed and coordinated a new master's degree in I/O psychology at Southeastern Louisiana University. Prior to joining Southeastern, he was the president of Abernathy and Associates in Memphis, TN. Dr. Abernathy authored three books: The Sin of Wages, Managing without Supervisors, and The Liberated Workplace—Transitioning to Walden III. He also published numerous articles in academic and trade publications, was an associate editor of the Journal of Organizational Behavior Management, a board member of The Cambridge Center, and recipient of the International Association for Applied Behavior Analysis Outstanding Contributor Award, plus Outstanding Contributor Award by the Organizational Behavior Management Network. Dr. Abernathy passed away in early March 2015. Behavior analysis has been enriched by Dr. Abernathy's lasting contributions, which shine as an exemplary model of rigorous and socially important behavior science. |
Keyword(s): OBM |
|
|
|
|
Training Staff to Effectively Implement Behavior Analytic Procedures When Teaching Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
213AB (CC) |
Area: PRA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University) |
CE Instructor: Sharon A. Reeve, Ph.D. |
Abstract: For applied behavior analysis to be effective, it’s important to develop effective staff training methodologies for all behavior analytic teaching procedures implemented with individuals with autism spectrum disorders. The three studies in this symposium examined ways to increase the effectiveness of training staff to implement discrete trial teaching, activity schedules, token economies, and conduct preference assessments when teaching both adults and children with autism spectrum disorders. The purpose of the first study was to evaluate the effectiveness of self-monitoring on the generalization and maintenance of discrete trial training when teaching two adults with autism spectrum disorders. The second study used video modeling with voice over instruction to train staff to implement a multiple stimulus without replacement preference assessment to children with autism spectrum disorders. The final study used behavioral skills training and multiple exemplar training to program for generalization of staff training skills across discrete trial teaching, activity schedules, preference assessments, and token economies. |
Keyword(s): autism, staff training |
|
Effects of Self-Monitoring on Discrete Trial Training by Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders |
CONRAD HILLMAN (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Molly Shireman (University of Houston-Clear Lake) |
Abstract: Discrete trial training (DTT) is an effective method for teaching children with autism and can be effectively taught to parents, teachers and staff using behavioral skills training (BST). Research has examined the use of BST to teach adults with ASD and no intellectual disabilities to conduct DTT with children with autism (Lerman, Hawkins, Hoffman, & Caccavale, 2013; Lerman, Hawkins, Hillman, Shireman & Nissen, in press). BST was highly effective for teaching DTT skills, which maintained with on-going performance feedback. An alternative to using feedback with BST is to teach trainees to self-monitor. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of self-monitoring alone on the generalization and maintenance of DTT performance in adults with ASD. Two adults were trained on DTT and then taught to self-monitor by evaluating a therapist’s performance. Next, they worked with two or three children without feedback. Self-monitoring was implemented if a mastery criterion was not met. Self-monitoring improved maintenance for one participant but did not appear to impact performance for the other participant. These findings suggest that self-monitoring may be a viable approach for increasing the efficiency of BST when teaching adults with ASD. |
|
Using Video Modeling with Voice-Over Instruction to Train Staff to Implement an MSWO Preference Assessment |
Gina Delli (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Ruth DeBar (Caldwell University), Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University), Randi A. Sarokoff (Bernards Township Comprehensive Behavior Analytic), KAITLYN DONOVAN (Caldwell University) |
Abstract: A multiple stimulus without replacement (MSWO) preference assessment is a proven method of identifying these potential reinforcers (DeLeon & Iwata, 1996); however, staff must be trained on the steps necessary to conduct the assessment for it to be useful in everyday practice. The current study examined the effectiveness of using video modeling (VM) to train staff to conduct a MSWO preference assessment. Two staff were trained to conduct an MSWO with a simulated consumer (i.e., the experimenter acting as a child with autism) and to calculate the results and select the item with the greatest selection percentage to use during teaching sessions. Generalization was assessed in two ways: using actual consumers (i.e., students with autism) and using edibles. Results demonstrate that VM was effective in training both staff trainees to exhibit high levels of integrity within two training sessions. These results add to a growing body of literature that supports the use of VM as an effective way to train staff. |
|
Combining Behavior Skills Training and Generalization Strategies to Train Staff |
JESSICA L. ROTHSCHILD (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Peter Sturmey (The Graduate Center and Queens College, City University of New York) |
Abstract: Behavior skills training is an effective strategy for training staff members through the use of instructions, modeling, rehearsal, and feedback. Research has shown that a combination of behavior skills training (BST) and multiple exemplar training (MET) can be used to train experienced staff members on different learner programs. However, prior research did not use these strategies to concurrently program for and assess generalization across multiple instructional areas (e.g., discrete trial instruction (DTI) and activity schedules (AS) and learner programs (e.g., gross motor imitation and following a picture activity schedule) when training inexperienced staff. Thus, this study combined BST and MET to program for and assess generalization across a variety of learner programs and instructional areas. A multiple-baseline design across instructional areas was replicated across three staff trainees with no prior experience to assess the staff trainee’s implementation of discrete trial teaching (DTI), activity schedules (AS), preference assessments (PA), and token economies (TE) during sessions with a confederate. Generalization was assessed from sessions with a confederate, trained programs and instructional areas to sessions with a learner, novel programs and novel instructional areas. Following the use of BST and MET staff trainee’s correctly implemented target components generalized from trained programs and instructional areas to novel programs and instructional areas. The results of this study support and extend BST research by demonstrating the effectiveness of BST and MET to train inexperienced staff to teach multiple programs across a variety of instructional areas and generalize these skills from training conditions to non-training conditions. |
|
|
|
|
Training Future Behavior Analysts: Methods for aligning experiential and classroom applications of foundational knowledge content. |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
206AB (CC) |
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Ginette Wilson-Bishop (Bay Path University) |
CE Instructor: Ginette Wilson-Bishop, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This presentation will delineate the evolution of a University sponsored fieldwork experience program adhering to the parameters outlined by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB). The strengths and challenges associated with the growth of the program, as well as the fluid nature of BACB supervision guidelines will also be discussed. Mechanisms by which to adequately train and oversee supervision by adjunct faculty members will be shared. Two applied studies will be presented as an evaluation of skill acquisition for graduate ABA students within classroom and experiential learning opportunities. The first will discuss the Behavior Analyst Certification Boards (2012) identification of the translation of technical language as a competency for certified clinicians and involved a component analysis of a treatment package aimed at the assessment and training of behavior analytic consultation skills. The treatment package involved observation of targeted skills and a self-study (personalized system of instruction) task. The second study presents data supporting the use of a Foundational Knowledge Tool designed to relate concepts to applied practice. The Tool, utilized within core courses, allows tracking of topography-based responding associated with Foundational Knowledge content and its relation (linkage) to other Task List Content (i.e. Fundamental Elements of Behavior Change). Once growth in topography-based connections (intended to represent clinical use/applications of the concepts) was shown, an exam measuring student ability to relate the content to scenario-based multiple-choice questions (intended to represent a national certification exam) was administered. This study evaluated the correlation between use of the Tool and outcomes on selection-based exams. |
Keyword(s): Supervision, Teaching |
|
Supervision in ABA: Preparing future behavior analysts in practice |
GINETTE WILSON-BISHOP (Bay Path University), Susan Ainsleigh (Bay Path University) |
Abstract: According to Bernard & Goodyear (1998) supervision is an intervention that is provided by a senior member of a profession to a junior member or members in the same profession. This intervention is evaluative, extends over time, and has the simultaneous purposes of enhancing professional functioning of junior members, monitoring the quality of professional services offered to clients, and serving as a gatekeeper to those who enter a particular profession. This presentation will delineate the evolution of a University sponsored fieldwork experience program adhering to the parameters outlined by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB). The strengths and challenges associated with the growth of the program, as well as the fluid nature of BACB supervision guidelines will also be discussed. Mechanisms by which to adequately train and oversee supervision by adjunct faculty members will also be shared. |
|
Training Interpersonal Communication Skills: A Supplement to an Experiential Learning Course |
NOELLE NEAULT (Bay Path University) |
Abstract: Concerns have been raised regarding the use of technical language of applied behavior analysis (ABA) when communicating with members of the general public (Rolider and Axelrod, 2005). It has been argued that the technical language of ABA is a barrier to treatment acceptability and limits the field’s social validity (Foxx, 1996). Although the Behavior Analyst Certification Board® (2012) has now identified the translation of technical language as a competency for certified clinicians, there is little literature evaluating the teaching of this skill. The following study involved a component analysis of a treatment package aimed at the assessment and training of behavior analytic consultation skills. The treatment package involved observation of targeted skills and a self-study (personalized system of instruction) task.
Keywords: technical language, plain English, consultation, mentoring |
|
Generalizing Foundational Knowledge Content Across Response Topographies for Graduate Students |
MELISSA HUNSINGER (Bay Path University), Ginette Wilson-Bishop (Bay Path University), Susan Ainsleigh (Bay Path University) |
Abstract: With the delineation of the Foundational Knowledge Content Area in the 4th Edition Task List© (BACB®, 2012), there has been a push to integrate and embed this content across all courses within Bay Path University’s Master’s Program Course Sequence in Applied Behavior Analysis. Through the creation of a Foundational Knowledge Tool used to relate all of these concepts into practice, which has been utilized within the student’s core courses, we have been able to track student’s topography-based responding when asked to link Foundational Knowledge to other Task List Content (i.e. Fundamental Elements of Behavior Change). After seeing growth in topography-based connections (intended to represent clinical use/applications of the concepts), we implemented an exam to measure the student’s ability to relate the content to scenario-based multiple-choice questions (intended to represent a national certification exam). This research will evaluate the correlation between students who have used the Foundational Knowledge Tool within core classes and a change in their selection-based exam scores. Also to be evaluated will be the parameters of the intervention (i.e. contacting the Foundational Knowledge Tool 1x versus 6xs) on exam scores. Lastly, we will explore BACB® Certification Exam pass rates within two groups of Bay Path University graduates: graduates who did not receive the Foundational Knowledge Intervention within their course sequence vs. graduates who did receive this intervention. |
|
|
|
|
Self-Talk as a Regulatory Mechanism: How You Do It Matters |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC) |
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Judah B. Axe, Ph.D. |
Chair: Judah B. Axe (Simmons College) |
ETHAN KROSS (University of Michigan) |
Dr. Ethan Kross received his B.A. from the University of Pennsylvania and his Ph.D. from Columbia University. He is currently an associate professor in the Psychology Department at the University of Michigan and director of the University of Michigan Emotion and Self-Control Laboratory. He is also a faculty associate at the University of Michigan's Research Center for Group Dynamics, Center for Cultural Neuroscience, and Depression Research Center. Dr. Kross's research explores how people can control their emotions to improve our understanding of how self-control works, and to discover ways of enhancing self-control in daily life. He adopts an integrative approach to address these issues that draws on multiple disciplines within psychology including social, personality, clinical, developmental, and neuroscience. He integrates across these areas in terms of the types of questions he asks, the methods he use to address them, and the populations that he focuses on. He is the recipient of early career awards from the Association for Psychological Science, Society of Experimental Social Psychology, and the Foundation for Personality and Social Psychology as well as multiple teaching awards from the University of Michigan. |
Abstract: Self-talk is a ubiquitous human phenomenon. We all have an internal monologue that we engage in. Yet, surprisingly little research has examined the role that self-talk plays as a regulatory mechanism in adults. In this talk, Dr. Kross will review findings from an interdisciplinary program of research, which suggests that the language people use to refer to the self during introspection--i.e., whether people use nonfirst person pronouns and their own name or first person pronouns--consequentially influences how they think, feel, and behave under stress. Discussion will focus on the potential practical implications of this research and important future research directions. |
Keyword(s): behavioral regulation, language, self-talk |
|
|
|
|
Recent Advancements in Functional Communication Training |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Grand Ballroom C1 (CC) |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute) |
Discussant: Linda A. LeBlanc (Trumpet Behavioral Health) |
CE Instructor: Brian D. Greer, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Functional communication training (FCT) is a differential-reinforcement procedure that involves the delivery of the reinforcer maintaining problem behavior contingent on an alternative communication response. Tiger, Hanley, and Bruzek (2008) found FCT to be the most commonly prescribed function-based treatment for problem behavior. As a result, a large portion of the literature on the assessment and treatment of problem behavior surrounds techniques to improve FCT. This symposium was designed to showcase some of the recent advancements in FCT. Kelley and colleagues investigated how noncontingent reinforcement disrupts both response acquisition and maintenance during FCT. Mitteer and colleagues evaluated a pre-assessment that predicts performance under two types of FCT schedule-thinning procedures. Ghaemmaghami and colleagues compared two approaches for programming delays to reinforcement during FCT schedule thinning. Niebauer and colleagues examined the role of stimulus control in mitigating the resurgence of problem behavior during extinction. The overall theme and implications of these studies will be discussed and summarized by Dr. Linda LeBlanc. |
|
Response-Independent Reinforcer Delivery Competes with Response Acquisition and Maintenance |
MICHAEL E. KELLEY (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment and Florida Institute of Technology), Cy Nadler (Division of Developmental and Behavioral Sciences), Catalina Rey (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment and Florida Institute of Technology), Sarah J. Cowie (University of Auckland), Christopher A. Podlesnik (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: Response-independent reinforcer delivery (in the form of noncontingent reinforcement; NCR) is a procedure commonly used to decrease levels of problem behavior. As a primary effect of this intervention, response-independent reinforcer delivery abolishes motivation, abates responding, and weakens the functional relation between behavior and consequences. Secondary effects may be undesirable in some cases. For example, some studies (Goh, Iwata, & DeLeon; 2000; Marcus & Vollmer, 1996) showed that response-independent reinforcer delivery treated problem behavior but also might compete with acquisition of an alternative response. In the current study, we extended previous research by (a) showing that response-independent reinforcer delivery competes with both response acquisition and maintenance and (b) extending the generality of the findings by including both basic and applied arrangements. |
|
An Assessment to Inform Selection of Multiple-Schedule or Response-Restriction Treatments During Functional Communication Training |
DANIEL R. MITTEER (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center’s Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center’s Munroe-Meyer Institute) |
Abstract: Fisher, Greer, Querim, and DeRosa (2014) found that when functional communication training included multiple schedules of reinforcement (mult FCT), individuals who were unable to discriminate between the multiple-schedule components engaged in exceedingly high rates of the functional communication response. Response-restriction (RR) procedures were later shown to prevent this problem while maintaining low rates of problem behavior. In the current investigation, we evaluated three childrens successive- and simultaneous-discrimination abilities prior to evaluating Mult FCT or RR FCT. For one child, we conducted Mult FCT and RR FCT concurrently, albeit in separate contexts, and found the assessment accurately predicted the childs discrimination performance during each treatment. For the other children, we used the discrimination-test results to guide the selection of RR FCT to quickly teach the simultaneous discrimination and reduce problem behavior to near-zero levels. Results are discussed in terms of how selecting treatments matched to each individuals skills may be advantageous when evaluating treatments for problem behavior. |
|
Efficacy of Contingency-Based Delay Tolerance Training and Preference for Predictable Versus Unpredictable Delays |
MAHSHID GHAEMMAGHAMI (Western New England University), Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University), Joshua Jessel (Western New England University) |
Abstract: The effectiveness of treatments for problem behavior, like functional communication training (FCT), depends on the extent to which the treatment can be successfully extended to typical environments that include unavoidable and unpredictable reinforcement delays. Time-based delay (TBD) often result in loss of acquired communication responses and a re-emergence of problem behavior, whereas contingency-based delay (CBD) appears effective for increasing tolerance for delayed reinforcement (Hanley, Jin, Vanselow, & Hanratty, 2014). No direct comparison of TBD and CBD has been conducted, however. We first compared the relative efficacy of TBD and CBD across progressively longer delays using probabilistic reinforcement. Four individuals who engaged in a range of problem behaviors (e.g., aggression, vocal and motor disruptions, self-injury) participated. Lower rates of problem behavior and emotional responding were observed during CBD than TBD. We then evaluated the efficacy of, and participants’ preference for, predictable versus unpredictable CBD. Results from one participant showed that both predictable and unpredictable CBD were highly effective at maintaining optimal rates of communication, low rates of problem behavior, and high rates of compliance during delay. Unpredictable CBD, however, was preferred to predictable CBD and a control condition. |
|
Improving Functional Communication Training by Mitigating the Resurgence of Problem Behavior |
ASHLEY NIEBAUER (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute) |
Abstract: Despite being proven successful as a treatment for reducing problem behavior, functional communication training (FCT) does not address what happens to problem behavior during times in which functional communication responses go unreinforced. Previous research has shown that periods of extinction following FCT produce resurgence of problem behavior (Mace, et al., 2010; Volkert, Lerman, Call, & Trosclair-Lasserre, 2009), and such periods of extinction are likely when caregivers implement FCT. The current study evaluated whether establishing strict discriminative control over the FCR with the use of a multiple schedule mitigates the resurgence of problem behavior. With three children who engaged in problem behavior, the effects of a multiple-schedule FCT intervention was evaluated when discriminative stimuli were present or absent during a rigorous extinction challenge developed from Nevin and Shahans (2011) Equation 7 of behavioral momentum theory. Results for one child are compared to rates of problem behavior predicted by Nevin and Shahans (2011) Equation 7. Results are discussed in terms of how stimulus control can offset resurgence of problem behavior during periods of extinction. |
|
|
|
|
Creating Caring and Sustainable Communities: Large-Scale Applications of an Active Caring Approach |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–11:50 AM |
204A (CC) |
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas) |
Discussant: E. Scott Geller (Virginia Tech) |
CE Instructor: Richard G. Smith, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Societal-level challenges, including wasteful and dangerous personal and cultural practices and the erosion of caring and compassion, demand solutions that promote positive and widespread changes in behavior. Applied behavioral science (ABS) offers a promising foundation from which to address important societal issues such as excessive resource consumption, unsafe personal and workplace behaviors, and a generalized increase in the coarseness of human interactions. Importantly, interventions to improve these cultural-level problems require large-scale applications. Furthermore, successful and sustainable changes in cultural practices require the establishment of self-perpetuating systems that promote the spread of prosocial behavior change by incorporating processes that encourage members of the culture to not only engage in prosocial behavior but to recognize and reinforce the prosocial behavior of others. An example of this type of programmatic approach to large-scale behavior change is the Actively-Caring-for-People (AC4P) movement, which incorporates antecedent, consequential, and self-management strategies encourage, maintain, and generalize prosocial behavior. This symposium will presents four examples of behavioral interventions designed to improve behavior in the areas of: bicycle safety, environmental sustainability, and the spread of compassionate and caring behaviors throughout entire communities. Each presentation incorporates a large-scale AC4P perspective, which has the potential to impact large numbers of people worldwide. |
Keyword(s): community, sustainability |
|
A Community-Wide Program of Actively Caring for People: Spreading Prosocial Behavior One Bracelet at a Time |
KELLY HO (The University of North Texas), Benjamin Libman (University of North Texas), Stephanie Holder (University of North Texas), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: The Actively Caring for People Movement (AC4P) aims to apply principles derived from behavioral science to increase and maintain acts of kindness on a large scale. Although behavior change occurs at the level of the individual, widespread application and adoption across many individuals is necessary for a cultural-level impact of programmatic approaches to prosocial behavior. The current project evaluated dissemination of AC4P in a university campus and the local community. A community forum was held, at which the principles underling AC4P were presented and the AC4P program was described. Approximately 600 people attended the forum, and each received either one or two individually-numbered AC4P bracelets and was encouraged to register their bracelet number on the AC4P website and pass it on to someone engaging in kind acts. Bracelet numbers, as well as AC4P stories, were recorded and tracked on the AC4P website. Bracelet registration continues to evaluate the effects of subsequent contacts with forum attendees as well as additional organized, community-based activities at which bracelets will be distributed. |
|
The Road to Bicycle Safety: From Baseline Observations to an AC4P Intervention |
MICAH ROEDIGER (Virginia Tech), Taylor Jones (Virginia Tech University), Angela Suraci (Virginia Tech University), E. Scott Geller (Virginia Tech) |
Abstract: Bicycle helmets are critical in preventing injuries during a crash. Bicycle helmet use and possible demographic determinants of helmet use were investigated with systematic field observations on the Virginia Tech (VT) campus. Field observations were conducted by 59 research assistants trained to observe bicycling behavior. A total of 14,412 independent observations collected over one academic year were used for data analysis. Reliability observations were conducted on nearly one third of all observations (32.5%) with all inter-rater reliability values exceeding 95%. As depicted in the Table, the number of individuals observed wearing a bicycle helmet was less than 20%, and significantly lower for males than females.
These data inspired the development and application of a campus-wide intervention to increase the use of bicycle helmets among VT students. This intervention (which is currently in progress) consists of the following: 1) Various groups of students are informed of the AC4P Movement and offered a 50%-price-reduction coupon to purchase a bike helmet (n>1000), 2) Students are required to give this coupon to a bicyclist observed without a helmet, and 3) These students document their interactions with bicyclists. The impact of this large-scale intervention on bike-helmet purchase and use will be systematically assessed and presented. |
|
Exploring the Impact of a Website to Promote Prosocial Behavior: A case study of AC4P |
SARA E. VALENTINO (Virginia Tech), Lindsey Futrell (Virginia Tech University), Tara Fialkow (Virginia Tech University), Samuel Robinson (Virginia Tech University) |
Abstract: The idea that simple acts of kindness can inspire significant social change has piqued the public’s attention. Virtual social networks dedicated to inspiring self-reinforcing cycles of prosociality have sprung up all across the country (see AC4P.org, randomactsofkindness.org, payitforward.org). These networks attempt to leverage natural social dynamics to perpetuate the spread of prosocial behavior from person to person. In the present study, we calculated several network-level metrics for one such network: AC4P.org: 1.) average degree, the number of ties coming from each person, (1.82), 2.) density, the proportion of ties in the network, (.009), and 3.) transitivity, the extent to which two of a person’s friends are friends with each other, (.435). See Table xx for a graphic representation of the AC4P network connections. Guided by social network research, we show how these metrics influence individual and group processes and how the information contained in this analysis can be applied to enhance the reach of prosocial networks. AC4P.org encourages members to recognize and reinforce others for prosocial acts by passing wristbands embossed with the AC4P logo and to publicly post stories of prosocial interactions on the AC4P website. Over seven years of data has been compiled on wristband dissemination and online-interactions between members. To develop a deeper understanding of the social dynamics that shape online-prosocial-networks, further analyses will include a longitudinal analysis of network change, a time series of wristband purchases and stories posted, as well as a content analysis of the 3,000+ AC4P stories investigating the nature of prosocial behavior (e.g. person-based, behavior-based, or environment-based) diffused along network ties. |
|
Developing a Sustainability Institute with an Interdisciplinary Team |
CRISS WILHITE (California State University, Fresno), Mara Brady (California State University Fresno), Beth Weinman (California State University Fresno), Steven W. Payne (Melmark) |
Abstract: Solving complex cultural problems such as climate change cannot be accomplished without scientific understanding, evidence-based technical solutions, and behavioral implementation of those solutions. This requires integration of activities of consumers, producers, scientists, educators, policy makers and policy implementers. Houmanfar, Rodrigues and Ward’s (2010) five- term contingency model of cultural change has been used by the Fresno State Sustainability Project to effect change on our campus. The group is comprised of behavior analysts, geologists, biologists, students from 8 departments and plant operations personnel. We have received grants and honors from the university system and have completed a variety of educational programs and applied projects. Because we have found the numerous projects on campus and in the community have very little interaction, we proposed a sustainability institute. Fresno State’s top tier administrators have committed to developing the Fresno State Sustainability Institute. With their support, the Sustainability Summit held in the fall of 2014 paved the way to enhancing ongoing activity, promoting research and coordinating university and community stakeholders relative to sustainability in the Central San Joaquin Valley. We are currently developing organizational infrastructure and pursuing additional funding. |
|
|
|
|
New Approaches to the Experimental Assessment and Treatment of Noncompliance for Children with Developmental Disabilities |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–11:50 AM |
214C (CC) |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Blair Lloyd (Vanderbilt University) |
Discussant: David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology) |
CE Instructor: Blair Lloyd, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Noncompliance is prevalent among young children with developmental disabilities and presents a critical barrier to effective instruction. However, relative to other topographies of problem behavior, there is considerably less research on methods of assessing and treating noncompliance. One potential explanation is that noncompliance presents a set of unique challenges that require modifications to standard assessment and treatment procedures. In this symposium, we present four data-based studies on new approaches to the experimental assessment and treatment of noncompliance for children with developmental disabilities. The first presenter shares results of structural analyses of noncompliance embedded in reading instruction for a student with Down syndrome in a public elementary school setting. The second presenter shares an assessment model designed to distinguish effects of faulty stimulus control versus absent motivating operations for 5 children between the ages of 3 and 11. The third presenter shares data on correspondence between trial-based and traditional functional analyses of noncompliance for two young children with ASD in an outpatient behavior clinic. The fourth study presents a comparison of effects and preference for three function-based interventions for noncompliance for one child with ASD. All four presentations inform new approaches to experimental analysis of noncompliance for children with developmental disabilities. |
Keyword(s): antecedent analysis, function-based intervention, functional analysis, noncompliance |
|
Embedding Brief Structural Analyses of Noncompliance into Reading Instruction in a Public Elementary School |
EMILY WEAVER (Vanderbilt University), Blair Lloyd (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: Noncompliance is frequently reported in school settings and is associated with poor school and post-school outcomes. Due to unique challenges associated with conducting functional analyses of noncompliance, an alternative approach to assessment is a structural analysis, in which antecedent variables are systematically manipulated while consequences of compliance and noncompliance are held constant. In the present study, we used a hypothesis-testing model to design a brief-format structural analysis of noncompliance. All experimental procedures were implemented by a special education teacher in a public elementary school and embedded in a program of reading instruction for an 8-year-old girl with Down syndrome. The alternation of brief trial segments was used to assess the effects of antecedent variables on levels of compliance. Results of the initial structural analysis were used to inform subsequent evaluations of antecedent-based intervention components until increased levels of compliance were identified. Results suggest that a brief-format structural analysis embedded in naturally occurring instruction may be a promising method worthy of future investigation. |
|
An Evaluation of a Model to Assess and Treat Noncompliance |
JESSE ALLGOOD (Florida Institute of Technology), Lina Majdalany (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology), Latasha Sturkie (Florida Institute of Technology), Lindsay Smeltz (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: We developed and evaluated a model for assessing and treating compliance problems among young children. The model is designed to distinguish between noncompliance due to faulty stimulus control and noncompliance due to weak or absent motivating operations. Five children between the ages of 3 and 11 participated in the study. Three children were diagnosed with an intellectual disability and two children were typically developing. After the assessment, a treatment evaluation was conducted. Results show that two participants’ noncompliance was a function of poor stimulus control and three participants’ noncompliance was a function of weak or absent motivating operations. Treatments, which were designed based on the source of noncompliance, were effective in increasing compliance for each participant. Treatments for noncompliance due to a weak or absent motivating operation included a guided compliance procedure and differential reinforcement. Treatments for noncompliance due to poor stimulus control included multiple exemplar training, prompting, and reinforcement. The importance of identifying the source of compliance problems before intervening is discussed. |
|
Correspondence Between Trial-based and Traditional FAs of Noncompliance: With Treatment Evaluation |
Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University), ANNE DOYLE (Peabody College of Vanderbilt University), S. Blair Barrows (Vanderbilt University), Nealetta Houchins-Juarez (Vanderbilt Kennedy Center Behavior Analysis Consulting Services) |
Abstract: The trial-based functional analysis (FA) is a practical variation of traditional FA methodology in which brief experimental trials are embedded into an individuals regularly scheduled daily activities. Although relatively understudied, existing research suggests that trial-based FAs can be valid and accurate assessments of commonly studied topographies of problem behavior such as aggression, property destruction, and stereotypy. However, no research to date has outlined variations of trial-based FA methodology appropriate for the assessment of behavior problems that pose unique challenges to valid analysis (i.e., noncompliance). In Study 1, we propose one such variation and evaluate correspondence between trial-based and traditional (multi-element) FAs of the noncompliance of two children referred to an outpatient behavior clinic. In Study 2, we evaluated the validity of Study 1 results by incorporating trial-based FA outcomes into effective function-based interventions. Interventions included a combination of functional communication training (FCT) and mand extinction in two-component compound (i.e., multiple or chained) schedules of reinforcement. Results of both studies provide preliminary evidence indicating that the proposed modifications to trial-based FA methodology may be useful when identifying the function(s) of noncompliance. |
|
Evaluating the Relative Effect of, and Client Preference for, Three Function-Based Interventions for Noncompliance |
Anne Doyle (Peabody College of Vanderbilt University), Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University), MARIA MELLO (Vanderbilt University), Nealetta Houchins-Juarez (Vanderbilt Kennedy Center Behavior Analysis Consulting Services), Corinne Jones (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: Noncompliance is a socially significant problem in applied settings. However, noncompliance is not behavior; rather, it is the absence of behavior given a specific stimulus condition (i.e., caregiver demand). Given this fact, it is unclear whether traditional function-based interventions can effectively address it. In Study 1 we compared functional communication training (FCT) to a token system; with contingencies placed on mands in the former and on compliance in the latter. In Study 2, we modified the FCT intervention. Specifically, we implemented a two-component chained schedule in which mands were placed on extinction in the first component but were reinforced in the second. Access to the second component was contingent upon compliance in the first and compliance requirements were yoked to those established for the token system. Results of both studies showed that the token system maintained compliance. Conversely, traditional FCT did not. However, when FCT procedures were modified, the results of Study 2 showed that a variation of FCT could also maintain compliance. Following each evaluation we conducted a concurrent-chains preference assessment. Our participant preferred FCT during Study 1. However, when compliance requirements were yoked in Study 2, preference shifted to the token system. |
|
|
|
|
Current Status and Future Directions of Technology to Teach Academics to Students with Autism |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–11:50 AM |
210AB (CC) |
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Fred Spooner (University of North Carolina, Charlotte) |
Discussant: Robert C. Pennington (University of Louisville) |
CE Instructor: Julie L. Thompson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Focus on evidence-based practices (EBP) has shifted attention in the field to careful analysis of the quality and quantity of evidence for a given population or intervention (Horner et al., 2005). Technology assisted instruction and interventions have been labeled as an EBP for individuals with autism spectrum disorder (Wong et al., 2014). Literature reviews on technology-assisted instruction to teach academics to students with autism have found gaps related to breadth of content and quality (Pennington, 2010; Knight, McKissick, & Saunders, 2013). No analyses to date have evaluated participant characteristics, instructional formats, contexts, or procedures. This session will include: (a) review of the literature on the use of technology interventions for culturally and linguistically diverse students with autism, (b) review of the evidence base on computer-assisted instruction to teach academics to students with autism with focus on instructional formats, contexts, and procedures. Additionally, this presentation will include reports on two studies: (a) a recent investigation of systematic delivery of a phonics curriculum via an iPad for students with moderate to severe intellectual disability and autism, and (b) a recent evaluation of the effects of systematic instruction and computer-assisted instruction to teach students with autism a story mapping procedure on an iPad. |
Keyword(s): Academics, Autism, Computer-Assisted Instruction, Technology |
|
Technology Interventions for Culturally and Linguistically Diverse Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder |
JULIE L. THOMPSON (Michigan State University), Jenny Root (University of North Carolina at Charlotte) |
Abstract: Research on the use of technology to support individuals with ASD has demonstrated great promise; however, few studies include diverse or non-English speaking students (Kasari & Smith, 2013; West, 2013). A recent review on technology for secondary students with ASD identified 31 studies; only two included racially diverse participants and none included linguistically diverse participants. In order to improve research to practice for diverse individuals with autism it is important to identify what research has been implemented with diverse populations and the effectiveness of the research. Based on the limited inclusion of diverse participants in research, there is concern that practices identified as evidence-based may not be effective for some culturally and linguistically diverse individuals, or may need substantial adaptations to demonstrate effectiveness (West, 2013). The current review extends previous reviews of technology by targeting studies that include culturally and/or linguistically diverse participants with ASD from pre-kindergarten through adulthood. Out of 55 total studies identified, only 10 reported ethnicity and/or linguistic diversity. Diverse students performed similar or better than white participants in 7/8 studies that disaggregated data. Implications for individuals with ASD, families, and practitioners will be discussed. In addition, suggestions for future research will be provided. |
|
Computer-Assisted Instruction to Teach Academics to Students with Autism: Analysis of the Evidence Base |
Jenny Root (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), BRADLEY STEVENSON (University of North Carolina Charlotte), David W. Test (University of North Carolina, Charlotte) |
Abstract: The frequency and quality of the studies evaluating the effects of computer-assisted instruction are increasing as the benefits become widely known and technology becomes more accessible and adaptive to the needs of this population (Root et al., 2014). While technology-assisted instruction has been labeled an EBP for students with autism, computer-assisted instruction specifically for academic learning is a promising practice (Knight, McKissick, & Saunders, 2013; Pennington, 2010). The question remains about its effectiveness in academics overall as well as each content area. Furthermore, the literature on computer-assisted instruction varies in implementation and components of the independent variable, making inferences of generalization cautious. Out of 49 identified studies, 22 were of high quality (Horner et al., 2005), with 15 out of 22 teaching literacy skills. The high quality studies were further analyzed in terms of context of instruction, form of instructional technology, and specific instructional procedures. Instruction and/or prompting based on the principles of applied behavior analysis were present in all high quality studies. Implications for practitioners and directions for future research will be discussed. |
|
Phonics Instruction for Students who are Nonverbal with Moderate/Severe Intellectual Disability and Autism |
Lynn Ahlgrim-Delzell (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), Diane Browder (University of North Carolina Charlotte), LEAH WOOD (California Polytechnic State University at San Luis Obispo), Angela Preston (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), Amy Kemp-Inman (University of North Carolina at Charlotte) |
Abstract: Individuals with moderate or severe developmental disabilities (i.e., intellectual disabilities, autism) and especially those who are nonverbal, have limited opportunities for learning the foundations of literacy. Students who successfully gain early literacy skills may still have difficulty moving on to other reading programs that require oral participation. This study reports results of a repeated measures randomized control trial of 32 students with moderate or severe disability who are nonverbal. Students were randomly assigned to treatment (i.e., phonics instruction) or control (i.e., another literacy program) conditions for eight months. Students in the control condition participated in their classroom’s typical non-phonics literacy routines using an iPad™. Students in the treatment condition received phonics instruction using the iPad™ and a phonics curriculum based on principles of applied behavior analysis. Skills taught included phoneme identification, blending, segmenting, decoding, and reading comprehension. Classroom teachers delivered one lesson per student per day for approximately 15 minutes. Monthly data consisted of a curriculum-based assessment and a distal measure of reading (Nonverbal Literacy Assessment). Data were analyzed using a repeated measures ANOVA comparing pretest/posttest scores and treatment/comparison groups. There were statistically significant interaction effects for three of the four comparisons including identification of individual phonemes, decoding, and total score. |
|
Electronic Story Mapping to Teach Comprehension of Narrative Texts by Students with Autism Spectrum Disorder |
JENNY ROOT (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), Diane Browder (University of North Carolina Charlotte), Leah Wood (California Polytechnic State University at San Luis Obispo), Caryn Allison (UNC Charlotte) |
Abstract: Comprehension of text is a pivotal skill, yet there is a paucity of research on how to teach it to individuals with ASD (Browder et al., 2006; Chang & Lin, 2007). This study evaluated the effects of an intervention that paired systematic instruction and computer assisted instruction, specifically an electronic story mapping procedure delivered via an iPad, to teach comprehension skills related to story elements to students with ASD. Students were taught to identify story element definitions using constant time delay. Students then listened to age-appropriate narrative texts with a problem-solution structure, completed an electronic story map, and answered related questions. If unable to complete the map or answer questions, a least to most prompting hierarchy was used, including referring to the electronic story map, and rereading portions of the text. Outcomes of the multiple probe across participants design show a functional relation between the intervention and identification of story element definitions, labeling of a story element map on an iPad, and expressive comprehension of story element questions. Implications for future research and practice will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Training Novice Teachers to Use Evidence Based Practices in Special Education Classrooms |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–11:50 AM |
212AB (CC) |
Area: EDC/PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University) |
Discussant: Ronnie Detrich (The Wing Institute) |
Abstract: The research to practice gap has been a persistent problem in special education classrooms. An abundant number of effective interventions for improving student outcomes have been identified across decades of empirical research; yet most teachers select practices based on their own preferences and experiences (Cook & Cook, 2013; Cook, Tankersley, & Landrum, 2013). Despite federal laws mandating that teachers use evidence-based teaching practices, most teachers select interventions based on their own preferences and experiences (Cook & Cook, 2013; Cook, Tankersley, & Landrum, 2013). Not relying on scientifically proven methods deprives students with disabilities of the effective instruction that they so desperately need (Vaughn & Dammann, 2001). In order to close the achievement gap between learners with special needs and their typically developing peers, it is imperative to address the glaring disconnect between research and practice (Burns & Ysseldyke, 2009). Bringing evidence based teaching practices into real classrooms can be accomplished by coaching novice teachers, providing them with self-monitoring strategies, and collaborating with them to produce research based on their students needs. |
|
Coaching New Special Educators to Engage in Evidence Based Education |
MARY SAWYER (The Ohio State University), Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University), Carolyn Page Willke (The Ohio State University), Carrie Davenport (The Ohio State University), Lauren Hensley (The Ohio State University), Michael Kranak (The Ohio State University) |
Abstract: Evidence-based practice in education is a recursive problem-solving framework special educators can use to address academic and behavioral targets. Once teachers have (a) identified concrete objectives, they can (b) select, (c) adapt, and (d) implement scientifically supported technologies, and (e) use progress monitoring data to evaluate student response to intervention and inform instructional decisions. This chain of operant, problem-solving behaviors (i.e., evidence based teaching practice) can and should be explicitly taught to novice teachers so that they are prepared to effectively and efficiently improve student outcomes. The current study evaluated the effectiveness of coaching special education student teachers to engage in evidence-based practice. A multiple baseline design across teachers was used to evaluate the effects of coaching on targeted pupil outcomes in special education and inclusion classrooms. Teacher fidelity data and student measures will be reported, and implications for novice teachers, teacher educators, behavioral consultants, and researchers will be discussed. |
|
ACCOMPLISH: The Effects of SRSD on Student Teachers’ Lesson Objective Writing Skills |
KRISTALL J. DAY (The Ohio State University), John Schaefer (The Ohio State University), Gleides Lopes Rizzi (The Ohio State University) |
Abstract: Self-Regulated Strategy Development is an evidence-based practice that has been successfully used to support P-12 students on various tasks (Harris et al, 2012; Santangelo, Harris, and Graham, 2008). One empirically supported SRSD method for teaching multiple component skills to students in the P-12 settings is the use of mnemonic devices (Wood, Frank, & Wacker 1998; Mastropieri & Scruggs, 1998; Scruggs, & Mastropieri, 1991; Pressley, Levin, & Delaney, 1982). In this study we evaluated the effects of a mnemonic on preservice teachers’ lesson objective writing skills. The mnemonic ACCOMPLISH was used to support preservice teachers in remembering all the components of a quality objective (Antecedent Condition, Criterion for mastery, Observable behavior, Measurable behavior, Positively stated, Linked to standards, Individualized, Socially valid, High expectations). A multiple baseline design across participants was used to test the strategy and preservice teachers’ objectives were evaluated using a rubric. Generalization data were also collected through the evaluation of lesson plans that preservice teachers wrote for student teaching assignments. Data indicate that the mnemonic was helpful for some of the student teachers. |
|
The Effects of a Graphic Organizer Training Package on the Persuasive Writing of Middle School Students with Autism |
SHEILA R. ALBER-MORGAN (The Ohio State University), Anne Bishop (Haugland Learning Center), Melissa Boggs (The Ohio State University), Mary Sawyer (The Ohio State University) |
Abstract: This study examined the effects of a graphic organizer intervention package on the quality and quantity of persuasive writing of three middle school students with Autism Spectrum Disorder. The students novice classroom teacher identified written expression as a priority need for her middle school students with autism, collaborated with a research team to identify an appropriate evidence based intervention, and implemented the intervention while receiving on-going guidance and support from the research team. The intervention included a 3-day training which consisted of explicit instruction on the components of a persuasive essay, modeling and guided practice of graphic organizer completion, and translating graphic organizer notes into a draft. Following training, the students independently completed graphic organizers and wrote persuasive essays throughout the post intervention condition. A multiple baseline across students design demonstrated the intervention package was functionally related to improvements in writing performance as measured by total words written, correct writing sequences, and analytical rubric scores. |
|
The Effects of Word Box Instruction on First Graders' Reading and Spelling Outcomes |
Brittany Kanotz (The Ohio State University), CHRISTINA A. ROUSE (The Ohio State University), Mary Sawyer (The Ohio State University), Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University) |
Abstract: Phonemic awareness is critical for the development of proficient reading and spelling skills. Word box instruction is a direct instruction approach to teaching phonemic awareness skills and has been demonstrated to be an effective intervention for struggling readers (e.g., Devault & Joseph, 2004; Joseph & Maslanka, 2002; Joseph, 1999; Keesey, 2012; McCarthy, 2008). As students pronounce each phoneme in a word, they slide a marker (e.g., coin, poker chip) into a picture of the box with that phoneme. This study examined the effects of word box instruction on the outcomes of three at risk first graders. The word box instruction intervention was planned and implemented by a novice teacher in collaboration with a research team. A multiple-probe across participants design demonstrated a functional relation of word box instruction on students reading and spelling performance. Additionally, two of the three participants demonstrated evidence of maintenance and generalization of reading and spelling outcomes. |
|
|
|
|
Designing Successful Elementary Students: Establishing Early Literacy, Observational Learning and Curiosity |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
10:00 AM–11:50 AM |
209 (CC) |
Area: EDC/VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Lin Du (Teachers College, Columbia University) |
Discussant: Jennifer Longano (Fred S. Keller School) |
CE Instructor: Lin Du, Ph.D. |
Abstract: An evidence- based science of teaching is required in order for all students in inclusive and general education classrooms to meet current standards for proficiency across major subject areas. Interacting with storybooks and text, interest in peers and learning new concepts , and a tendency towards exploring new ideas and vocabulary are all identified as foundational benchmarks in the New York State Common Core Standards. We report on three experiments targeting these areas. The first study tested the effects of the establishment of conditioned reinforcement for observing books on the rate of acquisition of novel textual responses. In the second study, the experimenters tested the effects of teaching students to chorally respond on the acquisition of observational learning capabilities. The experimenters in the third study investigated the role of peer modeling and observed contingencies on question- asking in preschoolers. The results of all three experiments showed functional relations between the implementation of the independent variables and increases in the target behaviors. Results are discussed in terms of their implications for students' success in general and inclusive educational settings. |
Keyword(s): curiosity, observational learning, reading, verbal capabilities |
|
The Effects of the Establishment of Conditioned Reinforcement for Observing Books on Rate of Acquisition of Novel Textual Responses with Two- to Five-Year-Old Participants |
SUSAN BUTTIGIEG (Teachers College, Columbia University) |
Abstract: I tested the effects of conditioning books on rate of acquisition of novel textual responses for 17 participants with and without developmental delays (2.4 to 5.4 years old). The independent variable was the establishment of books as a reinforcer. The dependent variable was the rate of acquisition of novel textual responses. A non-concurrent multiple pre- and post-intervention probe design was used. Participants acquired conditioned reinforcement for books through textual operant discrimination training, stimulus-stimulus pairings, or conditioning books through peer observation. The rate of acquisition increased from 1.6 to 7.25 times as a function of acquiring books as a conditioned reinforcer. |
|
And Satisfaction Brought Him Back: What Do We Know About Curiosity and What We Choose to Learn? |
R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences), JEANNE MARIE SPECKMAN (Fred S. Keller School Teachers College Columbia University), Lin Du (Teachers College, Columbia University) |
Abstract: We sought to measure curiosity in special and general education preschool students by measuring the number of questions they asked about unknown items or pictures across four contrived conditions. We identified students who did not ask any questions about unknown items or pictures during the baseline probes, and then provided them with opportunities to observe model peers receive approval and tokens for asking questions about unknown pictures on a computer. The results showed a functional relation between the treatment procedure and increases in questions asked by the participants, and are discussed in terms of eliminating not knowing as a reinforcer. |
|
The Effects of a Reading Intervention to Teach Silent Reading with Comprehension on the Speaker-As-Own Listener Capability among Third Grade Students and Comparisons with Fluent Readers |
JOANNE HILL-POWELL (Teacher College, Columbia University) |
Abstract: The establishment of covert academic behavior is essential for the development of fluent reader and writer repertoires. One experiment determined the relationship between silent and oral reading fluency and comprehension among adult and elementary-aged fluent readers. A subsequent study identified a procedure to teach comprehension when reading silently. The procedure established covert speaker-as-own-listener repertoires for participants with language delays. The induction of a covert speaker-as-own-listener capability may result in more efficient reading and potential for long term academic success and the development of socially acceptable behavior |
|
|
|
|
Tackling Practicality Issues in the Assessment and Treatment of Problem Behavior |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
217C (CC) |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Yaniz C. Padilla Dalmau (Virginia Institute of Autism) |
CE Instructor: Jonathan Dean Schmidt, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium presents results from 3 studies addressing the application of applied behavior analysis for practicality issues that are often barriers to the assessment and treatment of problem behavior. The first study, “A Comparison of Methods for Thinning Schedules of Reinforcement in a Demand Context,” compares two schedule thinning methods for individuals who have escape maintained problem behavior. Emphasis is on determining which method shows the greatest utility for maintaining low rates of problem behavior, while being sustainable in everyday settings. The second study, “Teaching Children with Autism and Language Delays to Reject Non-preferred Food Items Using Multiple Communication Forms,” evaluates what effects teaching multiple functional communication responses has on preventing the resurgence of inappropriate communication. Of importance, results will also show how well these communication forms generalized across people. The third study, “Convergent Validity of the Questions about Behavioral Function Scale and Functional Analyses,” is a 10-year, retrospective analysis of 274 participants who received services for severe problem behavior in an outpatient hospital clinic. Analyses focus on how sensitive results from an indirect measure, the Questions about Behavioral Function scale, are with experimental functional analyses, across mediating factors such as function, topography of behaviors, and age. |
Keyword(s): autism, problem behavior, reinforcement |
|
A Comparison of Methods for Thinning Schedules of Reinforcement in a Demand Context |
MOLLY BEDNAR (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Dense schedules of alternative reinforcement for compliance paired with extinction for problem behavior are often used in behavior interventions for children with developmental disabilities, but may not be practical in all settings. The current study compared two methods for thinning reinforcement schedules in academic contexts for three participants whose results from a functional analysis indicated problem behavior was maintained by escape from demands. The first part of the study was to identify a hierarchy of high and low probability vocational and academic tasks for each participant. The second part of this study compared two methods for systematically thinning the schedule of reinforcement for compliance. In the dense-to-lean (DTL) condition, dense schedules of reinforcement were implemented at the start of treatment, followed by systematically thinning the reinforcement schedule across sessions. In the fixed lean (FL) condition, the use of a fixed schedule of reinforcement was implemented throughout treatment, which was the same as the terminal reinforcement schedule in the DTL condition. Results demonstrate that both methods of schedule thinning can result in reductions of escape-maintained target problem behaviors. However, for all participants, the terminal goal was attained more rapidly in the FL condition than in the DTL condition. |
|
Teaching Children with Autism and Language Delays to Reject Non-preferred Foods Using Multiple Communication Forms |
LAURA C. CHEZAN (Old Dominion University), Erik Drasgow (University of South Carolina), Christian Atlas Martin (Atlas Supports, LLC), James Halle (University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign) |
Abstract: Our purpose in this study was extended the application of functional communication training (FCT) by teaching multiple alternative, socially appropriate communicative replacement responses to two young children with autism. First, we taught each child two new responses to replace their subtle communication forms (e.g., pushing away) that served a rejection function. Next, we taught children to alternate between the two new responses. Then, we assessed whether the new responses and their alternation would promote resilience and eliminate resurgence to previous undesirable communicative forms. Finally, we examined generalization of the new skills to novel social partners. Both children acquired the new responses and their alternation. One child used the newly acquired responses when access to reinforcement was not immediately available whereas the other child resorted to previous undesirable communicative forms. Both children used the new responses with novel social partners but only one child alternated between the two forms with the novel social partner. |
|
Convergent Validity Between the Questions about Behavior Function Scale and Functional Analyses |
JONATHAN DEAN SCHMIDT (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jill Fodstad (Indiana University School of Medicine), Amanda Goetzel (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Theodosia R. Paclawskyj (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: It is well established in the literature that the most effective method for determining the purpose of problem behavior is by conducting a functional analysis (FA). Although an FA may be the most valid method for identifying the variables maintaining problem behavior, it is not always feasible to conduct such an in-depth analysis for practical reasons such as available resources, time constraints, or staffing. Thus, it is often necessary to use indirect measures such as questionnaires to identify the function. We compared the results of the Questions About Behavioral Function (QABF) scale, collected over the span of 10 years, to the results of standard FAs for 274 participants with developmental disabilities who were referred to a hospital clinic for the treatment of severe problem behavior. For all participants, a QABF was completed for each specific topography of problem behavior that was subsequently targeted for assessment in the FA. Both statistical analysis and single-subject design methodology were implemented to evaluate the convergent validity of the results obtained from the QABF and the FA. More in-depth analyses focus on the implications of differences in the predictive validity of the QABF when factors such as specific functions, topography, and age are considered. |
|
|
|
|
What Do We Do About Errors? Empirically Evaluating Error Correction Techniques in Discrete Trial Training and Discrimination Training |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
217D (CC) |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Robert W. Isenhower (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutger) |
CE Instructor: Robert W. Isenhower, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Although errorless teaching strategies are often used during Discrete Trial Training (DTT) and discrimination training to reduce the likelihood of error commission, errors will inevitably occur. Therefore, in this symposium we will examine the effectiveness of different error correction procedures on the acquisition of receptive and expressive discrete trial targets and simple discrimination targets. At the heart of Applied Behavior Analytic teaching methods is the stimulus consequence provided contingent upon engaging in behavior. Most frequently, when the target behavior is emitted, a reinforcing consequence is delivered. However, when other behavior is emitted (e.g., incorrect responding) consequences can take on a variety of forms. The most common of these consequences are the absence of the reinforcing consequence delivered for target behavior (i.e., differential reinforcement) or some form of error correction (e.g., follow-up prompted trials, corrective feedback, informational feedback, remediation, etc.) that serves to increase the likelihood of correct responding on future trials. Implications for implementing and individualizing error correction techniques in discrete trial training and discrimination training across learners with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities will be discussed. |
Keyword(s): Discrete Trials, Discrimination Training, Error Correction |
|
Comparing Variations of Discrete Trial Teaching for Children Diagnosed with Autism |
DONNA TOWNLEY-COCHRAN (Autism Partnership Foundation), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation), Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership Foundation), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership Foundation) |
Abstract: Discrete trial teaching (DTT) is a procedure widely used to teach new skills to children with an Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). One component of DTT that warrants further analysis is the feedback given to children when they engage in an incorrect response. The purpose of this presentation is to present data from a study conducted to evaluate and compare two variations of feedback within DTT: corrective plus informative feedback versus informative feedback only. Utilizing an alternative treatment design nested into a multiple baseline design across participants, we sought to specifically evaluate which DTT variation resulted in quicker skill acquisition and how each variation affected the maintenance of expressive or receptive labels. Six children diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder participated in this study. Three participants would be characterized as lower functioning and three would be considered higher functioning. We will be presenting data on skill acquisition, efficiency to mastery of the two procedures, and maintenance data. Analysis will be conducted within each participant and across high functioning and lower functioning participants. Future areas for research as well as clinical implications will also be discussed. |
|
A Comparison of Error Correction Procedures for Teaching Receptive Identification Items in Discrete Trial Training |
LARA M. DELMOLINO GATLEY (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Robert W. Isenhower (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Meredith Bamond (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation) |
Abstract: Despite the common use of errorless procedures, occasional errors will inevitably occur during instruction within Discrete Trial Training (DTT). Therefore, empirically testing and validating error correction techniques used in DTT is important for the development of best clinical practices. In the current paper, we empirically compare error correction procedures for teaching receptive identification in three learners with autism spectrum disorder. For each learner a try again procedure was utilized in the context of a three-choice discrimination task. This procedure allowed a learner to make up to two additional attempts to respond correctly, without prompts, after making an error. For each learner, this procedure was compared to a previously successful error correction procedure: either, 1.) a prompted follow-up trial or 2.) the delivery of corrective information (i.e., this is the _____) without the requirement of a follow-up response. We found that the more effective error correction strategy was idiosyncratic to each learner. Implications for individualizing error correction procedures across learners with autism spectrum disorder and developmental disabilities will be discussed. |
|
Using Stimulus Re-Presentation to Facilitate Discrimination Training in an Individual with Autism |
KATE E. FISKE MASSEY (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Robert W. Isenhower (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University) |
Abstract: The ability to discriminate between stimuli involves a complex set of skills that many individuals with autism have difficulty acquiring, generalizing, and maintaining. The use of differential reinforcement, or providing reinforcement for responding to the positive comparison (S+) and not to the negative comparison (S-), is a common means of teaching discriminations. However, the absence of reinforcement upon error commission may not be salient to some learners, and criterion levels of responding may not be attained solely through the use of differential reinforcement. In a visual simple discrimination task, we examined the use of stimulus re-presentation as an error correction procedure by not removing the stimulus array after an error until the learner changed his response to the S+. An 11-year-old boy with autism participated. He was unable to acquire simple discriminations when differential reinforcement alone was used; however, when a combination of stimulus re-presentation and differential reinforcement was applied, he learned to reliably respond to the S+ across three pairs of targets. A comparison of differential reinforcement, re-representation, and the two in combination in teaching simple discrimination will be discussed in terms of the possible mechanisms by which each approach (i.e., negative reinforcement, positive reinforcement) had its effect. |
|
|
|
|
Is Choosing Reinforcing? Examining Choice Responding Under Varied Assessment Conditions |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
217B (CC) |
Area: AUT/EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Erin Conant (Evergreen Center) |
CE Instructor: Mark P. Groskreutz, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Reinforcing effects are expected to vary based on the interplay of several variables, such as schedule, immediacy, and magnitude of reinforcement. Previous researchers have examined choice as a variable impacting reinforcement effects, when all else is held constant. For individuals with disabilities, where identifying reinforcers can be challenging, using choice may be particularly important when trying to maximize reinforcing effects when reinforcers may be limited. However, research on choice has been challenging, because of the necessary to keep choice and no-choice conditions equivalent. Previous researchers have used a variety of methods to control for choice and no-choice conditions with varying results. The studies reviewed in this symposium present further examinations of choice as a potential reinforcer considering single and concurrent operants arrangements and fixed and progressive ratio, as well as progressive magnitude assessments of reinforcement effects. Additionally, the current symposia include primary and “conditioned” reinforcers as part of the examination of choice as a reinforcer. |
Keyword(s): Choice, Progressive-ratio, Reinforcer assessment |
|
A review of research on reinforcement effects of choice and choosing with individual's with disabilities |
NICOLE C GROSKREUTZ (University of Saint Joseph), Mark P. Groskreutz (Evergreen Center) |
Abstract: Basic and applied research on choice has examined many variables and conceptualizations, from mathematical models of behavior under choice conditions (e.g., the matching law) to the impact of choosing between demand activities on levels of escape maintained behavior. The current review specifically examines research evaluating the reinforcing effects of choosing among available consequences (i.e., the opportunity to select a reinforcer versus being given the same reinforcer in the absence of choosing) with individuals with disabilities. The review includes an overview of common research arrangements for comparing choice and no-choice conditions and a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of various control techniques. Results of previous research on choice will be discussed along various parameters to identify consistent findings and potential variables impacting results. Parameters to be discussed will include participant populations, categories of consequences, reinforcer assessment arrangements, and strength of conclusions. Finally, a series of recommendations will be discussed to help set the occasion for continued productivity in choice research in applied settings. |
|
Using Single and Concurrent Operants Assessments to Examine Choice as a Reinforcer |
WENDY WELLER (Evergreen Center), Mark P. Groskreutz (Evergreen Center) |
Abstract: Individuals may be more motivated to learn new skills or perform already acquired skills when they may choose from several available consequences. However, research on choice is challenging, because it necessitates arranging choice and no-choice conditions, such that in the no-choice condition, the participant is given what they would have chosen if given the option. Previous research has suggested some participants prefer choice whereas other participants do not prefer choice. In the current presentation, participants with an autism spectrum disorder experienced several brief MSWO preference assessments to identify stable preferences. The preference assessments were followed by reinforcer assessments to examine responding under choice and no-choice conditions. Choice and no-choice conditions were designed and compared using a novel arrangement, to reduce confounds associated with yoking or other control procedures. Participants experienced conditions using both single and concurrent operant arrangements. Results suggest different patterns of responding across participants with some participant preferring choice and other participants showing no differential responding under the arranged conditions. |
|
Evaluating Choice as a Reinforcer under Progressive Ratio and Progressive Magnitude Reinforcement Conditions |
MARK P. GROSKREUTZ (Evergreen Center), Wendy Weller (Evergreen Center) |
Abstract: Some individuals may respond better (e.g., higher rate or with greater accuracy) when given the option to choose among consequences following a response. Previous research on choice has found different results, with some individuals preferring choice, some preferring no-choice, and some showing no difference in responding. However, the reasons for these different findings are currently unclear. The differences in results may be due to the experimental arrangements and/or the specific form of reinforcer assessment. The current research uses additional reinforcer assessment paradigms to examine the responding under choice and no-choice conditions with several individuals with autism spectrum disorders, including progressive-ratio and progressive-magnitude comparisons. The results suggest choice, as compared to no-choice, may be highly-preferred by at least some individuals with mild to moderate disabilities (e.g., individuals with autism spectrum disorders and extensive verbal repertoires). Results are considered from a practical perspective and are discussed in relation to behavioral economic models of behavior. |
|
|
|
|
Are we Meeting our Obligation to Learners With Autism Spectrum Disorder? |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC) |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Jill E. McGrale Maher, M.A. |
Chair: Mary Jane Weiss (Endicott College) |
JILL E. MCGRALE MAHER (Central Massachusetts Preparatory School) |
PETER F. GERHARDT (JPG Autism Consulting, LLC) |
MARY JANE WEISS (Endicott College) |
Abstract: The majority of research in Applied Behavior Analysis has substantiated that learners with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) acquire skills most rapidly in a one-to-one teaching format referred to as discrete-trial teaching (DTT). While DTT is an essential instructional model for learners with autism, it may not, over time, provide students with ASD the skills necessary for life success. Moreover, as the incidence of ASD has increased (e.g., by 30% in the last two years), it is predicted that in 5 years, 122,493 students with ASD will turn 22 nationwide, requiring 48,015 caregivers at a cost of 3,623 million dollars annually. Additionally, the new nation-wide Employment First initiatives have drastically decreased and will eventually eliminate sheltered work environments that have been available for more severely impacted people with disorders. We need to consider preparation for next environments to be a primary obligation of our service provision. Working in groups, working independently, and working with minimal and reduced supervision must be explicit goals for learners with ASD. Additionally, we must develop creative and cost-effective ways to teach, support and monitor adults with ASD in community and employment settings. |
Keyword(s): Transitions |
|
|
|
|
Questioning Some Assumptions About the Processes Involved in Addiction |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
006AB (CC) |
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
CE Instructor: Paul L. Soto, Ph.D. |
Chair: Paul L. Soto (Texas Tech University) |
RICHARD LAMB (University of Texas Health Science Center at San Antonio) |
Dr. Richard Lamb received his undergraduate degree from the University of Chicago in biology. He did his doctoral work with Don McMillan at the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences in pharmacology. Dr. Lamb then moved to Baltimore, where he did a postdoctoral fellowship with Roland Griffiths at Johns Hopkins University in the Division of Behavioral Biology. He went on to be a staff fellow working with Jack Henningfield in the clinical pharmacology branch of the National Institute on Drug Abuse intramural research program and with Steve Goldberg in the preclinical pharmacology branch. From there he went to the Philadelphia area: First as an assistant professor at the University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey and then as an associate professor at Hahnemann University. While at these institutions, Dr. Lamb worked with Martin Iguchi, Kim Kirby, Toby Jarbe, and Andrew Morral doing both treatment studies and preclinical studies related to drug addiction. Dr. Lamb is currently a professor of psychiatry and pharmacology at the University of Texas Health Science Center at San Antonio conducting preclinical studies examining the effects of potential medications on alcohol self-administration and animal models of alcoholism. |
Abstract: Addiction is characterized by continued drug use despite its adverse consequences, and by its chronic relapsing nature. Frequently, this continued use is assumed to result from drugs being over-valued, i.e., drug use being less elastic. In other words, in those who are addicted, increases in price decrease drug use less compared to those who are not addicted. Similarly, relapse is frequently assumed to be precipitated by drug-paired stimuli that, through pavlovian conditioning, elicit increases in motivation to take drugs. While these assumptions may be true, other equally viable alternatives exist. For instance, excessive drug use may result from the unconstrained demand for drug being relatively high, i.e. greater amounts of drug being consumed when it is available at no cost, in those who are addicted. Similarly, drug-paired stimuli may precipitate relapse not because these elicit increased motivation for drug taking, but because these stimuli elicit other behaviors that make drug taking more likely or set the occasion for behaviors that result in drug taking. Surprisingly, the empirical base for deciding among these assumptions is extremely limited, especially given how these assumptions shape our investigations into and our treatment of addiction. |
Target Audience: Basic and applied behavior analysts interested in drug addiction. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of presentation, participants should be able to: (1) define elastic versus inelastic demand; (2) distinguish between conceptions of drug addiction as resulting from drugs being over-valued in those who are or become addicted compared to those who are not addicted versus a greater unconstrained demand for drugs in those who are or become addicted compared to those who are not addicted; and (3) distinguish the various functions of drug-paired stimuli that may contribute to increased drug use. |
Keyword(s): demand, drug addiction, relapse |
|
|
|
|
Advances in Behavioral Process Research for Pediatric Tic Disorders |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Texas Ballroom Salon C (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Katie Wiskow (Texas Tech University) |
Discussant: Thomas J. Waltz (Eastern Michigan University) |
CE Instructor: Katie Wiskow, M.A. |
Abstract: Behavior therapy is effective for pediatric tic disorders, and shows positive effect sizes comparable to widely-used psychopharmacological methods. Still, not all children with tics respond to behavior therapy, creating the need to examine basic therapeutic processes and ways to augment existing techniques. As such, this symposium will present two studies in line with these directions. First, Matthew Capriotti and will present an experimental study investigating fixed versus progressive reinforcement schedules for tic suppression. Given that tics can be suppressed for short time periods while being reinforced, perhaps more robust forms of reinforcement might increase suppression efforts and create greater resistance to reinforcement withdrawal. Second, David Houghton will present archival data from a recently conducted randomized controlled trial in which the hypothesized mechanisms of change in behavior therapy for tic disorders are tested. For some time, theorists have offered that habituation of premonitory urges (i.e., somatic phenomena that precede tics) drives treatment gains, but little data support this hypothesis. Alternatively, other behavioral processes, such as inhibitory learning, might better explain reductions in tic behavior. Finally, Thomas Waltz will close by discussing the implications of these findings with regard to the immediate applications as well as clinical behavior analysis in general. |
Keyword(s): habituation, inhibitory learning, reinforcement schedule, tic management |
|
Comparing Fixed-Amount and Progressive-Amount DRO Schedules for Tic Suppression in Youth with Chronic Tic Disorders |
MATTHEW CAPRIOTTI (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Jennifer Turkel (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Rachel Johnson (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Flint Espil (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Doug Woods (Texas A&M University) |
Abstract: Chronic tic disorders (CTDs) involve multiple motor and/or vocal tics that occur repeatedly and cause substantial distress and functional impairment. Differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) schedules of reinforcement have been shown to decrease tics by ~80% in youth with CTDs; however, it is believed that a more robust reduction may enhance clinical change following withdrawal of the reinforcement contingency. Given that previously-used procedures (i.e., standard DRO schedules with token reinforcement) have not commonly yielded such reductions, we evaluated a novel, progressive-amount DRO schedule, based on its ability to facilitate sustained abstinence from functionally-similar target behaviors (i.e., substance use). Five youth with CTDs were exposed to alternating periods of baseline, traditional/fixed-amount DRO (DRO-F), and progressive-amount DRO (DRO-P) within the “tic detector” paradigm. Social validity was assessed via self-report and forced-choice preference assessment. Both fixed and progressive DRO schedules produced decreases in tic rate and median inter-tic interval, but no systematic differences were seen between the two schedules on any dimension of tic occurrence. The DRO-F schedule was generally preferred to the DRO-P schedule, which did not appear to yield any incremental effects. Possibilities for procedural improvements and other future directions are discussed. |
|
Inhibitory Learning as a Potential Mechanism of Change in Behavior Therapy for Tourette Syndrome |
DAVID HOUGHTON (Texas A&M University), Matthew Capriotti (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Lawrence Scahill (Emory University), Sabine Wilhelm (Massachusetts General Hospital), Alan Peterson (University of Texas Health Science Center at San Antonio), John Walkup (Weill Cornell Medical College), John Piacentini (University of California-Los Angeles School of Medicine), Doug Woods (Texas A&M University) |
Abstract: Behavior therapy (BT) is an effective treatment for Tourette syndrome (TS), but the processes underlying treatment gains are poorly understood. BT might produce habituation of premonitory urges (PMUs); aversive somatic phenomena that precede tics. Alternatively, inhibitory learning, or the overwriting of maladaptive PMU-tic associations with newer ‘PMU toleration’ learning, might better explain tic reductions. The current study tested these models in a randomized controlled trial comparing BT to supportive psychotherapy for pediatric TS. Participants were 126 children/adolescents with tic disorders (Age Range: 9-17). A 2x3 (treatment x time) repeated measures ANOVA tested PMU strength over time, and showed no significant main effects or interaction. Additionally, a chi-square test of independence comparing PMU habituation to treatment response was non-significant. Comparatively, in testing the inhibitory learning model, we computed z-score discrepancy indices between premonitory urges and tics at both baseline and post-treatment. Results showed that urge-tic discrepancies were greater at post-treatment than baseline, and these discrepancies were greater in BT than controls. Changes in urge-tic discrepancy between baseline and post-treatment predicted treatment response and partially mediated the relationship between treatment and outcome. Implications for the processes of change in BT as well as the neurobiology of TS will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Clinical Behavior Analysis and Disordered Gambling |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Texas Ballroom Salon B (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: CBM/EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University) |
CE Instructor: Alyssa N. Wilson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium will provide empirical evidence on best practices when delivering clinical behavior analytic services to disordered gamblers. Current behavior analytic gambling literature shows an overall increase in publication trends, with minimal evidence on behavioral treatment. Behavior therapies including Cognitive-Behavior Therapy and Acceptance and Commitment Therapy have been shown to be effective forms of therapy for reducing gambling behaviors. While there is minimal research to date on behavioral therapies for disordered gambling, little is known about the success and or failures of treatment goals supporting abstinence or harm-reduction treatment models. For instance, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy has been shown to be an effective treatment for reducing gambling behaviors, yet little research has been conducted on using brief or automated versions of treatment. Similarly, little treatment research has identified mediating variables that impact gambling behaviors such as inter-trial interval or self-report ratings on happiness indexes. Further, limited knowledge exists on the clinical utility of preference and reinforcer assessment on gambling behaviors. Therefore, this symposium will cover these critical clinical topics and provide emerging evidence on successful treatment assessment and outcomes when providing behavioral interventions for disordered gamblers. |
Keyword(s): clinical applications, gambling |
|
Preference and Reinforcer Assessments of Disordered Gamblers' Slot Machine Play |
AMY K. LOUKUS (Oregon Institute of Technology), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: The current experiments sought to investigate variables related to slot selection and, consequently the effects of machine on participant responding. Participant preference for three- and five-reel Vegas-style electronic slot machines was evaluated according to (a) a Likert rating of subjective preference, (b) a forced ranking preferred machines, (c) anecdotal report of preference, and (d) a paired-stimulus preference assessment. Also examined were the differences in rate of play/latency between spins, and rate of task completion, when participants gambled on their most- and least-preferred machines, or worked to gain access to the machines (respectively). The degree of influence the machine used during experimentation holds on gambling behavior, and Implications for the treatment of disordered slot gambling will be discussed. |
|
Behavior Analytic Treatment for Disordered Gambling: A Review of the Literature |
DANIEL TOURIGNY (Saint Louis University), Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University) |
Abstract: The current study systematically examined the behavioral literature on treatment options for gambling. An electronic search in PsychINFO was conducted to identify potential articles published on behavioral treatments for gambling. Combinations of the search term gamble* and treatment were conducted. Of the articles identified, information was extracted using a coding instrument created a priori that included five sections as follows. First, participant demographic information was examined, including age, race/ethnicity, gender, and co-morbidity with other diagnoses. Second, gambling proclivity was identified by categorizing the type of assessment tool used, and categorized by problem or problem/disordered gamblers. Third, treatment provided to participants were categorized by type (e.g., Cognitive Behavior Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, Exposure Based Therapy, etc.). Fourth, treatment type was categorized as either abstinence-based or harm-reduction based. Fifth, initial treatment goals were categorized as being determined by the participant or by the clinician. Of the 653 articles identified in behavior analytic journals, 110 articles were experimental while only 21 were treatment focused articles. Of the 21 articles assessing behavioral treatment, half (47%) examined Cognitive Behavior Therapy, while only 12 (57.1%) included follow-up data. Implications and possibilities for future directions will be discussed. |
|
Brief Automated Acceptance and Commitment Therapy for Disordered Gamblers |
Julie Smailys (Saint Louis University), SOPHIA HOWARD (Saint Louis University), Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University) |
Abstract: Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) is an empirically based treatment option for a range of behaviors, including disordered gambling. To date, minimal research has been conducted using computer-based therapy, particularly with gambling clients. Therefore, the purpose of the current study was to assess the effectiveness of a brief, automated ACT intervention on gambling behaviors. Participants self-referred to complete brief treatment for their gambling use. Participants were asked to play on a slot machine before and after each treatment session, and were told to play for 10-15min or until the researcher told them to stop. During the slot machine activity, participants were asked to rate how each outcome made them feel on a 10 point Likert scale, ranging from sad (1) to neutral (5) to happy (10). Dependent measures included rate of play, risk, magnitude of bet size, and inter-trial intervals between spins. Following treatment, all participants rated losses disguised as wins to closer to neutral or sad, rather than closer to happy, while the majority of participants opted out of playing for the entire gambling duration towards the end of the intervention. Implications for clinical practice will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Determining Effective Treatment: Function-based Treatment in the Context of both Positively and Negatively Reinforced Problem Behavior. |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
214B (CC) |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Cara L. Phillips (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: The field of Applied Behavior Analysis has emphasized function-based treatment of problem behavior for more than thirty years. Although targeting behavioral function improves the efficacy of treatment, there is still much work to be done in helping clinicians to identify which function-based treatment to use with individual clients and how to maximize the effectiveness of the treatments selected. This symposium consists of three investigations of positive- and negative-reinforcement based treatment for problem behavior. In the first study, the potential positive reinforcement effects of Response Blocking were examined in three individuals who exhibited severe problem behavior. In the second study, Differential Reinforcement of Other Behavior (DRO) and Noncontingent Reinforcement (NCR) were compared for the treatment of behavior maintained by social positive reinforcement. In the final study, the effects of manipulating the magnitude of a reinforcer available for problem and alternative behavior in the context of Differential Negative Reinforcement of Alternative Behavior (DNRA) were evaluated. |
Keyword(s): DNRA, DRO, NCR, response blocking |
|
Assessment of Response Blocking as a Positive Reinforcer in Children with Intellectual Disabilities |
CARA L. PHILLIPS (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jessica Garcia (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Aila K. Dommestrup (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Meghan Deshais (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Response blocking is often used to protect individuals who engage in severe self-injury and to protect others when aggression occurs. Unfortunately, blocking behavior can sometimes result in an increase in frequency or intensity of the blocked behavior which could indicate that blocking functioned as a reinforcer, or it could be indicative of emotional responding or an extinction burst. However, it may not be possible to withhold blocking for severe or intense problem behavior in order to identify the cause of the increase in responding. Therefore, the effects of response blocking on arbitrary responses were evaluated with 3 individuals diagnosed with Intellectual Disabilities to determine whether physical blocking might serve as a reinforcer. Sessions were divided into halves. The first instance of a naturally occuring arbitrary behavior (AB1) was physically blocked during the first half of the session. During the second half, the AB1 was placed on extinction and another arbitrary behavior (AB2) was physically blocked. Reallocation of responding from AB1 to AB2 could indicate a reinforcement effect. Results for 2 of the 3 participants indicate that response blocking may differentially reinforce behavior. Implications for treatments and crisis management will be discussed. |
|
Comparison of Differential Reinforcement for Other Behavior (DRO) and Noncontingent Reinforcement (NCR) – Which is More Effective? |
AILA K. DOMMESTRUP (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Crystal Thomas (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jessica Garcia (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Only a few studies have directly compared the effects of differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) and non-contingent reinforcement (NCR) in reducing problem behavior exhibited by individuals with developmental disabilities (e.g., Vollmer, Iwata, Zarcone, Smith, & Mazaleski, 1993). While both procedures target a decrease of problem behavior without an alternative behavior being introduced, DRO procedures require a greater commitment from caregivers to implement consistently and with high integrity (Fischer, Iwata, & Mazaleski, 1997). As such, the current investigation sought to compare DRO and NCR in decreasing socially maintained problem behavior with two individuals with developmental disabilities. Not only did we evaluate if each procedure worked, but we also wanted to determine if problem behavior remained low when the schedule of reinforcement was thinned and which would be more easily implementable for caregivers. Results suggested that NCR is equally as effective as DRO in decreasing and maintaining low rates of aggressive and disruptive behavior, including across an increased time schedule (98-99% reduction in rates of problem behavior). Thus, given that NCR is easier for caregivers to implement, the long-term effects of the procedure was also evaluated and included as a component of each child’s treatment plan. |
|
Negative Reinforcer Value Manipulations Without Extinction for Treating Escape-Maintained Problem Behavior |
JACQUELINE MARRA (Western New England University), Eileen M. Roscoe (Western New England University), Daniel Fredericks (Western New England University) |
Abstract: Differential negative reinforcement of alternative behavior (DNRA) without extinction may be clinically useful when practical or clinical restrictions preclude the use of extinction. DNRA without extinction, when the magnitude of escape for alternative behavior and problem behavior is equal, has not resulted in successful treatment outcomes. DNRA without extinction, when discrepant escape durations for compliance and problem behavior are used, has been found successful for one participant with escape-maintained problem behavior. This finding has not been replicated. Therefore, the potential utility of using discrepant reinforcer magnitudes in the context of DNRA without extinction remains unclear. The present study sought to replicate previous research by assessing the utility of using discrepant reinforcer magnitudes for the compliance and problem behavior of children with autism in the absence of extinction. Results indicated that a large discrepancy in reinforcer magnitude resulted in shifts in response allocation from problem behavior to compliance, whereas moderate and equal discrepancies did not. These findings suggest that magnitude manipulations enhance the effects of DNRA without extinction and that the procedure may be clinically useful when extinction is not practical. |
|
|
|
|
Teaching Vocational and Leisure Skills to Students With Autism and Other Developmental Disabilities Using iTechnology |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
214D (CC) |
Area: DDA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Christopher A. Tullis (Georgia State University) |
Abstract: Video prompting has been shown to be an effective instructional method to teach an array of tasks to individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities. In this symposium, three studies will be presented on the use of mobile technologies to teach vocational and leisure skills to students with intellectual and developmental disabilities. One study compared the effects of self-directed video prompting versus in-vivo instruction when teaching vocational skills, the second study examined the effects of self-directed video prompting when teaching daily living skills, and the third study examined the use of video prompting in the acquisition of leisure skills. In addition to data, presenters will discuss implications and directions for future research in this area. |
Keyword(s): Leisure Skills, Mobile Technology, Video Prompting, Vocational Skills |
|
Comparing Skill Acquisition Using in Vivo Instruction Versus Video Prompting With Young Adults With Intellectual Disabilities. |
Helen I. Cannella-Malone (The Ohio State University), ELISEO D. JIMENEZ (The Ohio State University), Jeffrey Michael Chan (Northern Illinois University) |
Abstract: This study compared the effects of self-directed video prompting on an iPod Touch to in vivo training on teaching two postsecondary students with moderate intellectual disabilities vocational skills. In the first experiment, students were taught to collate and stuff a large envelope and to fold papers and stuff a business envelope. Students were initially taught to use the inPromptu mobile application on the iPod Touch. Using a multiple probe in combination with an alternating treatments design, the two tasks were counterbalanced across students, and they were instructed to use self-directed video prompting to teach themselves one skill, and an instructor used least-to-most prompting to teach them the second task. Data were collected on sessions to criterion and maintenance of the skills over time. Results demonstrated that both were effective in teaching the skill, but students were able to generalize their use of the technology to learn a new skill with no additional instruction. |
|
Using Self-Directed Video Prompting for Skill Acquisition With Post-Secondary Students With Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities |
ELISEO D. JIMENEZ (The Ohio State University), Helen I. Cannella-Malone (The Ohio State University) |
Abstract: Among individuals with severe and profound disabilities, there is limited self- directed video prompting research containing generalization and maintenance measures. Using an iPod Touch as the prompting device, two individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities were instructed to complete three tasks within a multiple probe design to assess the generalization of self-directed video prompting. Additionally, maintenance probes were conducted weekly starting one-week post mastery for two weeks. Results showed that both students acquired novel skills across all three tiers, indicating that individuals can acquire novel tasks with minimal prompting with self- directed video prompting. |
|
Using Video Prompting to Teach Leisure Skills to Students With Severe and Profound Disabilities |
Helen I. Cannella-Malone (The Ohio State University), OLIVIA MILLER (The Ohio State University), John Schaefer (The Ohio State University), Eliseo D. Jimenez (The Ohio State University), Edward Page (The Ohio State University), Linsey M. Sabielny (DePaul University) |
Abstract: Participating in recreational activities is important to any individual’s quality of life, however, individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDD) still have enduring deficits in leisure skills because teaching leisure skills still remains a low priority in many schools. This study used video prompting to teach nine students with IDD leisure skills. Video prompting was effective with all but one student. Additionally, to explore the role of leisure skill acquisition in self-determination this study examined whether preference would shift once a leisure skill was learned. We found a dramatic shift in students’ preferences after they acquire new skills. |
|
|
|
|
It's a System!: The Essential Role of Behavior Analysis in Developmental Systems Theory |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Texas Ballroom Salon A (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: DEV; Domain: Theory |
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Susan M. Schneider, Ph.D. |
Chair: Martha Pelaez (Florida International University) |
Presenting Authors: : SUSAN M. SCHNEIDER (University of the Pacific) |
Abstract: Try to picture all that's known about biology and behavior: Genes, epigenetics, neurophysiology, operant and respondent principles, hormones, history ... and much more. Like other sciences, ours has always been part of a grand interdisciplinary effort, and the biobehavioral system is large and complex indeed. Developmental Systems Theory attempts to encompass everything, including the many complex, nonlinear interactions across all levels. The operant principles in which behavior analysts specialize have proved to be an important part of the empowering flexibility in the larger system. Our work on the benefits of enriched environments, the causes and treatments for autism spectrum disorders, the surprising flexibility of "instincts," and rehabilitation for victims of stroke and traumatic brain injury, to name a few examples, are all part of much larger efforts. In turn, system interactions are critical influences on our own work. Scientists always knew a better understanding of the full nature-and-nurture system would bring surprises, and this tutorial will show how the reality has exceeded expectations. |
Instruction Level: Basic |
Target Audience: Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students. |
Learning Objectives:
- To describe developmental systems theory. At the conclusion of the event, participants will be able to explain how DST encompasses the entire biobehavioral system, including many complex, nonlinear interactions across all levels.
- To show how operant and respondent behavior principles play a critical role in developmental systems theory. At the conclusion of the event, participants will be able to describe how behavior principles influence and are influenced by the other system variables.
- To show the philosophical similarities between behavior analysis and developmental systems theory, including for example anti-reductionism. At the conclusion of the event, participants will be able to describe these similarities. Participants will also be able to describe the value to behavior analysts of understanding and contributing to developmental systems theory.
|
|
SUSAN M. SCHNEIDER (University of the Pacific) |
Dr. Susan M. Schneider’s involvement in behavior analysis goes back to high school when she read Beyond Freedom & Dignity and wrote B. F. Skinner, never dreaming that he would reply. They corresponded throughout her master’s degree in mechanical engineering at Brown University, her engineering career, and her stint in the Peace Corps. At that point, Schneider bowed to the inevitable and switched careers, obtaining her Ph.D. in developmental psychology in 1989 from the University of Kansas. A research pioneer, she was the first to apply the generalized matching law to sequences and to demonstrate operant generalization and matching in neonates. Her publications also cover the history and philosophy of behavior analysis and the neglected method of sequential analysis. Schneider has championed the inclusive “developmental systems” approach to nature nurture relations, culminating in reviews in the Journal of Experimental Analysis of Behavior and The Behavior Analyst, and she has served on the editorial boards for both of those journals. Her book, The Science of Consequences: How They Affect Genes, Change the Brain, and Impact Our World, summarizes the field of operant behavior, its larger nature-nurture context, and its full range of applications. It earned a mention in the journal Nature, was a selection of the Scientific American Book Club, and won the 2015 Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis Award for Effective Presentation of Behavior Analysis in the Mass Media. |
Keyword(s): genetics, interdisciplinary work, nature-nurture, neurophysiology |
|
|
|
|
Response Class Hierarchies: Laboratory Models and Clinical Applications |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
007A (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute) |
Abstract: A response class is a set of behaviors that each have different forms, but are maintained by the same or similar consequences (Catania, 2013). Although these behaviors have a common effect on the environment, the probability of their occurrence might not be equal (Baer, 1982). They commonly occur in a hierarchy that escalates from less severe to more severe. The implications of RCH's are vast, with behavioral interventions often relying on this information to dictate treatment. The current symposium includes three presentations that address various aspects of RCH's. First, Joelle Krantz, B.A., will discuss a basic laboratory model targeted to modify an existing response class, preventing problem behavior from persisting during lapses in treatment integrity. Adam Brewer, Ph.D., will then discuss an RCH computer simulation program, assessing response patterns during extinction, after functionally equivalence low-effort responses are no longer reinforced. Finally, Danielle Tarver, M.S., will discuss clinical applications and uses of RCH assessments in determining the functions of individuals behaviors and treatment. |
Keyword(s): computer simulation, hierarchies, response class |
|
Elimination of High Effort Responses from A Response Class Hierarchy |
JOELLE KRANTZ (Nova Southeastern University), Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University) |
Abstract: A response class hierarchy (RCH) is a set of behaviors that have different forms, but are reinforced by similar consequences, with some responses being more probable than others. These behaviors commonly escalate from less severe to more severe. Interventions have been shown to reduce problem behaviors by removing reinforcement for the problem behavior and providing it contingent on an alternative response. However, it is a common phenomenon that after problem behaviors are eliminated, they are likely to re-emerge following lapses in treatment integrity. This suggests that the problem behavior continues to exist in the RCH, despite discontinuation of reinforcement. The present study used a laboratory model to separate the target response from the response class and prevent it from re-emerging during lapses in treatment integrity. Preschool-aged children participated in the study. Results showed preliminary support for the intervention, representing the first solution to date to prevent problem behaviors from persisting during lapses in treatment integrity. |
|
A Computer Simulation: History Effects Following Extinction of a Novel Alternative Response within a Response Class |
ADAM BREWER (Texas Tech University), David M. Richman (Texas Tech University), Layla Abby (Texas Tech University) |
Abstract: A computer program was developed to simulate a response class hierarchy for three topographies that required increases effort to access monetary reinforcers. Undergraduates were instructed to click on different colors and distinct geometric shapes that required different number of mouse clicks to earn the same amount of money (i.e., one nickel was equivalent to a token earned after the schedule requirement was met). Using our computer simulation, we asked what response patterns are engendered during extinction after the functionally equivalent low-effort response is no longer reinforced? Two groups (n=4) of participants were exposed to different behavioral histories: (1) a response class that was placed on extinction before introducing a functionally equivalent low-effort response compared to (2) a response class that was not placed on extinction before introducing the functional alternative. First, we investigated potential predictors of the total number of responses during extinction of the functional alternative response. Mixed results were obtained related to primacy/recency, behavioral momentum, and partial reinforcement effects. A consistent group difference (see Figure) was that the group exposed to extinction prior to the introduction of a functional alternative exhibited shorter latencies to emit a novel response than the group that was not exposed to extinction. |
|
Combined Functional Assessments in Assessment and Treatment of Behavior Disorders in Children with Autistic Disorders |
DANIELLE TARVER (Nova Southeastern University), Joelle Krantz (Nova Southeastern University), Kristina Samour (Nova Southeastern University), Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute), Stephanie Trauschke (Nova Southeastern University), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University) |
Abstract: Functional behavioral assessment is widely accepted as the Best Practices approach to diagnosing the environmental basis for behavior disorders in children with developmental disabilities, having amassed over 30 years of empirical studies to support its efficacy (Hanley, Iwata & McCord, 2003). However, no one approach to functional analysis is without limitations. We will present the results from five clinical cases utilizing a 3-stage model that includes a functional interview, a parent-run A-B functional analysis, and an A-B-C therapist-run response class hierarchy analysis. The adoption of this multiple component functional model capitalizes on the internal validity of traditional A-B-C methods and may strengthen external validity through the addition of the functional interview and parent-run A-B analysis. |
|
|
|
|
Mutli-SIG Symposium: Toward a Cohesive Understanding of Gambling |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
006D (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University) |
CE Instructor: Benjamin N. Witts, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Opportunities to gamble are increasing at very high rates. National and international casinos are developing faster than we have ever seen before. New laws in the U.S. are opening doors for online casinos and states have already adopted online lotteries. While the future of the gaming industry is clear, how behavior analysts will be involved is a bit murkier. A cohesive understanding of gambling, in its many forms, permits we behaviorists to be better prepared to address societal concerns regarding problem gambling as well as to permit students alternative routes to study behavior change. This Multi-SIG symposium combines talks on ethical, clinical, and experimental analysis concerns regarding the future of gambling research and treatment. An emphasis is placed on how multiple areas of interest come together to support these endeavors while striving to make an impact on the gaming industry and its resultant behavioral effects. |
Keyword(s): Clinical, Ethics, Experimental Analysis, Gambling |
|
Disordered Gambling Hierarchies |
DARREN R CHRISTENSEN (University of Lethbridge), Alun Jackson (University of Melbourne), Nicki Dowling (Deakin University), Shane Thomas (Monash University), Robert Williams (University of Lethbridge) |
Abstract: Gambling criteria endorsement was investigated in two large archival gambling datasets. Dataset one contained responses from 4,349 clients attending specialist problem gambling services in Victoria Australia from 1997 to 2002. Dataset two contained responses from 12,521 people from 105 countries who responded to an on-line gambling survey advertised on a popular gambling website from June to December 2007. The exact same principal component clustering of criteria was found in both datasets using; the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders-IV Pathological Gambling Disorder criteria categorised using the National Opinion Research Centre Diagnostic Screen (NODS) for gambling problems taxonomy (dataset one), or the same number of the actual NODS criteria (dataset two). Further, both datasets reported similar hierarchical clustering of criteria (see Figure 1). These results suggest that the gambling experience categorised by the NODS taxonomy is multi-dimensional, and these experiences approximate the phenomenology of substance use disorders. Specifically, the gambling experience has three phases; initial use and development of a problem (Escape, Chasing, and Lying), problematic behaviour (Loss of Control, Preoccupation, Withdrawal, and Tolerance), and the experience of negative consequences for others (Bailout, Risked Relationships, and Illegal Acts). These results have important implications for disordered gambling assessment and treatment. |
|
Understanding Gambling in Humans: The Role of the Experimental Analysis of Human Behavior |
BENJAMIN N. WITTS (St. Cloud State University), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: The experimental analysis of human behavior is an essential element in coming to a cohesive understanding of gambling, and can work to extend and refine basic research with humans by setting the occasion for pursuing alternative approaches given methodological concerns. This talk will focus on how the experimental analysis of human behavior has led to new methodological preparations, what preparations will be of use in our understanding of human gambling, and how basic research can inform practice and vice versa. While much work in human gambling has centered on slot machine research, additional considerations will be given to how the experimental analysis of human behavior can inform research on complex human behavior such as social gaming (e.g., poker) and games of skill. Finally, an effort will be made to help new researchers design and implement important studies with little effort and cost, and how gambling research can be incorporated into master’s- and doctoral-level experimental analysis coursework. |
|
Ethics and gambling research |
Mack S. Costello (Western Michigan University), R. WAYNE FUQUA (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Research into gambling behavior has increased over the past several years. Given high rates of gambling and the growing population of disordered gamblers, there is a need to develop research methods with improved validity. Gambling itself involves inherent risk, and a valid simulation of gambling would also have to involve said risk. The ethical issues involved in experimentally studying gambling behavior are numerous, with legal and methodological considerations, risk of exposing participants to gambling, as well as validity concerns. These issues will be discussed from a behavior analytic and ethical perspective. More specifically, gambling itself will be discussed as an ethical issue, and its impact on individuals and groups will be examined. The authors’ current understanding of gambling research will be discussed, especially in relation to a behavior analytic conception of ethics. The ethics of human and non-human models will be discussed, in addition to ethical concerns with respect to methods of observational, experimental, and treatment studies. |
|
|
|
|
Artistic Communication and Expression: A Behavior Analysis |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
007B (CC) |
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York) |
Abstract: This symposium was organized by the Behavior Analysis and the Arts Special Interest Group. It will include presentations by leading behavior analysts who are known for structural, functional, and/or theoretical analyses of equivalence classes and class formation, transfer and transformation of functions, and other behavior that emerges without direct conditioning (derived relations). Fields will present an analysis of artistic categories that focuses on generalized equivalence classes, function transfer among class members, and linked perceptual classes. For example, he will suggest how such classes allow people to recognize that the same artist produced different paintings and how paintings by different artists can be classified within the same style of artistic expression. De Rose will also focus on derived relations, framing a contribution of the Argentinian writer Jorge Luis Borges as a quasi-behavioral analysis of inter- and intra-individual variability in art appreciation. McIlvane will also consider behavioral variability in expression and appreciation of art. He will present a quasi-theoretic analysis that emphasizes variability of stimulus control and reinforcement relations across different consumers of artwork and also within the same individual at different times. All presenters will address how behavior analyses of the arts can be useful in educating students about both areas. |
Keyword(s): artistic behavior |
|
The Formation Of Artistic Categories: A Generalized Equivalence Class Analysis |
ANTONIOS VARELAS (Hostos Community College, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York) |
Abstract: The paintings of a given artist and its related information will be viewed through the lens of generalized equivalence classes, function transfer among class members, and linked perceptual classes. The picture produced by a given artist (A), its’ name (B), the artist’s name (C), the era represented by the painting (D), and a defining characteristics of the painting (E) can be viewed as the members of the to-be-formed ABCDE equivalence class. Once formed, all of them will have become related to each other, and a student should then state the era, artist’s name, and characteristic of the painting, on request and without direct training, showing the transfer of informational function among the members of the art-based equivalence class. Also, new paintings by the same artist (A’) should be identified as such, along with paintings from the same era by different artists (X’), without direct training. Some of these outcomes will be illustrated with data obtained from undergraduates majoring in Psychology. Finally, sometimes two sets of works by the same artist are not recognized as being by that artist. The two can become related by forming a linked perceptual class with them. Art-based education by equivalence-based-instruction will be considered. |
|
Derived Relations And Meaning In Responding To Art |
JULIO C. DE ROSE (Universidade Federal de Sao Carlos) |
Abstract: Argentinian writer Jorge Luis Borges may have come closer than anyone else to envisioning a radical behavioristic aesthetics. Borges emphasized the response to the work of art and, since the response varies with the individual history, he suggested that an artwork is not a unified entity. Don Quixote, for instance, is a completely different book for the reader of the XXI Century than it was for a reader of Cervantes’ time; it may be considered, indeed, a different book for each different reader and even for the same reader at each different time it is read. The same happens with music, paintings, theater, and so forth. Each person that comes into contact with a work of art has a different history with the work and its elements. An essential feature of this history is the network of derived relations involving the elements of the artwork, and the transfer or transformation of meaning and emotional functions across this network. |
|
Artistic Expression and Appreciation: A Contingency Coherence Analysis |
WILLIAM J. MCILVANE (University of Massachusetts Medical School), Joanne Kledaras (Praxis, Inc.) |
Abstract: There is great variability across and even within individuals in how various forms of artwork are appreciated. For example, any one highly respected critic may consider a new film to be worthy of Oscar consideration whereas another equally respected critic may perceive the film as superficial and lacking in artistic merit. Years later, the former critic may have changed his/her opinion, viewing the film more negatively while the latter may have discovered merit that s/he missed initially. Our presentation will discuss sources of variability in artistic expression and appreciation in terms of basic stimulus control and reinforcement processes organized within a contingency coherence framework. This quasi-theoretical analysis accounts for inter- and intra-personal variability in terms of discriminability, primarily but not exclusively within stimulus dimensions. Further, we will suggest that analogies to variability in art appreciation may be useful for conveying key elements of contingency coherence theory to those who are unfamiliar with its tenets. |
|
|
|
|
Experimental Arrangements and Reinforcer Variables Affecting Resurgence |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
006C (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Apral Foreman (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: Resurgence is a replicable process that has been demonstrated across an array of different types and values of reinforcement schedules and species. However, the specific reinforcement-history parameters that produce (and re-produce) resurged responding remain unclear. The experiments in this symposium systematically examine reinforcement-schedule parameters (such as reinforcement rate and reinforcer magnitude) and experimental arrangements to determine situations in which responding resurges, and the extent to which that resurged responding is replicable across repeated exposures to extinction. Presenters will describe empirical data, and discuss implications of those data for theory and practice. |
Keyword(s): behavioral momentum, extinction, human operant, resurgence |
|
The Effects of Reinforcement Schedule Density for Alternative Behavior on Resurgence |
KATHRYN M. KESTNER (Western Michigan University), Stephanie M. Peterson (Western Michigan University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: Extinction-induced resurgence refers to recovery of a previously extinguished response when an alternative response no longer produces reinforcement. Resurgence has been demonstrated across organisms with a variety of behaviors and reinforcers. Applied interventions using differential reinforcement of alternative behaviors are common and resurgence of problem behavior has been observed following interruptions to the alternative reinforcement schedule. Research on applied interventions may benefit from translational studies informing the effects of controllable variables on resurgence. Research with nonhuman animals suggests that the schedule of reinforcement for the alternative response can increase or decrease the degree of resurgence obtained during a test. One parameter of reinforcement that seems to affect resurgence in the nonhuman literature is density of alternative reinforcement. The present study compared the effects of varying rich and lean density alternative reinforcement schedules on resurgence of responding in human participants on a computer task. Potential implications for designing applied interventions to reduce treatment relapse and suggestions for future areas of research will be discussed. |
|
Relations between Resurgence and Reinforcer Parameters |
LUCIE ROMANO (West Virginia University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: Resurgence refers to the reoccurrence of a previously reinforced response when differential reinforcement for an alternative response is discontinued. Although resurgence is thought to be influenced by the “momentum” of the previously reinforced response, much remains unknown about how variables that influence behavioral momentum, such as reinforcer rate and magnitude, affect resurgence. In the current series of studies, we identified different ways in which response momentum could be affected (such as the reinforcement rate, reinforcer magnitude, and delay to reinforcement) and systematically manipulated those variables in a human-operant experimental arrangement. Results suggest that, in addition to behavioral momentum, resurgence may be strongly affected by the extent to which shifts between reinforcement and extinction are discriminable. We discuss the implications of these findings for the treatment of problem behavior. |
|
Repeated Within-Session Resurgence |
JAMES E. COOK (West Virginia University), Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: Resurgence is a replicable process, but the resurgence effect is transitory and decreases with repetition, making repeated within-subject examinations of resurgence difficult. Four pigeons underwent repeated within-session resurgence tests across daily sessions. Each session was divided into 3 phases. In Phase 1, responses on the left key (resurgence key) were reinforced on a fixed-interval (FI) or variable-interval (VI) 30-s schedule. In Phase 2, responses on the center key (alternative key) were reinforced on an equivalent schedule, and responses on the left key were placed on extinction. In Phase 3 (resurgence test), responses on both keys were placed on extinction. The right key (control key) never provided reinforcement. Phases changed when responding occurred exclusively on the key providing reinforcement for 5 consecutive intervals. In the resurgence test, responding occurred on the resurgence key, and little to no responding occurred on the control key. The resurgence effect occurred in 56-100% of 23-30 consecutive sessions but decreased in magnitude with repetition. This method may be useful to researchers interested in examining repeated relapse phenomena. |
|
|
|
|
Exploring Student Engagement through a Behavioral Analytic Framework |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
206AB (CC) |
Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Sarah Wilson (University of Mississippi) |
CE Instructor: Darlene E. Crone-Todd, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Engaging students at the college level is important, and implementing behavioral principles in various student settings to facilitate student engagement is underexplored. Engagement in courses by college students is linked to higher achievement in the classroom (Kuh, Cruce, Shoup, Kinzie, & Gonyea, 2008). Additionally, undergraduate psychology students who are involved in activities outside their classes report high academic related satisfaction and academic achievement (e.g. Astin, 1993; Strapp & Farr, 2010). This symposium will discuss the engagement of undergraduate students in academia both in and out of the classroom. The first presentation will discuss the relation between GPA and the time of the semester that students choose to participate in research studies, and explain the implications for experimental research. The second presentation will review methods that were used to bring behavioral analytic principles into the classroom. The final presentation will discuss the implications of using a contextual behavioral analysis of student persistence to address student engagement. |
Keyword(s): behavior, education, engagement, student |
|
Early bird gets the A: Is GPA related to when in the semester students participate in research studies and does it matter? |
EMILY JACOBSON (University of Mississippi), Solomon Kurz (University of Mississippi), Emmie Hebert (University of Mississippi), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi) |
Abstract: College undergraduates are an interesting population, in their own right, and they are a popular source for convenience sampling. In many studies, undergraduates receive course credit or other rewards for their participation. These contingencies are possible threats to internal validity. One related question is if undergraduates who participate in studies earlier in the semester are more sensitive to experimental contingencies than are those to participate later in the semester. Similarly, is the time in the semester undergraduates participate in studies related to their GPA? In this talk, we will present data from multiple studies aimed at determining if (a) time in the semester is related to experimental performance, if (b) time in the semester is related to GPA, and if (c) GPA is related to experimental performance. We will discuss whether time in the semester or GPA are useful to control for when interpreting results from studies using undergraduate participants. |
|
Applying Behavior Analysis: Student Engagement Behavior |
DARLENE E. CRONE-TODD (Salem State University) |
Abstract: The use of behavior analytic principles and procedures can clearly be taught, but are just as important to use and model, in the classroom. This is especially the case when teaching students in behavior analysis, education, as well as in other relevant academic areas. In this talk, an overview of the relevant principles and procedures involved in behavior-analytic approaches to teaching will be described, including personalized systems of instruction and interteaching at the undergraduate level. These approaches will also be compared with traditional lecturing. Data will be provided showing the relationship between the methods, student behavior, and student performance (products of behavior). Student performance is measured by a model of hierarchical complexity, with interobserver agreement of 95%. In general, all methods show demonstrated effectiveness when carried out appropriately; however, the behavior-analytic approaches result in performance consistent with more complex thinking. Thus, both PSI and Interteaching are recommended forms of teaching. |
|
Giving Students What They Came For: Applying a Contextual Behavioral Analysis to the Challenge of University Student Engagement |
EMILY KENNISON SANDOZ (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Ashlyne Mullen (University of Louisiana at Lafayette) |
Abstract: Retention is a significant problem for universities across the United States. Most undergraduate students struggle with what’s been referred to as student persistence. In other words, they struggle to behave in a way that culminates in leaving college with a degree instead of in failure or withdrawal. Student engagement has been offered as a potential solution for facilitating student persistence. Students who attend and participate in class, who turn in assignments, who join clubs, and who otherwise exhibit university-relevant behaviors seem to be more likely to persist. It is unclear, however, how to change the university context in such a way that it facilitates such behaviors. Efforts to mandate interpersonal involvement and to reinforce academic behavior have been met with some success. Yet, retention levels for public universities hover around 30-60%. This paper will explore what contextual behavioral analysis of student persistence might offer to the problem of student engagement. Several examples of interventions based on an integration of acceptance and commitment training into existing student supports will be described. |
|
|
|
|
The Nurture Effect |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC) |
Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Anthony Biglan, Ph.D. |
Chair: Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno) |
ANTHONY BIGLAN (Oregon Research Institute) |
Anthony Biglan, Ph.D., is a senior scientist at the Oregon Research Institute and a leading figure in the development of prevention science. His research during the past 30 years has helped to identify effective family, school, and community interventions to prevent the most common and costly problems of childhood and adolescence. He is a leader in efforts to use prevention science to build more nurturing families, schools, and communities, throughout the world. Dr. Biglan is a former president of the Society for Prevention Research. In recent years, his work has shifted to comprehensive interventions with the potential to prevent the entire range of child and adolescent problems. He was a member of the Institute of Medicine Committee on Prevention, which released its report in 2009 documenting numerous evidence-based preventive interventions that can prevent multiple problems. His recent review of preventive interventions concluded that diverse psychological, behavioral, and health problems can be prevented through the promotion of nurturing families, schools, and communities. Dr. Biglan's book, The Nurture Effect: How the Science of Human Behavior Can Improve Our Lives and Our World (New Harbinger Publications) is a union of his experience and knowledge and experimental evidence stressing the importance of nurturing in raising happy children who become thriving and successful as adults. The book will be available in spring of 2015. |
Abstract: Ensuring that the behavioral sciences produce the improvements in human well-being that we all hope for requires that many more people understand and appreciate the knowledge about human behavior and society that have accumulated in the past 50 years. In The Nurture Effect, Dr. Anthony Biglan has tried to communicate to a broad audience of scientists and nonscientists how the behavioral sciences have accumulated programs, policies, and practices that can have great benefit in improving well-being. Taking an evolutionary approach, he will describe the development during the past 50 or so years of our understanding of operant learning and symbolic processes, as well as the principles involved in the recent evolution of capitalism. In the first section of the book, he describes the contextual principles that are, in his view, the foundation for the progress that has been made. In the second section, he describes family, school, peer, and clinical interventions that have solid evidence of benefit in the prevention and treatment of virtually all of the most common and costly problems of human behavior. But our progress in improving well-being will be limited if we fail to change the trajectory of modern capitalism so that its practices benefit everyone. In the third section, he describes the current problems with our system in terms of the contexts that have selected harmful business practices and economic policies. In the fourth section, he describes what can be done to ignite a movement that influences our societies to adopt the programs, policies, and practices that make all of our environments more nurturing. |
Keyword(s): capitalism, evolution, nurture |
|
|
|
|
Evidence-based Practice: How Applied Behavior Analysis Found Its Heart and Ethics |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
213AB (CC) |
Area: PRA/TPC; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Trina Spencer (Northern Arizona University) |
Discussant: Keith D. Allen (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center) |
CE Instructor: Trina Spencer, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Within an Evidence-based Practice (EBP) framework, client values, preferences, and context complement best available evidence and clinical expertise to help inform clinical decisions. Although they traditionally have been essential variables for ensuring socially valid behavior analytic services, client values, preferences, and context deserve more explicit attention in behavior analytic training and journals. As professional and ethical challenges proliferate, behavior analysts need guidance about how to judge the relevance of variables, balance conflicting perspectives, and be guided by empirical evidence while practicing within the boundaries of responsible conduct. In this symposium, the presenters will explore these boundaries through an ethical lens and offer practical recommendations for using an EBP decision-making framework when training graduate students in ABA and to guide behavior analysts’ actions when confronted with ethical challenges. Recommendations will also include ways in which to integrate client values, preferences, and context in the decision making process so that benefits to clients can be maximized and collaborative working relationships can be maintained. |
Keyword(s): Client Values, Contextual Fit, Ethics, Evidence-based Practice |
|
Client Values, Preferences, and Context: More Than Just a Question on the BCBA Exam |
SUSAN WILCZYNSKI (Ball State University) |
Abstract: Graduate students who study Applied Behavior Analysis are very familiar with the BACB 4th edition task list and can tell you that resources constraint should influence treatment recommendations. Is this all they should know about client values, preferences, and context? In 2014, Slocum and colleagues defined the evidence-based practice of applied behavior analysis as including not only the best available evidence, but also clinical expertise and the values and preferences of clients. This presentation outlines the importance of client values, preferences, and contextual fit. Client values and preferences extend beyond the parameters of a preference assessment because it can influence treatment integrity and acceptability. Contextual fit can impact not only the adoption of treatments but also the long-term sustainability of treatment implementation. Client values, preference, and context have direct bearing on the quality of services we offer and the degree to which we will meet our goal of producing socially meaningful improvements in the lives of those we serve. This presentation will show practitioners how to use a decision-making framework to better consider client values, preferences, and context. It will also identify variables supervisors must consider when mentoring the next generation of behavior analysts. |
|
Social Validity, Cultural Reciprocity, and Ethics: Collaboration with Clients and Professionals |
TRINA SPENCER (Northern Arizona University) |
Abstract: Integrating client values, preferences, and context is a critical component of evidence-based behavior analytic practice. Without considering variables such as client or family’s goals, capacity, and preference for recommendations, social validity may suffer. If the relevant characteristics and preferences of all the individuals involved are not respectfully considered in the decision-making process, critical outcomes may be compromised and ethical challenges may arise. An approach, called posture of cultural reciprocity combined with an evidence-based practice (EBP) framework, offers strategies to promote collaboration among behavior analysts, clients, families and professionals when perspectives and values conflict. The steps of cultural reciprocity can help professionals critically examine their own biases and assumptions while sincerely seeking understanding of others’ perspective and values. Through a conceptual analysis of the role of client values and preferences, the presenter will offer recommendations for navigating collaborations and ethnical challenges using the steps of cultural reciprocity embedded in an EBP decision making process. |
|
|
|
|
PDS EVENT: Sampling Career Paths in ABA ? A Few Perspectives |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
214A (CC) |
Area: PRA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Denise Dieter (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
VIVIAN IBANEZ (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
ALISON KOZLOWSKI (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
THERESE MALONEY (Bridgewater-Raynham Regional School Districgt) |
Abstract: A variety of career paths exist for individuals with conferred master?s or doctoral degrees in Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) and related disciplines who currently possess or are in pursuit of Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA) certification. These paths can lead to practicing in a variety of settings, including clinical environments (e.g. hospitals, outpatient clinics), schools, daycares, consulting firms, and homes. Additionally, although children with developmental and intellectual disabilities are generally the focus of such services, this skill set can be applied to a variety of populations to increase appropriate behavior and decrease inappropriate behavior, teach new skills, and improve an individual?s quality of life. Career paths ranging from practicing in a clinical setting with children with pediatric feeding disorders, pursing a Ph.D. degree in ABA, and practicing in a school setting will be discussed by the panelists. Following this, opportunities to ask questions and further discuss career options will be provided. |
Keyword(s): ABA Careers, Career Paths |
|
|
|
|
21st Century Perspectives on Teaching Behavior Analysis in Introductory Psychology |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
205 (CC) |
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Stephanie P. da Silva (Columbus State University) |
Discussant: Philip N. Hineline (Temple University - Emeritus) |
CE Instructor: Henry D. Schlinger, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The purpose of this symposium is to present different perspectives on teaching behavior analysis in introductory psychology classes. The two papers will discuss ways to approach the teaching of behavior analysis to introductory psychology students, including elucidating certain advances in behavior analysis that may not be well known and that may be pique students' interest, and ways to teach critical thinking skills (i.e., a verbal repertoire) that will lead students more naturally to an appreciation of, if not affinity for, behavior analysis. |
|
Operant Psychology for Introductory Psychology: Teaching Behavior Analysis in the Post-Skinner Era |
EDWARD K. MORRIS (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: In the United States and Canada, introductory psychology courses enroll nearly two million students a year, second only to English composition. They are, thus, unsurpassed in their potential to influence our understanding of human behavior. Achieving this potential, though, is a challenge. Psychology encompasses contrasting philosophies, conflicting systems, and divergent sciences. In addition, its literature is expanding so quickly that staying current with it is another challenge. This paper amends and updates advances in behavior analysis to assist instructors of introductory psychology courses and authors of introductory psychology textbooks stay current with the field, especially advances that are likely to pique student interest (e.g., behavior analysis in space, private events). We begin by reviewing the introductory psychology textbook coverage of operant psychology and place operant psychology in the context of behavior analysis more broadly. Following that, we address advances in three eras that have yet to inform the teaching of introductory psychology: Skinner’s era (1930-1960), the post-Skinner era in his time (1960-1990), and the post-Skinner era since his passing (1990-present). In each era, we address topics in basic and applied research and conceptual foundations. We conclude by relating some behavior-analytic contributions to teaching introductory psychology. |
|
Teaching a Behavioral Approach in an Introductory Psychology Class Without Explicitly Doing So |
HENRY D. SCHLINGER (California State University, LA) |
Abstract: Behavior analysts who teach introductory psychology courses may be frustrated by having to teach standard psychological approaches to such topics as sensation and perception, consciousness, memory, cognition and language, intelligence, motivation and emotion, and social psychology. In this talk, I describe the approach I take in my introductory psychology class in which I teach students a set of verbal skills that help them not only think critically about evaluating evidence for claims about behavior, which many introductory texts do, but about psychology itself. For example, I teach students about observation as the hallmark of science, and about parsimonious (and circular) explanations, and then have them apply those concepts to standard topics in psychology. The result, I hope, is that without necessarily teaching about behavior analysis per se, except for the chapter on learning, students will naturally find it a more attractive alternative than nominal psychology. |
|
|
|
|
PDS EVENT: An Introduction to Mathematical Principles of Reinforcement |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
007C (CC) |
Area: TPC/EAB; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Jonathan E. Friedel (Utah State University) |
PETER R. KILLEEN (Arizona State University) |
MARK P. REILLY (Central Michigan University) |
BLAKE A. HUTSELL (Auburn University) |
Abstract: Mathematical principles of reinforcement is theory with three main tenets: motivation, association, and constraint (Killeen & Sitomer, 2004). Reinforcers create a heightened state of arousal in which organisms are more likely to emit behaviors, those behaviors that precede and predict reinforcers are coupled to the reinforcers and more likely to occur in the future, and the overall limit on behavioral output constrains the amount of aroused behavior and previously coupled behavior. Mathematical principles of reinforcement provides an account of behavior that is different than the typical strengthening or value based accounts of reinforcement. This panel will discuss the basics of mathematical principles of reinforcement, research implications of the theory, and where to take the theory next. |
Keyword(s): MPR, PDS |
|
|
|
|
Trends in Linguistics and Some Behavior-Analytic Answers |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
216AB (CC) |
Area: VBC/TPC; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Robert Dlouhy (Western Michigan University) |
Discussant: Ted Schoneberger (Kohala Educational Services, Waikoloa, Hawaii) |
Abstract: The two papers in this symposium will discuss trends in linguistics and how analyses of verbal behavior can inform some of the issues these trends present. The first paper will describe how, over the last twenty years, some linguists have moved away from formal descriptions of language based on innate universals that Noam Chomsky attempted to develop. Instead of inferring rules, linguists are now studying how utterances of various types are dependent on the context in which they occur. It will be argued here that this trend is making the explanations and goals of these linguists more compatible with those of behavior analysts. The second paper presents an example of how the principles of verbal behavior can be used to explain the complex syntactic phenomenon called recursion. Recursion is an autoclitic of order (i.e., a phrase or clause) of a particular type that contains an autoclitic of order of the same type. Skinner’s principles can easily account for recursiveness, as a number of examples from several languages will show. Since verbal behavior of this sort is operant behavior, it must be under control of environmental variables, the analysis of which can be similar to those of linguists who are seeking alternatives to the formal analyses of Chomsky. |
Keyword(s): Linguistics, Ordering Autoclitics, Recursion |
|
Natural Languages After Chomsky |
JOHN H. MABRY (Retired) |
Abstract: Following Peters (1983) and others observations of childrens emerging speech patterns, prefabricated constructions have supplanted the words and morphemes approach of the Chomsky-era, and earlier views. This effort, as addressed by Tomasello (2003), emphasizes a usage-based view which is dependent on the effect of adult audience (as communicative intention) on the childs emerging speech, and is clearly distinct from paradigmatic analyses (relying on verb-noun distinctions, etc.) of formal grammatical and syntactic analysis. Current and recent views in this field have also advanced the notion of discriminative functions as cues, replacing the 'rules' of grammar and syntax. While requiring frequent translation from their child centered focus, the major empirical findings are easily related to the radical behavioral view of Skinners Verbal Behavior. Another relevant post-Chomsky literature has reemphasized language diversity among the thousands of literate and preliterate speech communities. The idiomatic nature of speech (and gestures) has been the subject of several books by linguists such as McWhorter (2014) and Deutscher (2010) which discard the rule-governed and formal systems of fifty years ago. These more current views seem to share many points with the functional analysis proposed by Skinner in 1957 and later works. |
|
Recursion in Autoclitics of Order |
ROBERT DLOUHY (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Autoclitics of order, briefly described by Skinner in Chapter 13 of Verbal Behavior, are operants that sequence verbal responses. The order of the constituent responses is itself a discriminative stimulus for relations between them. Although Skinner did not expound on autoclitics of order, it can be shown that these operants can account for the classes of phrases in the verbal repertoires of a verbal community. A particular autoclitic of order is an operant that accounts for a particular type of phrase in a language. The responses that are ordered are not necessarily simple words, they may be products of other sequencing operants. Because of this, phrases often contain other phrases. Sometimes phrases contain phrases of the same type, a situation known as recursion. Using examples from several languages, this paper will demonstrate that the autoclitic of order can easily account for the complexity of phrases, including recursion. Significantly, this analysis can account for intraverbal dependencies which Chomsky claimed behavioral theory could not explain. |
|
|
|
|
EAB Monday Noon |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
12:00 PM–2:00 PM |
Exhibit Hall C (CC) |
|
1. Metacontingencies in the Prisoner's Dilemma Game: a Factorial Design |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
CLARISSA NOGUEIRA (Faculdade Leao Sampaio), Dyego De Carvalh Costa (Universidade de Brasilia; Universidade Estadual d), Laercia Abreu Vasconcelos (Universidade de Brasilia) |
Abstract: The use of the concept metacontingency in experimental research was started in 2004 by
Vichi, using an experimental model called The Matrix Model. Over the past 10 years,
other experimental models were used in these studies, highlighting the model that uses
the Meta2 software and the Prisoner's Dilemma Game with the addition of a cultural
consequence. This study uses the latter model in a 2x2x2 factorial design to investigate
the effect of the following variables and their interactions: communication (with or
without communication), type of choice (sequential or simultaneous) and inequity of
reinforcements (relative or absolute inequity) . 72 participantes were divided in 24 groups
of 3. Each group was exposed to only a specific combination of IVs, for a session with
an average duration of 60 minutes. The experimental design was ABA. In each trial each
participant had to choose between the alternatives X or Y. The amount of points received
by each participant depended on the combination of the choices of the three participants
according to the equations: Y = n x 4 / X + Y = 7, where n is the number of participants
chosing Y. In Condition B, in addition to individual points, a metacontingency was
introduced in which 60 points were released contingent on the production of the
combination YXX. The stability criterion used in Condition B was the production of the
target combination in 80% of the last 10 trials or a maximum of 400 trials. The two
presentations of Condition A lasted for 50 trials each. The results suggest the variable
Absolute Inequity as a great hindrance for the selection of the target combinaction. The
variable No Communication did not prevent the selection of the combination, however,
it is difficult to maintain the production of the combination by the group after the
completion of the stability criterion. The interaction between at least two of the following
variables facilitated the acquisition of target combination: With Communication,
Sequential Choices and Relative Iniquity. |
|
|
2. The effect of instruction´s format over the pattern in a laboratory
microculture |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
ANDRÉ SACONATTO (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Henrique Angelo (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Thomas Anatol Da Rocha Woelz (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Artur Nogueira (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Jade Araújo (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Candido Pessoa (Nucleo Paradigma), Maria Amalia Andery (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo) |
Abstract: Experiments have shown the selection of patterns of interlocking behavioral contingencies (IBCs) through generations of participants. The maintenance of specific forms of interlocked contingencies rather than many other possible forms was observed in these studies and some authors explained it by the more or less complete verbal description of contingency. This study manipulated aspects related to the description of experimental contingencies, adding an irrelevant aspect in the description or the criteria to produce the consequence designed to select the interlocked behavioral contingencies. Therefore, the objective was to verify the effects of the instructions’ format given to participants on the pattern of interlocked behavioral contingencies. The experiment consisted in two phases using an ABA design in which the criteria for the production of the selecting consequences were inverted in relation to the previous phase. The results suggests that the described pattern was maintained through some generations, modifying with the transmission to later generations. When the described pattern stopped being produced, a variation was observed through some cycles until a new pattern was established and maintained. The verbal description may have diverse implications to the maintenance of a culture. Among other implications, the description can play a role in the determination of the way contingencies interlock and may restrain the cultural variability when the environmental conditions have been modified. |
|
|
3. Variables and Social Mechanisms of Superstitious Behavior |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
MARCELO FROTA BENVENUTI (USP), Thais F N de Toledo (Universidade Federal de Mato Grosso), Saulo Missiaggia Velasco (Universidade de Sao Paulo) |
Abstract: The approach of illusion of control that emphasizes the role of coincidences between behavior and environment changes is an important step to provide a basic background to understand the social aspect of superstitious behavior. In the present paper, we identify the transmission of superstitious behavior as a key question to understand cultural practices whose transmission could be problematic to cultural evolution, especially if we can observe a cumulative effect across generation when the practice evolves. Thirty eight participants performed a task on a computer. They were assigned to one of five groups that used one common task. The experimental task involved a colored rectangle in the center portion of a monitor screen. Participants could click in this colored rectangle using the mouse. When the rectangle was in some color, participants received 10 points independent of their behavior on an average of six or eight seconds. When the color of the rectangle was changed, no points were presented. When the color of the rectangle changed from a color to another, there was a 5 s period during which the rectangle disappeared. In the first group, composed of ten participants, participants worked alone on the task in a condition named Individual Exposition. In the other four groups, participants were exposed to the experimental task according to a chain, with substitution of participants. There always one participant in the task and one observer. Once a participant completes the task, the observer starts to work on it and another participant is called to observe. Superstitious responding was transmitted due to social mechanisms in chain conditions. In Individual Exposition, superstitious responding did not occur or are transient. This suggested that social learning can facilitate the acquisition and maintenance of superstitious behavior. |
|
|
4. Using Emailed Prompts and Feedback to Reduce Electricity Consumption |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
JAMES W. DILLER (Eastern Connecticut State University), Niti Pandey (Eastern Connecticut State University), Brett Gelino (Eastern Connecticut State University), Robert Barry (Eastern Connecticut State University) |
Abstract: Reduced energy consumption is one way in which organizations try to become environmentally sustainable. Long-term environmental sustainability can be best achieved by changing targeted consumption/conservation behaviors. Behavior analysts are experts at changing behavior using antecedents and consequence-based manipulations. These techniques can be used at the organizational level to influence resource consumption. Email is a primary method of communication within most organizations. In a multiple-baseline design, we explored the use of weekly emailed prompts and feedback encouraging reduced energy consumption (as measured by an energy dashboard) in two different buildings on our campus. Overall, prompting and feedback did not seem to influence consumption behavior when viewed on a weekly basis. However, there were small decreases in consumption in the hours immediately after messages were sent. This finding raises issues about the effectiveness of current communication strategies aimed at changing consumption. |
|
|
5. The Marriage Game: Do Financial Constraints Affect Marriage Couples-Revised |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
FRANK D. BUONO (Southern Illinois University), Sydney Perate (Southern Illinois University), Matthew E Sprong (University of Montana-Billings) |
Abstract: The current study examined 20 married couples, 40 total participants, across different age groups, and marriage lengths to assess how delay discounting trends of hypothetical amounts of money as a couple and individually differs. Current findings showed that as marriage length increases the less impulsive the couple is. However, no statistical significance was found between the discounting rates of males and females when compared to combined rates of discounting. Implications of how the current research impacts the field of marriage and divorce will be addressed. |
|
|
6. The Effects of Rules Describing Contingencies of University Students' Behaviors in the Insolvable Task on Their Prediction About Their Behaviors in the Subsequent Solvable One |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
TATSUHIRO NAKAMURA (Tokiwa University), Tetsumi Moriyama (Tokiwa University) |
Abstract: Organisms exposed to inescapable severe aversive stimuli show difficulty in learning of subsequent negative reinforcement contingency. This phenomenon has been called learned helplessness. In the present study, twenty one university female students engaged in insolvable arithmetic problems and then engaged in solvable ones. We investigated whether the participants showed some learned helplessness in the latter task. Further, we investigated the effects of three rules describing the relation between solubility of arithmetic problems and the participants' solving behaviors on the learned helplessness. These rules were presented to each participant after the first task. The rule 1 described that arithmetic problems in the first task were insolvable ones. The rule 2 described that the participants solving behaviors in the first task were inadequate. The rule 3 described irrelevant things to the content of this experiment. The dependent variables were the number of correct answers predicted by each student for each task. The participants were divided into three groups, the rule 1, the rule 2, and the rule 3 groups. They predicted the number of correct answers in each task prior to the task. After the first task, one of three rules was presented to each participant depending on her group. We found that all students predicted less correct answers for the second task than for the first task after they experienced the insolvable problems. However, the participants received the rule 1 predicted more correct answers for the second task than those of the participants in the other two groups. From these results we conclude that our participants showed learned helplessness and that the helplessness was alleviated not by the rule describing behavioral problem of the participants but by the rule describing the problem of discriminative stimulus. |
|
|
7. Personality as Behavior: An Exploration of a Behavioral Measure of Implicit Self-Perception |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
ANDREA DAVIDSON (Southern Illinois University), Sam Kramer (Southern Illinois University), Kaleb Kinder (Southern Illinois University), Chad Drake (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: The Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP; Barnes-Holmes, et al., 2006) is a relatively new measure of cognitive repertoires developed from a body of behavior analytic research. Similar to the more widely-known Implicit Associations Test, the IRAP may provide some advantages for implicit cognition research, as it may be more specific and sensitive to cognitive repertoires. The current study used the IRAP to measure repertoires that are commonly regarded in terms that are discordant with behavioral sensibilities. Personality is typically measured via self-report and not regarded in contextual or situational terms; thus, the purpose of this study was to determine if the IRAP detects behavioral biases consistent with self-reported estimations of personality traits. Participants from a Midwestern university completed self-report personality measures and two IRAPs. One IRAP assessed repertoires reflecting neuroticism, while the other assessed extraversion/introversion. The data suggest some degree of convergence, but only for particular sub-scores provided by the IRAP. These effects may have implications for the nature of "personality" and the situational variables that may influence it. |
|
|
8. Implicit Personality: A Pilot Study on the Stability of Cognitive Repertoires |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
DARMEZ NELSON (Southern Illinois University), Chelsea Vanderwoude (Southern Illinois University), Chad Drake (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Outside of behavior analysis, personality is commonly regarded as a fundamental topic of psychology. The defining features of this construct bear a number of difficulties for behavior analysts, especially the a-contextual nature of the very idea of personality. Furthermore, measures of personality are typically self-report questionnaires that do not directly assess the actual behavior of interest. Perhaps a behavioral measure configured to assess cognitive content reflecting particular personality traits might provide a basis for extending behavior analysis into relatively unexplored yet popular areas of psychological research. A pilot study was conducted with the Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP; Barnes-Holmes, Hayden, Barnes-Holmes, & Stewart, 2008) populated with stimuli designed to assess introverted/extroverted perceptions of self. Three college students volunteered to engage the IRAP approximately once a week for six weeks. Four indicators of cognitive bias were charted from each IRAP administration across the six-week period of data collection. Results reveal a mixture of stable and unstable repertoires. The pattern of these findings suggests the IRAP may offer a viable means of measuring self-relevant verbal repertoires. This study may provide a foundation for a program of further behavior analytic personality research. |
|
|
9. Assessing the Stability of Social Cognition: An Ideographic IRAP Study |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
KATHERINE COOPER (Southern Illinois University), Anke Lehnert (Southern Illinois University), Chad Drake (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Measures of implicit cognition commonly assess social attitudes using a nomothetic approach to stimulus selection. While this approach has generated many empirical fruits, it typically is done in respect to group differences, with little focus on using the measure to assess an individual’s behavior over time. Furthermore, the reliability psychometrics of implicit measures often suggest that using them for individual assessment may not be advisable. Perhaps an ideographic approach to assessing implicit cognition may provide a more psychometrically sound measure. The current study involved three college students who engage the Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP; Barnes-Holmes, et al., 2006) on three separate occasions over a 2-week period. For each occasion, the participant completed an IRAP, engaged in unrelated tasks for approximately 15 minutes, and completed the same IRAP again. The IRAP contained the name of a positively-regarded person and the name of a negatively-regarded person, each personally known by the participant. The results show a mix of reliable and unreliable relational repertoires over the duration of the study. Some patterns correspond to within- and between-session intervals. The data overall provide a basis for additional studies with this ideographic approach to IRAP stimulus configuration. |
|
|
10. Varying Near Miss, Loss, and Win Presentations alter Participants’ Predictive Patterns of Upcoming Wins |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
KAITLEN DAHLBERG (St. Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University) |
Abstract: The near miss event in slot machine gambling can be conceptualized as matching almost all required symbols in a particular pattern necessary to contact a winning outcome. In the standard three-reel slot machine, this means having two of three symbols match on the payline, with the third symbol falling above or below the payline on the final reel. Much debate exists on what role, if any, the near miss event plays in gambling. For example, some speculate the near miss event may prolong play in those who would otherwise terminate the session, while others extend this assertion further by noting that the near miss event may be involved in the development and maintenance of problem gambling. It is the purpose of this study, then, to offer an alternative role for near miss presentation in relation to varying win and loss patterns by investigating whether certain patterns of wins, losses, and near misses related to varying predictive patterns regarding the probability of winning over the next five subsequent spins. The data from this research support this view, and we elaborate on the impact this may have on near miss research. |
|
|
11. The Sharing Game: statistical relation between Gains, Losses and Gender distributor |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
FANNY SILVA (Federal University of São Carlos), Giovana Escobal (Federal University of Sao Carlos), Celso Goyos (Universidade Federal de Sao Carlos) |
Abstract: The Sharing Game studies resource allocation and decision making. The participant must choose, in a series of trials, between two options (optimal and competitive) with an amount of resources for themselves and for other passive participant. From their choice, participantes may be classified as optimizers, egalitarians or competitives. The purpose of this study was to assess whether the resource distributions in the Sharing Game are affected by allocation frame (Gains or Losses) and gender distributor. There were the "Gain-Loss" adn the "Loss-Gain" Experimental Conditions, both involving hypothetical money. Data were collected online through the website Survey Monkey (n=427). There was a significant order exposure effect of the allocation frame, that is, if the game started with Gains or Losses. Significant gender differences were found in the two experimental conditions, since in both o them the optimal strategy showed a higher percentage of men. This study has social and scientific importance by presenting an experimental model to investigate the generosity phenomenon. It also contributes for the economic games being more known and used in Psychology and Behavior Analysis. Finally, provides greater generality to the data which are still inconclusive regarding gender and the use of Gains and Losses in economic games. |
|
|
12. A metacontingency experiment: effects of presence and absence of cultural consequences upon culturants |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
FÁBIO HENRIQUE BAIA (Universidade de Rio Verde), Rafael Macedo (Universidade de Rio Verde), Saulo Segantini (Universidade de Rio Verde), Lesley Sousa (Universidade de Brasília), Isabela Lemes (Universidade de Rio Verde) |
Abstract: Metacontingency describes a contingent relation between culturants – interlocking behavioral contingencies (IBC) plus aggregated product – and cultural consequences (CC). We investigated the culturant selection when CC was present in one condition and absent in another condition. Six undergraduate students were divided in two triads. The task consisted in 4 digits displayed in a computer screen. Given this stimuli, participants chose another 4 digits to place bellow the given ones. Operants were caracterized as the sum of the two numbers in each column. This sum should result in a odd number to release the reinforcer (points exchangeble for money). Aggregated product were caracterized as the sum of each participant row (the 4 digits they placed). Participant 1 sum should be lower than participant 2 sum, that should be lower than participant 3 sum. If so, CC was released (bonus points). Two conditions were set in an ABAB design. On A condition, only individual consequences were available. On B, individual and cultural consequences were available. Results shown that the culturant was maintained by the CC. In both groups the aggregated product required for the CC release occured in high frequency only on B condition. Experimental research procedures related to metacontingecies are discussed. |
|
|
13. How Valuable is Social Reinforcement? An Economic Analysis of Demand for Social Interaction |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
LAUREN VANDERHOOFT (Reed College), Lavinia C. M. Tan (Reed College), Jasmine Huang (Reed College), Marisol Lauffer (Reed College), Lisa Hiura (Reed College), Timothy D. Hackenberg (Reed College) |
Abstract: The current research assessed rats’ demand for social reinforcement at different prices and reinforcer durations. Six pairs of rats (eight males, four females) were studied. One rat in each pair was trapped in a restraining tube; lever presses by the other rat released the trapped rat for the designated reinforcer duration before being restrained again. Once lever pressing occurred reliably at a fixed ratio 1 (FR 1), the price to release the trapped rat increased on a rapid geometric progression schedule (e.g. FR 2, 5, 10, 20) until no reinforcement was achieved during the 25-minute session. Three demand functions were obtained, one at each of three social interaction durations: 10 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds. For all durations across rats, the number of releases declined with increasing price, characteristic of a typical demand function. Generally, 10 seconds of reinforcement produced higher response levels than 60 seconds of reinforcement, but the effects of reinforcer magnitude were confounded with limited opportunities to respond at the higher magnitude. Future conditions will impose longer session durations to further determine sensitivity to social reinforcement magnitude changes. |
|
|
14. The Effects of Eye Gaze Technology on Social Initiation Between Peers |
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
MEGAN STOLLMEYER (University of West Florida) |
Abstract: Several studies have focused on AAC in functional communication, however, there are gaps in the research concerning AAC eye gaze technology and its’ impact on social interaction (Cannella-Malone, Fant, & Tullis, 2010). The current study evaluated the effects of eye gaze technology on social initiation by peers with a non-vocal child with Rett Syndrome. Additionally, researchers compared the frequency of the non-vocal participant’s eye gaze towards the AAC technology and towards peers. Researchers concluded that peer social initiation demonstrated a measurable increase when the eye gaze technology was present versus not present. Additionally, eye gaze by the non-vocal participant increased when the eye gaze technology was present, and frequency of computer eye gaze was greater than peer eye gaze overall. Most significantly, peer social initiation was more likely to be directed towards their non-vocal peer when the computer was present, as opposed to social initiation directed towards the instructional aide when the computer was not present. |
|
|
15. The phantom rat: Separating social and non-social behavior in a reciprocity task with rats. |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
JASMINE HUANG (Reed College), Lavinia C. M. Tan (Reed College), Lauren Vanderhooft (Reed College), Marisol Lauffer (Reed College), Lisa Hiura (Reed College), Timothy D. Hackenberg (Reed College) |
Abstract: We expanded on previous research to examine the role of the social aspect of reciprocal behavior. Three pairs of rats were trained to press a lever, delivering a food reinforcer to a partner rat in an adjacent chamber separated by a clear barrier. Following stabilization during a baseline period, the response requirement to produce a reinforcer was increased by 1 each day until the behavior was extinguished. After baseline was reestablished, the reinforcer requirement increased daily in increments of 1 until behavior was extinguished. In both of these conditions, as response or reinforcer requirement increased, responding decreased as expected. Control conditions were implemented with and without the partner rat in the adjacent chamber. A focal rat in each pair delivered reinforcers to the other chamber, and was reinforced on a schedule matched to the response rate of their partner at baseline. Additional control conditions added intertrial intervals of 35 and 50 seconds. Increased reciprocal response rates during yoked no rat conditions indicate that responding was not dependent on the presence of the partner and decreased overall response rates during ITI conditions suggest that responding was instead maintained by delay to reinforcement. |
|
|
16. An Assessment of Treatment Options Used to Decrease Expels During Mealtimes |
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
Fiorella Ferrando (Kennedy Krieger Institute), HANNAH BUCKMAN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melissa Luke Gonzalez (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Tessa Christine Taylor (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Expulsion of food, defined as food which has been placed in the mouth becomes visible outside the lips, is a common problem among children with feeding disorders. Expulsion is problematic as it may result in decreased caloric intake and longer meal duration. Expulsion may result from motivational (escape or attention maintained) and/-or skill-related deficits. Given the varying factors maintaining expulsions, a variety of procedures may be effective in reducing this problematic mealtime behavior. Procedures such as chin prompts, texture manipulation, and escape extinction (i.e., re-presenting food) have been found to be effective in decreasing expulsions. Other potentially effective procedures may be the use of various spoon placements (i.e., flipped spoon) or prompting techniques (e.g., lip closure prompt). The purpose of this study was to conduct a brief assessment using an alternating treatments design to evaluate the effects of 5 potential treatments to help reduce expels in a 4-year-old girl with a feeding disorder who was admitted to an intensive feeding program. The assessment demonstrated that the flipped spoon and Nuk re-presentation conditions resulted in significantly fewer expels. Upon review of the data and parental preference, the Nuk re-presentation was chosen as the treatment for expels. |
|
|
17. Selection of aggregate product: A replication of a metacontingency experiment |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
LUCAS COUTO DE CARVALHO (Oslo and Akershus University College), Kalliu Couto (Oslo and Akershus University College), Ingunn Sandaker (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences), Joao Claudio Todorov (Universidade de Brasilia) |
Abstract: The metacontingency is a conceptual tool, deals with cultural phenomena within behavioral analytic terms. This work is an indirect replication of a metacontingency experiment (Vasconcelos and Todorov, 2015; Experiment 1). Four pair of students played separately a game in a computer which a chessboard (8x8 quarters) were displayed. The location where the pair met in the chessboard were either reinforced or extinguished depending on the experimental condition. An ABAB procedure was used where conditions A and B were baselines and experimental conditions, respectively. The requirement for the meeting being reinforced changed through three different phases within each reinforcement condition: each phase being separated by a criterion of stability of five consecutive reinforcements. The results replicate the ones found in the original experiment. These results show that the index of variability is smaller when the aggregate product is reinforced than when it is not. These data are also according to the literature based in individual data. |
|
|
18. Rule-following histories increased schedule sensitivity |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
NAOKI YAMAGISHI (Ryutsu Keizai University) |
Abstract: This experiment examined effects of rule-following histories on schedule sensitivity. Participants are divided to two groups, mono-history and bi-history group. Participants in mono-history group were explored to one rule-following phase before an extinction phase. The rule-following phase was composed of three different reinforcement schedules, that include two different avoidance schedules, in which responding procrastinate point loss 5 s and 20 s, and extinction, in which no point loss was programed. Emergence of one of three buttons, which located right, center, and left on touch screen, and corresponding instruction label were arranged to provide a multiple schedule. Correspondences of three buttons with schedules were fixed in the same phase. Instruction labels indicate predominant reinforcement schedules on each button. In extinction phase, participants experienced extinction on all of buttons without labels on multiple schedule. Bi-history group were explored two different rule-following phases that differ in a correspondence of buttons with schedules, which followed by an extinction phase. Results showed that participants in both groups complied with instruction of labels in rule-following phase. In extinction phase, mono-history group respond similar way to in rule-following phase, still bi-history group’s responding were extinguished. These findings indicate that mono-history group followed rules and bi-history group followed contingency in extinction phase. History effects of rule-following and rule-change increased sensitivity to reinforcement schedules. |
|
|
19. The Contextual Nature of Altruism: How Relative Risk of Harm Effects Social Discounting |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
JORDAN BELISLE (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: The study evaluated the effect of relative risk of harm on the social discounting of university students across two independent experiments. Forty-five participants took part in the first experiment, where they were required to complete three discounting surveys – each of which conceptualized risk of harm as a discrete variable (i.e., no risk to participant – risk to other, risk to participant – no risk to other, and risk to participant – risk to other) and social distance as a continuous variable (i.e. 1, 2, 10, 25, 50, 75, 100). Forty participants took part in the second experiment, in which risk of harm was conceptualized as a continuous variable (i.e., percentage probability of harm) and social distance was conceptualized as a discrete variable (i.e., close friend or relative, distant friend or relative, or distant acquaintance). The results from both experiments suggest that relative risk of harm had a significant effect on the social discounting of participants. |
|
|
20. Impulsive Behaviors in Relation to Studying |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
DEBRA J. SPEAR (South Dakota State University), Amber Houser (South Dakota State University) |
Abstract: Students completed several behavioral measures of impulsivity, including the AISS, BIS, and hypothetical gambling. Hypothetical studying scenarios with the type of class (major/nonmajor), time of semester (beginning/middle of semester), and type of involvement (work/time) were presented with the average number of hours required to obtain an “A” or a “C”. The measures of impulsivity were compared to the number of hours students reported in each studying scenario. All students were required to complete nine-online quizzes during the semester. The measures of impulsive behaviors were compared to the delay to completing the quizzes. There was no relationship between hypothetical gambling and the delay to complete online quizzes. However, students that were more likely to choose the smaller, more immediate money in the hypothetical gambling situation were also less likely to report they would devote the required number of hours to obtain an “A” in the hypothetical studying scenarios when there was a large difference between the required hours for an “A” vs. a “C” grade. This was especially true for freshmen, for nonmajor courses, and when time was required for the grade. |
|
|
21. Analysis of protocol and Tower London as Strategy for Study Human Behavior:A Comparison Between Adults and Children |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
ROSALINDA ARROYO (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Diana Moreno Rodriguez RodrÃÂÂguez (FES Iztacala Universidad Nacional Autónoma de Mé), Maria Luisa Cepeda Islas (FES Iztacala UNAM), Hortensia Hickman (Universidad Nacional Autonoma de México, FES-Iztacala), Maria Bautista (UNAM, FES Iztacala) |
Abstract: To evaluate the effects of the interaction between protocol type (retrospective, concurrent and control) and linguistic development in the completion of a Tower of London (TOL) task as well as the verbal quality of post session reports, a study was conducted in which a two factor (protocol type and age group) design was used. Verbal reports collected after the solution of the task were analyzed and categorized. Thirty adults and thirty children were divided in three groups; each group was exposed to one condition (concurrent or retrospective protocol, and control condition -without protocol-). The participants were exposed to three phases, one session the training and two transfer sessions. The results showed an effect of age in the condition of training and the second Test. Meanwhile in Test 1 an interaction effect was observed in both measures, the number of correct responses and the total of extra movements performed. The analysis of verbal reports indicated differences between children and adults but not between protocol type. The evidence suggests that both the analysis of protocols in conjunction with TOL can be used reliably to study of complex human behavior. |
|
|
22. Habilitation effect on active modes of language from reactive observing mode |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
AGUSTIN DANIEL GOMEZ FUENTES FUENTES (Universidad Veracruzana), Enrique Zepeta (Universidad Veracruzana), Zaira Garcia Perez (Universidad Veracruzana), Elvia Peralta (Universidad Veracruzana), Jose Muños (Universidad Veracruzana) |
Abstract: The purpose of the study was to evaluate the effect of habilitation on active pointing out mode, speaking mode and writing mode from reactive observing mode. The habilitation concept is linked to interactions in which the learner initially deployed as only requirement reactive linguistic behavior modes. The effect of habilitation may be evaluated in the active linguistic mode. Fifteen experimentally naive adolescents, ten men and five women, 14 year old third grade Public High School participated. Three groups experimental design with Initial Test, Familiarization Phase, Exposure Phase and Final Test were used. Second order experimental arrangement with geometric figures was used. The results suggest that the reactive observed mode habilitated the response in the three active modes of language at different levels of execution, first writing, and then speaking and after that pointing out. Also, the results suggest that high execution level in the familiarization phase may have a positive effect on Exposure Phase and Habilitation and Final test. |
|
|
|
|
CBM Monday Noon |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
12:00 PM–2:00 PM |
Exhibit Hall C (CC) |
|
23. Evaluation of a multielement assessment and behavioral training for pill-swallowing difficulties |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
VALORI N. BERENDS (Seattle Children's Hospital - Autism Center), Danielle N. Dolezal (Seattle Children's Hospital - Autism Center), Amber Persons (Seattle Children's Hospital - Autism Center) |
Abstract: Previous research demonstrated the effectiveness of a protocol for teaching pill swallowing to children with developmental disabilities (Slifer, 2014; Ghuman et al., 2004). We extended this research by conducting a multielement evaluation of pill size across measures of swallowing, sips of water, refusals and chewing to determine the most appropriate starting point for treatment. Once an appropriate pill size was identified, we implemented a positive reinforcement package including stimulus fading and differential reinforcement for pill-swallowing with one participant. The participant was a 16-year old male with diagnoses of epilepsy, autism, anxiety not otherwise specified, and disruptive behavior disorder. Pill sizes were evaluated in treatment using a multielement and reversal design across refusals, sips of water, chewing and both active and placebo “pills” swallowed. Performance across the dependent variables was used to determine next appropriate steps in treatment. Data show pill chewing until differential reinforcement was contingent on swallowing with no chewing rather than swallowing alone. Results indicate that the multielement assessment was successful in identifying the largest pill the adolescent could swallow with limited refusal and with which to begin the behavioral training. Treatment was terminated following success with active pills. |
|
|
24. Discounting of Delayed Rewards in Humans With Neurological Diseases |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
BARTLOMIEJ SWEBODZINSKI (University of Social Science and Humanities in Warsaw) |
Abstract: The aim of this study is to answer the question whether focal damage within the cerebral cortex of different locations has an impact on the rate of discounting of delayed positive reinforcement. The pilot study was done in a sample of 26 patients with focal brain damage. Patients were divided into groups based on neuroimaging data. The study involved 14 women and 12 men. Patients were asked to choice between different amount of money, hypothetically received immediately or after a certain delay. The dependent variable was the subjective value of delayed reward. Independent variables were: location of neurological damage within the cerebral cortex (frontal lobe vs. other areas of the brain), the size of the reward (2000 PLN or 200 PLN) and the delay of the reward (three days, a week, a month, 3 months, 6 months, a year). A significant interaction was the damage location and size of the reward. The people with the frontal location of damage compared to people with damage in other areas of the brain, discounted bigger reward faster but slower the small one. Bigger rewards were discounted more slowly than smaller only in humans with injuries located not in the frontal lobe cortex. |
|
|
25. The Therapist's Behavior and Its Relationship With User's Treatment Attendance |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
JUDITH ELISA FERRER ALARCÓN (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Silvia Morales Chaine (UNAM) |
Abstract: There are a significant proportion of drug users who do not finish your intervention. Often users leave the intervention before the first month of treatment, when they have not received the expected benefits with the procedures. Therapists behavior has influence in the users behavior. The aim of this study was to describe the relationship between the therapists behavior and users treatment attendance after a one session of brief counseling using motivational interviewing. We worked with 8 therapists (87.5 % female) aged 22 to 43 years old and 8 men aged 18 to 57 years old who used marijuana, cocaine or tobacco, at the public institution created to prevent drug abuse. We used a sequential behavioral coding system in motivational interviewing that includes 20 behavioral categories. We obtained a reliability of 0.83 through kappa index and we performed a sequential analysis. The results showed that 80% of users that received the brief counseling attended at one additional treatment session and therapists behaviors consistent with motivational interviewing were more likely to be followed by users behavior descriptive. By understanding the behavior performed by the therapist and his connection with users attendance we will hope foster the behaviors that increase adherence to treatment of users substance. |
|
|
26. Behavioral Skills Training for Teaching Assertiveness in Condom Insistence for College Students |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
SADIE L. LOVETT (Central Washington University), Megan McCulley (University of Washington) |
Abstract: The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) report that over 1.7 million people acquired a new sexually transmitted disease in 2011 (CDC, 2013d). Condom use can protect the user from exposure to sexually transmitted diseases; however, many people discontinue use of condoms because they lack the assertiveness skills to request a partner use a condom (e.g., Harvey et al., 2004). The current study used Behavioral Skills Training (BST) to teach assertiveness skills to three undergraduate students. A multiple probe design was used to evaluate the effects of BST on assertiveness. BST was delivered in individual sessions in a role-play format that included scenarios in which the participants were required to respond to a verbal request to initiate sex without a condom. Results indicate that BST was an effective for increasing assertiveness skills, and generalization was observed with novel scenarios. Results of a short post-training survey indicate that participants also evaluated the BST intervention positively. |
|
|
27. A fading procedure reduces the number of impulsive choices in adolescents witnesses of family violence |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
AGUSTIN JAIME NEGRETE CORTES CORTES (Universidad Autónoma de Baja California), Ariel Vite Sierra Sierra (Universidad Nacional de Mexico) |
Abstract: The experience has an important role in the development of self-control. Human and animal studies have shown that it is possible to increase the self-control through exposure to choice contexts favoring the choice of the larger reinforcer if the delay of the larger reinforcer is gradually increased. This procedure is known as fading procedure of the delay (Mazur & Logue, 1978). Therefore, the aim of this study was to evaluate whether a treatment derived from this model is useful to develop self-control in a sample of adolescents witnesses of family violence with high scores of impulsive behavior assessed through manipulating dimensions of reinforcer such as Immediacy (I), Quality (Q ), Effort (E) and Rate of Reinforcement (R). Participants were 10 adolescents witnesses of family violence with ages between 14 and 17 years old, all high school students in Mexico city. The dimensions of reinforcer involved in impulsive behavior were identified through an initial assessment. Subsequently, the identified dimensions were subjected to fading procedure and finally were evaluated under the same conditions as in the initial evaluation. In general, the treatment increased the preference for those conditions where the gain was a higher quality reinforcer, despite it has a higher delay |
|
|
28. An Evaluation of the Variables Associated with Weight Loss in Parent-Supported Weight Reduction Programs for Adolescents and Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
GRETCHEN A. DITTRICH (Simmons College and E. K. Shriver Center at Univer), Richard K. Fleming (University of Massachusetts Boston), Carlos Salas (University of Massachusetts Boston), Barbara Fargnoli (E. K. Shriver Center at University of Massachusetts Medical School) |
Abstract: Overweight and obesity are associated with an increase in health disorders, including heart disease, diabetes, hypertension, and some cancers. The prevalence of obesity is higher in individuals with intellectual disabilities than in the general population. Behavioral weight loss programs have been demonstrated to be effective in reducing weight in individuals with intellectual disabilities, yet it is unclear which components of the treatment packages influence weight loss. The current study retrospectively evaluated data collected during two randomized control trials consisting of parent-supported weight reduction intervention to determine variables associated with weight loss in adolescents and young adults with intellectual disabilities. Variables analyzed included treatment adherence (attendance, participation during sessions, answering weekly phone calls, setting goals, and monitoring), goal attainment, and step count. Data were analyzed using time series analysis to evaluate within-subject trends and aggregate data throughout the progression of the intervention, including change in adherence over time. Additionally, multiple regression analyses were used to analyze the individual effects of each variable on weight loss. Data were evaluated from two different weight loss programs, one program consisting of 10 weekly sessions, followed by four biweekly sessions, and two triweekly sessions (16 total sessions), and the second program consisted of 24 weekly sessions. For both programs, 1.5 hour sessions occurred in a group format with both parents and their children. The first 45 min of the session focused on nutrition education for both the parents and their children, and during the second 45 min of the session the group was separated, at which time the children completed activities related to nutrition and physical activity, while the parents were instructed on behavioral strategies (e.g., monitoring, reinforcement, behavioral contracting, stimulus control, and goal setting) to facilitate weight loss in their child. The current study is still ongoing; therefore data are forthcoming. Preliminary data suggest treatment adherence declined over time, and participants whose parents showed higher treatment adherence lost more weight. |
|
|
29. Conceptualizing food preferences as rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich choices with children who self-feed |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
GRACE CALVIN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Julia N. Woods (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Carrie S. W. Borrero (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Pausing between responses occurs between preferred and non-preferred activities (Perone & Coutney, 1992). In the case of feeding, these pauses potentiate long and challenging meals for families of children with feeding disorders. The present study examined pause durations between bites of preferred and non-preferred foods among children with feeding disorders when children were given an opportunity to choose their transitions. Two children with feeding disorders were presented a full-plate containing preferred (rich) and non-preferred (lean) foods and data were examined to determine the average durations of pauses in acceptance when transitioning between foods. The data demonstrate that rich-rich transitions are associated with the shortest pause duration between bites, and rich-lean transitions are associated with the longest pause duration between bites. Children’s choices and responses during transitions between preferred and non-preferred foods have significant implications for feeding disorder interventions. Discerning ways to reduce pauses during meal-times can shorten the duration of meals and significantly improve the quality of meals for children with feeding disorders and their families. |
|
|
30. An Evaluation of Different Magnitudes of Differential Negative Reinforcement in the Treatment of a Pediatric Feeding Disorder |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
COURTNEY MAUZY (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Billie J. Klein (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Jessica Keane (University of North Carolina at Wilmington), Natasha Chamberlain (University of North Carolina at Wilmington), Caitlin A. Kirkwood (University of North Carolina Wilmington) |
Abstract: Given the role of negative reinforcement (escape from bites/drinks) in the maintenance of pediatric feeding problems and the effectiveness of escape extinction as treatment, it is surprising that little attention has been given to the effects of escape as reinforcement for appropriate mealtime behavior during treatment. Some applied studies have shown that reinforcement magnitude may influence responding (e.g., Trosclair-Lassere et al., 2008). Using a combined multi-element and reversal design, we examined the relative effects of different magnitudes of negative reinforcement (30-s or 150-s break) for appropriate mealtime behavior (mouth clean, a product measure of swallowing) with and without escape extinction to treat the liquid refusal of a child diagnosed with a feeding disorder. Interobserver agreement was conducted on 80% of sessions and was above 80%. Liquid consumption increased only when escape extinction was implemented. Neither magnitude of negative reinforcement combined with escape extinction resulted in differential treatment effects compared to escape extinction only. Potential areas for future research will be discussed. |
|
|
31. Parent-Led Shaping for Adipsia and Plate A-Plate B for Food Selectivity in a Young Child |
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
WHITNEY HARCLERODE (Penn State Hershey Medical Center), Shannan Lamparski (Penn State Harrisburg), Keith E. Williams (Penn State Hershey Medical Center) |
Abstract: A two-year old child with typical development was referred for consumption of only baby food and yogurt mixed with water. His parents fed him these smooth foods by spoon. He refused to drink from a cup, bottle, or straw and consumed only liquids mixed with smooth foods. His table foods were limited to cheese balls, angel hair pasta, crackers, and pretzels. In the past, he drank from a bottle until the nipple broke and he refused all further liquids. Due to his reliance on watered-down food to meet his hydration needs, he was seen in an intensive outpatient feeding program for 11 days. This child was treated with a parent-led shaping procedure for his adipsia. His food selectivity was treated with Plate A-Plate B, which involves reinforcement of novel food consumption with preferred foods. Results showed the stimulus fading procedure increased acceptance and consumption of liquids from a cup. In three baseline sessions, he consumed no liquids for his parents. For the last three meals of treatment, his average per meal consumption for his parents exceeded five ounces. Using the Plate A-Plate B intervention, his consumption of novel table foods increased from 0 to 36. |
|
|
32. Profile of a sample of obese and overweight children |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
ARIEL VITE SIERRA SIERRA (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de Mexico), Tania Romero (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Geraldine Zúñiga (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Michelle Mora (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México) |
Abstract: Childhood obesity, especially in adolescence is a strong predictor of obesity in adulthood and is now considered public health problem in clear ascent. In fact, it is the most common childhood disorder literature shows as the psychological characteristics have a significant weight in the etiology and maintenance obesity, as well as in their treatment, both adults and children. But must take into account that the relationship between obesity and psychological characteristics is complex and multifactorial. However it seems that the literature indicates a psychological profile associated with childhood obesity and overweight; however, data not totally conclusive and, some cases, conflicting. Therefore the aim of this study was to explore the profile of overweight/obese children, in comparison with a group of non-overweight/obese children. A sample of 40 children (8 to 10 years-old) was evaluated for the presence of the following psychological variables: Self-concept, Body Perception, Self-efficacy to Exercise, Anxiety and Impulsivity. The sample consisted of 20 overweight/obese children and 20 normal-weight children. Compared to the children with normal weight, the overweight/obese children presented minor self-efficacy to exercise and higher levels of anxiety. The variable which best discriminated between the groups was impulsivity. The results support previous studies that have shown the presence of impulsivity in obese children, and the existence of differential psychological features. |
|
|
33. Escape Baseline: An Efficient and Sufficient Means to Assess the Function of Food Refusal Behavior |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
GABRIEL SCHNERCH (Marcus Autism Center), Roseanne S Lesack (Emory University School of Medicine), Camila Salvador (Marcus Autism Center), William G. Sharp (Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: Applied behavior analytic methods have proven effective in treating food refusal, and best practice dictates that the function of a behavior should be assessed prior to treatment. In behavior analysis, functional analysis is the gold standard for determining the likely function of inappropriate behaviors. However, single component analyses of function are more efficient, and in some cases, may be adequate to provide quantitative support for a hypothesis of the function of a behavior. In addition, prior literature suggests that escape from demands is often the primary function in cases involving food refusal. Participants for this retrospective chart review included children receiving treatment at a day treatment program from November 2013 to November 2014. Preliminary analyses via visual inspection of graphed data (i.e., rapid acceptance of bites and inappropriate mealtime behaviors) suggests that food refusal is a category of behavior in which a single component analysis, namely the “escape baseline”, may be a sufficient assessment of the function. It is also more efficient in terms of time and labor than conducting a full functional analysis. Future research experimentally comparing the results of only the escape baseline condition to a full functional analysis would be warranted to improve confidence in the method. |
|
|
34. Treating Food Refusal for a Client with Food Allergies and Eosinophilic Esophagitis |
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
LINDA-MAI NGUYEN (Marcus Autism Center), Roseanne S Lesack (Emory University School of Medicine), William G. Sharp (Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: This case study demonstrates considerations taken at multiple stages in treating food refusal with a client presenting with multiple food allergies and eosinophilic esophagitis. Adam, a 7-year-old male with autism spectrum disorder and developmental delay, was admitted to a day treatment program for total food refusal and formula dependence. His medical history also included gastroesophageal reflux disease, eczema, and multiple nutrient and vitamin deficiencies. At the time of admission, his diet consisted solely of whole milk ( identified as one of his food allergens) and he refused all solid foods. Treatment involved systematically introducing four foods selected based on a negative skin prick test response. Behavioral elements involved in treatment included non-removal of the spoon, noncontingent reinforcement, and bolus fading. During the course of admission, there was a significant increase in rapid acceptance and mouth cleans, coinciding with a decrease in combined inappropriate behaviors. Feeding treatments based on the principles of applied behavior analysis have been shown to be highly effective at treating food refusal; however, this case demonstrates key treatment considerations when food allergies are a major, life-threatening concern. |
|
|
|
|
OBM Monday Noon |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
12:00 PM–2:00 PM |
Exhibit Hall C (CC) |
|
35. The relative effects of different incentive types and task structure on group performance |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
HANGSOO CHO (Chung-Ang University), Jaehee Lee (Chung Ang University) |
Abstract: The relative effects of different incentive types and task structure on group performance
This study aimed to examine the effects of different incentive type and task structure on group performance. A 2 × 3 factorial design was adopted. 117 participant were randomly assigned to one of six experimental group: individual, equally-distributed and differentially-distributed incentives in two different task structure (independent and interdependent task). Each participant attended five 20 minute sessions to perform typing task. In first session, participants earned base pay regardless of their performance. In 2~5 sessions, participant earned not only base pay but also incentive depends their experiment conditions. We found the significant interaction effects between incentive type and task structure. The difference of performance among three incentive condition as not significant when task structure was independent. However, participants in equally-distributed incentive condition performed better than the rest condition when they had engaged in interdependent task.
Keywords: task structure, reward contingencies, monetary incentives, computer typing task |
|
|
36. A Comparison of the Effectiveness of Person Feedback vs. Email Feedback on Work Performance |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
SONGHWA CHAE (Department of Psychology Chung-Ang University), Kwangsu Moon (Chung-Ang University), Kyehoon Lee (CLG), Shezeen Oah (Chung Ang University) |
Abstract: This study compared the effects of person feedback and E-mail feedback on work performance. Between group design was adopted and 18 participant were randomly assigned to one of the two experimental groups: (a) person feedback, (b) e-mail feedback. Participants were asked to work on a simulated mobile phone assembly task. They performed for 30 minutes per session and attended 4 sessions. The dependents variable was the number of work tasks completed correctly. Independent variable was the difference in delivering method of feedback. Under the person feedback condition, a written feedback containing individual performance for before session delivered and same content with person feedback was provided via email under the email-feedback condition. The Result showed that both feedback was effective in improving work performance, however, person feedback was more effective than e-mail feedback. |
|
|
37. Frequency of Texting while Driving is Related to Delay Discounting in College Students |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
YUSUKE HAYASHI (Penn State Hazleton), Christopher T. Russo (Penn State Hazleton), Oliver Wirth (The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention) |
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to examine the relation between texting while driving and delay discounting in college students. We gave 147 students a survey designated to measure how frequently they send and read a text message while driving. Based on this information, we identified 19 students who frequently text while driving. We also identified 19 matched control students who infrequently text while driving but were similar to the students who frequently text while driving in terms of gender, age, years of education, and years driving. We then compared the extent to which these groups of students discounted hypothetical monetary rewards. In a paper-based delay discounting task, they made repeated choices between $1,000 available after a delay (ranging from 1 week to 10 years) and an equal or lesser amount of money available immediately. The results show that the students who frequently text while driving discounted delayed rewards more steeply than the matched control students. |
|
|
38. A Feedback Tool to Assess the Travel Experiences of Passengers with Disabilities: Pilot Results |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
JASON M. HIRST (The University of Kansas), Amy J. Henley (The University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas), Skyler Rueb (University of North Texas), David Martin (Delta Air Lines) |
Abstract: Travel by airline can present a variety of challenges for passengers with a range of disabilities (e.g., physical, intellectual, sensory). Despite legislation and policy changes aimed at facilitating air travel by passengers with disabilities, survey data and self-reports have shown that passengers still encounter several barriers to air travel. We describe the development of a passenger feedback tool developed to identify barriers to air travel for passengers with disabilities and best practices of the airline. The development of the tool took place over two years and followed a social validation approach to assess services and accommodations provided to passengers with disabilities by a large international airline. The tool was designed to assess barriers and best practices in two primary categories including environmental factors and customer service. The results of the survey of passengers indicated that disruptions in travel resulted from skill deficits on the part of staff as well as from systems-level issues of policy and infrastructure. These results suggest some directions for future intervention and policy changes among airlines. |
|
|
39. Hypothetical Discounting in Probabilistic Workplace Incentive Arrangements: A Preliminary Investigation |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
JASON M. HIRST (The University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: A concern in organizational settings is maintaining motivation among employees. Organizations often implement a system of bonuses or incentives to supplement naturalistic outcomes that maintain work behaviors among employees. Unfortunately, incentive systems tend to be mediated by supervisors who cannot monitor the behavior of all employees at any given time. The resulting incentive system may result in a system of delayed and probabilistic contingencies between work behavior and contrived reinforcement. Because the literature in behavioral economics has demonstrated that the value of delayed or uncertain outcomes is discounted, a behavioral economic framework may have some utility for employee motivation systems. To determine the degree to which discounting might occur in workplace settings with probabilistic incentive contingencies, we adapted an adjusting amount discounting task in which we asked participants to choose between a larger, uncertain option and a smaller, certain option with the options being framed as workplace outcomes. The results were somewhat idiosyncratic with some participants appearing to discount monotonically as a function of probability while other participants did not appear to discount. The present study was exploratory in nature, but may suggest some directions for future investigation on how economic concepts can affect important employee behaviors. |
|
|
40. A group contingency to increase cleanliness in a center setting utilizing a multiple baseline design |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
LINDSAY K. BRANCH (Little Star Center), Margaret M. Moore Moore (Little Star Center), Kaitlyn Peitz (Little Star Center), Brooke Raderstorf (Little Star Center), Vincent LaMarca (Little Star Center), William Tim Courtney (Little Star Center) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study is to increase the cleanliness of several instructional areas in an early intervention applied behavior analysis center for children with autism. The participants in this study are the staff members that work with the children at this center. The participant’s ages range from 19 years old to 53 years old all with a minimum of a high school diploma with the majority of the participants having a bachelor’s degree. Utilizing a multiple baseline design, an interdependent group contingency was put in place to maintain a sufficient level of cleanliness throughout the day. The group earned half of a token or a whole token depending on the current phase of the intervention and the level of cleanliness of the areas in question. The tokens were presented daily at a morning meeting where all staff at the center attended. Once all 12 tokens were earned, the group selected a food item as a backup reinforcer. The bathrooms and kitchen show significant improvement in cleanliness from baseline levels, while the motor room shows moderate improvements in cleanliness. |
|
|
41. The Effects of a Combined Group Reinforcement Contingency and Corrective Feedback on Treatment Integrity and Daily Note Accuracy of Behavior Line Technicians |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
GREGORY R. MANCIL (Louisiana Tech University) |
Abstract: One of the most important aspects of treatment outcome research is establishing treatment integrity. Integrity of the treatment refers to the degree to which treatment is implemented as intended (Perepletchikova & Kazdin, 2005). The level of treatment integrity effects the outcomes of treatments (Wilder, Atwell, and Wine, 2006), with lower levels of fidelity have poorer outcomes, particularly when the levels reach below 50% (Vollmer et al., 1999). In facility and school staff working for individuals with developmental disabilities often implement procedures haphazardly with low levels of treatment integrity, if at all (Reid & Parsons, 2005). In addition, staff documents procedures and/ or outcomes poorly during the day. Thus, the purpose of this study was to investigate the examine the effects of a group reinforcement contingency and corrective feedback intervention on the behavioral accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity. A reversal design (ABACAC) design was used to examine the effects of a group reinforcement contingency and corrective feedback intervention on the behavioral accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity. Four behavior line technicians participated in this study with a total of 16 clients. The workers chose a dinner out at a favorite restaurant as the reward. Results indicate a change from baseline to combined intervention (group contingency plus corrective feedback). Upon removal of the intervention, the pinpoint objectives (i.e., TI and daily note accuracy) decreased below intervention levels. In addition, pinpoint objectives increased when the intervention was reintroduced. IOA across conditions was 95% and reliability (each observer's comparison of same observation at different points in time) was 100%. |
|
|
42. The Relative Effects of Incentive Distribution Method and Social Comparison Feedback on the Work Performance |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
KWANGSU MOON (Chung-Ang University), Dongyeon Lee (Chung-Ang University), Shezeen Oah (Chung Ang University) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to investigate the relative effects of incentive distribution method and social comparison feedback on the work performance in the large group. Participants were ninety voluntary college students and attended 8 experimental sessions in total. The participants were randomly assigned to one of three experimental groups: (1) social comparison and objective feedback, (2) objective feedback, (3) no feedback. After individual incentive system for 4 session, equally-distributed group incentive system was introduced for 4 session in all experimental groups. We adopted a 3*2 mixed subject design. The participants performed a simulated work task on the computers. The dependent variable was the number of work task completed. The results showed that the work performances under two types of feedback group were higher than control group. In addition, under the individual incentive phase, the two types of feedback did not produce differences in the performance, however, under the equally distributed group incentive phase, the performance under the social comparison and objective feedback condition was higher than objective feedback condition. |
|
|
|
|
EDC Monday Noon |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
12:00 PM–2:00 PM |
Exhibit Hall C (CC) |
|
43. iCoaching Preservice Teachers: A Pilot Project |
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research |
KATHLEEN RANDOLPH (Florida Atlantic University) |
Abstract: The use of audio coaching with both preservice and inservice teachers has been used in the past twenty years using different systems, but with the same purpose: to provide immediate feedback to the recipient teacher in order to facilitate, and often times improve, effective teaching practices. Bug-in-ear (BIE) systems have come in many shapes and sizes providing covert audio feedback to teachers as they teach, and enabling them to receive that feedback in order to make changes in their teaching practice with one thing in mind, student learning. This study explores the use of current technology, iPods and their available applications, in providing feedback to a preservice teacher in the classroom in order to see gains in targeted effective teaching behavior. Conducted in an alternative public school where students who have been expelled from the general education setting are sent for no less than 180 days, this project was a pilot study to determine the ability for current technology to provide immediate feedback and the effectiveness of the feedback provided to the student teacher. This study also sought to determine the feasibility of the design and measurement used. This study provided valuable data and information to the researcher, as well as limitations within its preliminary design. |
|
|
44. Enhanced Goal Setting to Increase Teacher Adherence to Positive Behavior Management Strategies |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
COREY MILES COHRS (Unviversity of Nebraska Medical Center), Keith D. Allen (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Mark D. Shriver (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Ray Burke (The Prevention Group) |
Abstract: Teachers in classroom settings are often expected to use positive behavior management strategies on a daily basis with children. In fact, increased teacher praise has been demonstrated an effective program component in improving students’ academic engagement, rule following, and overall outcomes. Achieving successful outcomes with BSP depends largely on the degree of teacher adherence to program strategies. Treatment adherence or treatment integrity refers to the extent to which a teacher follows the prescribed guidelines of a behavioral treatment plan. However, in many circumstances teachers may encounter obstacles which deter or prevent consistent program implementation. One method frequently employed to improve treatment adherence in teachers has been the combination of goal setting and performance feedback. Indeed, this specific combination has been repeatedly used to target adherence to praise recommendations in the classroom. A goal (statement) may be defined by a “verbal stimulus or event (i.e., goal statement, mental representation, etc.), which precedes behavior… and reliably accompanies a reinforced response.” Previous research would suggest that perhaps superior weight should be attributed to performance feedback components. One line of evidence for this is provided by studies which have indicated goal setting is often found to be unsuccessful in the absence of supporting intervention components. An expanding line of research by Gollwitzer and colleagues has suggested that goal setting may be enhanced, by adding specific behavioral intention statements to pre-existing goals. These “implementation intentions” specify both the behaviors necessary to achieve a goal and the conditions under which they will be executed. Therefore, the purpose of this study was to extend the previous cognitive evaluations of implementation intentions to evaluate the potential for improving teacher adherence to praise recommendations through an enhanced goal setting intervention. This led to a series of two studies exploring (1) the effect of implementation intentions following and in combination with a traditional goal setting intervention to increase teacher praise statements and (2) the effect of implementation intentions in isolation, systematically replicated with a second set of participants. |
|
|
45. Writing Behavioral Learning Objectives Aligned to the Reading Foundations and Math Common Core State Standards |
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
ELIZABETH A. LANG (MiBLSi (Michigan's Integrated Behavior and Learnin), Sonia M. Lewis (MiBLSi (Michigan's Integrated Behavior and Learnin) |
Abstract: The purpose of this poster is to share both a task analysis and resources for writing behavioral objectives aligned to the Common Core State Standards (CCSS). Since 2010, forty-three states have adopted the CCSS. Concurrently, Multi-Tier System of Supports (MTSS) is being used more frequently to meet the educational and behavioral needs of all students. The basic elements of MTSS are required by the Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA) and the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA). A continuum of evidence-based practices is a critical element in an MTSS framework and is predicated on high quality instruction. Several school districts continue to grapple with aligning their curriculum and instruction to the CCSS. A point of confusion is that the CCSS are standards-based outcomes, not a curriculum. We must operationally define the skills needed for students to be able to demonstrate mastery of each standard, which is not only essential for students requiring Tier 2/3 and/or Special Education instruction but also to improve the overall quality and efficacy of Tier 1 core instruction. Since all student academic responses can be analyzed with a behavior analytic lens, the science of behavior analysis can be used to clearly define the content. |
|
|
46. The Differential Effects of Textual Prompts and Behavior Skills Training on Teacher Skill Acquisition |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
JESSICA RYDBERG (Arizona Centers for Comprehensive Education and Li), Donald M. Stenhoff (Arizona Centers for Comprehensive Education and Life Skills), Tisha L Denton (Arizona Centers for Comprehensive Education and Li) |
Abstract: Researchers have demonstrated that the skills teachers display in the classroom relate to student achievement. This is imperative with teachers serving populations with moderate and severe disabilities. In this study, we examined the differential effects of textual prompts and behavior skills training on increasing four teachers’ performance displaying targeted teaching skills in a school for students with disabilities. The researchers targeted two teaching skills in which the teachers needed to improve. Teachers were assigned to one of two conditions (textual prompts or behavior skills training) for each of the two identified targeted teaching skills. In the textual prompt condition, the specific behavior was described in bullet format on a poster board and posted on the wall as a visual prompt for the teacher. In the behavior skills training condition, researchers described the skill, modeled the skill, and provided practice with feedback to the teacher. A repeated acquisition counterbalanced across participants design was used to compare whether teachers demonstrated the skills at a faster rate using textual prompts or behavior skills training. Preliminary results indicate that behavior skills training produces a faster rate of skill demonstration than textual prompts. |
|
|
47. Effects of Teachers’ Self-recording of Behavior Specific Praise on Children’s On-task Behavior in the Classroom |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
KAZUKI NIWAYAMA (Kwansei Gakuin University), Junko Tanaka-Matsumi (Kwansei Gakuin University) |
Abstract: This study examined the effects of self-recording on teachers’ use of behavior specific praise. We also examined changes in children’s on-task behavior in a classroom. The study was conducted in three general education classrooms at a Japanese elementary school using a multiple baseline design across teachers and classes. Participants were three teachers and 85 children in general education classes. We used an event recording procedure to record teacher’s use of behavior specific praise during a 45-min class. Children’s on-task behavior was recorded by using a 15-min time sampling procedure. After the baseline (A), the teachers were simply told to count behavior specific praise while conducting class (B). The self-recording procedure was implemented one 45-min class per day. The teachers self-graphed their daily counts of behavior specific praise at the end of the day. We praised teachers once per week for the increase of behavior specific praise. After the intervention, all three teachers’ use of behavior specific praise increased. Percentage of children’s on-task behavior also increased after the intervention. We continue to observe if teachers’ use of behavior specific praise and children’s on-task behavior are maintained after the formal withdrawal of the intervention. |
|
|
48. Tackling the Evidence-Based Practice Issue: Do the IES/NSF Guidelines Provide a Line-of-Research Protocol? |
Area: EDC; Domain: Theory |
BARBARA SCHIRMER (Defiance College), Todd Schirmer (Napa State Hospital), Alison Schirmer Lockman (Western Governors University) |
Abstract: The purpose of this conceptual piece is to determine whether the recent report issued by the Institute of Education Sciences and National Science Foundation provides a reasonable protocol that explains the differential role of methodological designs in lines of research inquiry that culminate in evidence-based instructional practices.
In spite of considerable discussion in the literature, at conferences and meetings, and in online venues about evidence-based practices, no consensus has emerged about what constitutes sufficient evidence to identify a practice as research-based, with proposed algorithms involving dissimilar configurations of quantities, qualities, and types of research (e.g., H. Cooper, 2010; Gersten, Fuchs, Compton, Coyne, Greenwood, & Innocenti, 2005; Kazdin, 2011; What Works Clearinghouse, 2010). The recent IES/NSF guidelines is the newest entry and the five-hundred-pound gorilla in this debate given that these federal agencies distribute millions of dollars in grants to support research that meets their defined criteria of quality research and promising evidence for practice.
Our research seeks to identify a common denominator protocol by which the use of particular methodological designs in a line of research inquiry provides evidence for each successive step in the process of bringing any given instructional intervention into practice. |
|
|
50. Teaching 4-5 Year Old Children to Create Cartoons in Computer. |
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
CELSO SOCORRO OLIVEIRA (UNESP - Sao Paulo State University), Maria Fernanda Cazo Alvarez (UNESP - Universidade Estadual Paulista), Fabio Leyser Goncalves (Universidade Estadual Paulista) |
Abstract: The objectives of this work was to expose fourteen 4-5 year old children to computers using a cartoon maker software, to introduce the concept of story making with 3-figures strip cartoon (containing a beginning, a middle and an ending figure), to teach matching of dialogs to keyboard letters and to check the emergence of equivalent classes among the characters and their printed names through a matching-to-sample procedure (MTS). Strips had simple sentences in Portuguese (natural language), different types of balloons, characters and scenarios, all provided by the software. The software is a free cartoon strip maker, from a national Brazilian cartoon maker site. The experiment was held in a pre-school class in the interior of Brazil. First, children were introduced to printed cartoon and had to retell the story. Then the children grouped in pairs for each computer were introduced to the software commands, scenarios, balloons, characters and dialogs. Finally, a MTS computer program tested if the the children matched the characters to their printed names. A multiple baseline procedure introduced stepwise to each group. The criteria to pass to next phase were the ability to reproduce the task given. Ethical procedures were conducted with children, parents and teachers. |
|
|
51. Just Do It! Reducing Academic Procrastination of Secondary Students |
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
ZIWEI XU (The Ohio State University), Marnie Nicole Shapiro (The Ohio State University) |
Abstract: Academic procrastination is a maladaptive study pattern frequently observed among secondary students, which negatively impacts students physical, mental, and social well-being. If performance management systems are not in place in secondary classrooms, the negative effects of academic procrastination may markedly increase as students enter college or the work force. Given that procrastination is often a result of an ineffective natural contingency, for several decades behavioral researchers have focused on the development of antecedent manipulations (e.g., a written commitment to study) or competing contingencies (e.g., frequent deadlines and differential grading practices) to prevent or reduce academic procrastination among young learners. In this poster, we provide secondary classroom teachers with both student- and teacher-administered evidence-based strategies (e.g., self-management, altering assignment or course designs) to reduce or prevent academic procrastination. In addition, we will present a framework, the Three-Tier Anti-Procrastination (T-TAP) Model, which encompasses these strategies and modifications for students with different learning histories. |
|
|
|
|
AUT Monday Noon |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
12:00 PM–2:00 PM |
Exhibit Hall C (CC) |
|
52. Inducing First Instances of Speech in Non-Vocal Children With Autism: A Replication of Sign Mand Training With Delayed Vocal Prompt Procedure |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
SMITA AWASTHI (Behavior Momentum India), Sridhar Aravamudhan (Behavior Momentum India), Karola Dillenburger (Queens University Belfast) |
Abstract: Stimulus stimulus pairing (SSP; Sundberg et al., 1996) and mand training (Tincani et al., 2006) are technologies that have proven effective in increasing vocalization in children with autism. Teaching manual signs and gestures for this population is also effective not only in symbol acquisition but also in related outcomes such as speech comprehension and production (Schlosser and Wendt, 2008a). In the current study, three children with autism aged between 4.5 and 5 with low vocal-verbal repertoire of between 0 and 2 syllables were undergoing sign mand training in conjunction with SSP and vocal prompting procedures. Acquisition of vocals was improving only marginally, therefore a prompt delay was introduced (Carbone et al, 2010) to test if that would be more effective in inducing vocalization. Vocals were emitted under relevant motivating operations and with vocal models in the very first session of prompt delay intervention by two participants and after 4 weeks by third participant. Over a 4 months period of continued training, all three participants acquired additional 9-14 novel sounds or word approximations prompted or independent.. At 4 week follow up, the specific vocal sounds had generalized to a total of 24-56 vocals including other operants, namely, tacts, echoics and intraverbals. |
|
|
53. Effect of Instructional Control on Parental Confidence in Delivering Instructions to Adolescents with Autism |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
GILAH HABER (Kerry's Place Autism Services), Jnnifer Fairfield (Kerry's Place Autism Services), Mary Konstantareas (Kerry's Place Autism Services) |
Abstract: In the literature, there is a shortage of studies regarding competence and confidence in parents of youths with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) who are exposed to skills training based on Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA). This study included 52 parents of youths diagnosed with ASD, ages 11-18 who were currently receiving ABA services at Kerry’s Place Autism Services, Toronto Region. Each parent completed the Self-Reported Levels of Competence and Confidence Parenting Questionnaire containing 11 questions in a multiple choice format. Data resulting from individual questions were put into Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS).
A series of ANOVAS revealed that the overall level of functioning, family size and location of the program had no significant effect on parent levels of competence or confidence.
However, higher levels of competence and confidence, on specific questions were noted regarding child gender (i.e. boys), number of groups attended (by the child) and curricula used (social). This study confirms that self-reported parent competence and confidence levels directly correlate. Results also demonstrated that increased confidence directly correlated with increased competence, specifically to gain youths’ attention, deliver higher quality directions and to better follow through with original instructions. |
|
|
54. Effects of using an activity schedule for children with autism spectrum disorders |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
SUNGHA CHO (University of Tsukuba Graduate School), Shigeki Sonoyama (University of Tsukuba) |
Abstract: An activity schedule is a set of pictures or words that cues someone to engage in a sequence of activities. The goal of teaching schedules use is to enable children with autism to perform tasks and activities without direct prompting and guidance by parents or teachers (McClannahan & Krantz, 2010).
The current study examined the effects of using an activity schedule of off-task behavior (inappropriate behavior; for example, leave chair, making noisy, hitting, crying, biting etc.) for 2 children with autism spectrum disorders.
All sessions were consisted of 4~5 tasks and were conducted in a playroom. A picture activity schedule was used for this intervention. The schedule consisted of a laminated card with Velcro pictures in the center of playroom. A visual timer was also used.
A multiple baseline design was used. During the baseline and intervention phases, data were collected using partial interval recording for three minutes each task during sessions. And on-schedule behavior analyses to seventeen small steps. The time intervals were 10 second.
As a result, Both of children were presented that as on-schedule behavior increasing, off-task behavior (inappropriate behavior) and their lever decreased. The results of this intervention supported previous research on the effectiveness of using a picture schedule for children with autism spectrum disorders to help decrease off-task behavior. |
|
|
55. The Emergence of Oral Labeling Following Equivalence-Based Instruction |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
KELLY DELLA ROSA (Alpine Learning Group), Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group) |
Abstract: Following years of traditional, direct instruction to orally label numerals, an adolescent girl with autism could not orally label double-digit numbers. Despite this deficit, she could read any written word (e.g., the word thirteen) and had an intense interest in baseball and the names and team affiliations of baseball players. Past research has demonstrated that oral labeling can emerge following equivalence-based instruction (Groskreutz et al., 2010) so we designed an equivalence-based protocol to determine if oral labeling will emerge following training. We are using a pretest/posttest experimental design to examine the effects of teaching specific conditional relations among complex auditory visual stimuli (i.e., Class A is the written digit and the auditory word), the written word (Class B), and the corresponding written names of baseball players (Class C) on the emergence of untaught relations and the oral labeling of digits. The format used for training and testing sessions is a match-to-sample protocol using a one-to-many training structure. Stimuli are presented on PowerPoint slides on a touch screen computer that require the participant to engage in an observing response (i.e., touch the screen) to reveal the sample stimulus and to then select the correct comparison stimulus. Prior to teaching, pretests were conducted for all relations. The participant tested at criterion for A-C and B-A on the prestest. Following the pretest, A-B and B-C relations were trained. After each training session, a probe is conducted for oral labeling of digits and the percentage of correct responses during these tests are recorded. The participant was not able to orally label any of the numbers of the pretest. After four sessions of equivalence based training, the participant correctly labeled digits on 75% of the trials without being directly taught to label these digits. Posttest performance is at criterion for all relations. We plan to continue with this protocol and add additional sets of numbers when the current set is mastered. |
|
|
56. An Evidence-based Practice Review: Animal Assisted Therapies for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders |
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research |
KRISTINA BROOKSHIRE (Northern Arizona University), Madalyn Hungate (Northern Arizona University Student), Alex Davidson (Northern Arizona University), Heather Ramsden (Northern Arizona University), Maisie Wilson (Northern Arizona University), Keanaloha Covington (Northern Arizona University), Andrew W. Gardner (Northern Arizona University) |
Abstract: A literature review/analysis of studies targeting the effects of animal assisted therapies (AAT) on the behavior of children with ASD was conducted. Accessible databases were searched for peer-reviewed articles using specific key terms. Only “data-based” articles identified were scored according to the 21 quality indicators outlined by Horner, et al (2005) for single-subject design studies. The search resulted in 45 articles identified as “data-based” and specifically related to AAT and ASD. Only 18 of these articles could be scored for quality indicators with 100% by two independent reviewers. Reviewers scored and compiled the 18 articles into a database with reliability and were deemed “acceptable” if the article included between 18 - 21 quality indicators (including all internal validity criteria). Articles that did not meet these criteria were deemed “not acceptable” (i.e. 17 or fewer quality indicators). Only three empirical articles investigating AAT with individuals with ASD were found to be “acceptable,” according to the Horner, et al. guidelines for evidence-based practices. These results suggest that there may be some emerging empirical support for AAT with individuals with ASD. However, issues in diverse methodologies, what constitutes “therapy” with an animal, and similar dependent variables need to be addressed in future research. |
|
|
57. "Get Outta My Way:" The Assessment and Treatment of Dangerous Repetitive Behavior |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
REBECCA HOLDEN (Bancroft), Jessica A Fedezko (Bancroft) |
Abstract: Repetitive behavior is identified as one of the three main diagnostic criteria of Autism Spectrum Disorder, however it is widely understudied. Response blocking is widely used as a treatment for complex ritualistic behavior. Research has shown that the interruption of complex ritualistic behavior is correlated with other more severe problem behaviors (Hausman, Kahng, Farrell & Mongeon, 2009; Kuhn, Hardesty & Sweeney, 2009; Murphy, Macdonald, Hall & Oliver, 2000). The purpose of this study was to further investigate ways to extend a standard functional analysis of complex repetitive behavior. The study then used the information obtained from the functional analysis to identify a function-based treatment package for ritualistic behavior that cannot be safely treated with response blocking. A function based treatment package consisting of a verbal prompt to complete a behavior incompatible with ritualistic behavior and redirection to another task was then evaluated using a component analysis. Results indicated that the treatment package as a whole was successful in eliminating the participants complex ritualistic behavior. Reliability data was collected for 33% of Functional Analysis sessions, distributed across conditions with an average agreement of 93%. Reliability data was collected for 57% of treatment sessions with an average agreement of 99%. |
|
|
58. Sustained and Selective Attention in Comorbid Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) and Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
AMBREEN SHAHABUDDIN (Eastern Michigan University), James T. Todd (Eastern Michigan University) |
Abstract: Children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) often have difficulties attending. While attentional characteristics have been identified in ASD and ADHD separately, research in comorbidity is limited. Children ages 8 to 10 years with ASD (n=16), ADHD (n=16), comorbid ASD+ADHD (n=16), and a control group (n=16) were administered the Conners Continuous Performance Test (CPT) to measure the quality of sustained and selective attention. The Conners-3 was completed by parents and teachers to examine reports of attentional problems. Results showed that errors of commission and omission were one standard deviation higher and more variable for the ASD+ADHD group (M=68.50, SD=8.89; M=62.62, SD=12.93) compared to the ASD (M=50.80, SD=8.17; M=51.28, SD=7.9), and ADHD groups (M=51.67, SD=7.81; M=54.57, SD=8.40). Parents reported elevated behaviors of inattention (M=81.37, SD=12.17) and impulsivity (M=82.47, SD=9.44) for the ASD+ADHD group, while teachers reported elevated behaviors of inattention (M=72.56, S=14.69). Significant correlations were found with parent and teacher reports of inattention [t(16)=.257, p=.336; t(16) =.104, p=.701] and impulsivity [t(16)=.585, p=.017); t(16)=.287, p=.281)] with CPT performance. Findings suggest that comorbid ASD and ADHD is characterized by greater impairments of inattention and impulsivity, indicating an additive co-occurrence, rather than a separate condition with a distinct pattern of deficits. |
|
|
59. Video Self-Modeling Math Engagement Intervention for Children with Autism |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
ROCHELLE SCHATZ (Indiana University-Bloomington), Rachel Peterson (Indiana University-Bloomington) |
Abstract: The researchers created a video self-modeling (VSM) intervention for increasing on-task classroom engagement for three elementary school males diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder (ASD). VSM is a form of video modeling that enables the individual to perform specific, targeted behaviors by watching himself execute a positive behavior effectively. The effectiveness of VSM has been empirically validated by previous studies on youth with ASD, but few studies have investigated its usefulness in improving academic engagement. Numerous studies have shown that engaged time-on-task is directly related to higher levels of student achievement. Similarly, research has shown that off-task, unengaged students struggle academically, resulting in withdrawn, isolated, unmotivated, and failing students. For the purpose of this study, “on-task” is defined as attending to math worksheets by writing or focusing attention on worksheet instructions; raising hands for teacher assistance; or by preparing materials, such as sharpening pencils, opening binders, and putting worksheets away. The strong evidence-base for VSM for children with autism suggests that this intervention may promote appropriate classroom behavior. Results of the intervention, including data collected using a multiple baseline design from baseline to maintenance phases will be presented. Conclusions regarding intervention effectiveness, study implications, and future directions will be discussed. |
|
|
60. Decreasing Overselective Stimulus Control through Differential Observing Response Training |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
MEGAN CICOLELLO (New England Center for Children), Rachel Farber (Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts), William Dube (Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Some individuals with autism have difficulty attending to all relevant stimuli in the environment, often referred to as overselective stimulus control. Two adolescent girls with autism (B68 and B69) and mean accuracy in the overselective range (75-77%) served as participants. In Study 1, a computer-presented differential observing response (DOR) was implemented to increase accuracy on a 2-sample delayed matching-to-sample (DMTS) task. The DOR was a compound simultaneous matching-to-sample task embedded within the 2-sample DMTS. Accuracy for B69 increased when the DOR was in effect, and accuracy for B68 increased when DOR was implemented with multiple exposures. In Study 2, the percentage of trials with the DOR was systematically decreased contingent on accuracy from the previous session. The DOR was thinned for both participants. A post-test following DOR thinning was administered to verify the level of support needed to maintain high accuracy on the 2-sample DMTS task. For B69, the DOR support needed was decreased to 25% of trials. For B68, the DOR requirement was completely eliminated, suggesting that overselective stimulus control can be decreased or eliminated with DOR training. |
|
|
61. Treatment of food refusal using the teaching interaction procedure for individuals with autism spectrum disorders |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Julide Saltuklaroglu (Autism Partnership), Eric Rudrud (St. Cloud State University), JOHN JAMES MCEACHIN (Autism Partnership), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation) |
Abstract: Individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder frequently display food refusal and have a limited range of foods that they will consume. The majority of empirical support to treat food refusal for individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders and developmental disabilities is escape extinction. One intervention which has been implemented to teach a variety of behaviors to individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder but has not been implemented to treat food refusal is the teaching interaction procedure. The teaching interaction procedure is a multiple component procedure which consists of: (a) labeling and identifying the behavior; (b) providing a meaningful rationale; (c) breaking the skill down into smaller components; (d) the teacher demonstrating the behavior; (e) the student role-playing the behavior; and (f) providing feedback based upon performance. In this study, the researchers utilized a multiple baseline across foods design to evaluate the effects of the teaching interaction procedure to increase acceptance of new foods for a six year old child diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Results showed that the participant increased his food acceptance following the implementation of the teaching interaction procedure over various food items. Additionally, the results showed that few maladaptive behaviors occurred with the implementation of the procedure. |
|
|
62. Treatment of Anxiety and Severe Problem Behavior in an Individual with Autism |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
FRANCES NIEVES SERRET (Crossroads School for Children), Keira M. Moore (Crossroads School for Children), William H. Ahearn (Western New England University) |
Abstract: Anxiety is a cluster of responses that occur in the presence of a conditioned aversive stimulus that signals future presentation of an aversive stimulus. Although difficult to define and assess, anxiety affects many individuals and is prevalent in those with autism (Mayes et al., 2011). The purpose of the current study was to behaviorally measure anxiety, and to determine the effectiveness of an anxiety and functional communication treatment package in decreasing anxiety and severe problem behavior related to it. The participant was a 17-year-old male with autism who engaged in high-intensity aggression. A functional analysis was conducted and showed that biting was maintained by escape from loud noises. This was followed by an anxiety assessment, which confirmed the presence of anxiety in the participant. During the anxiety treatment, the participant learned to engage in an anxiety-reducing response while in the presence of loud noises. Once the anxiety treatment was completed, functional communication training was initiated, where the participant acquired a functional communication response, in which a sign approximation for stop terminated loud noises. Inter-observer agreement was collected for 33% of sessions and was above 80% for all measures. This treatment package reduced severe problem behavior and anxiety. |
|
|
63. Building Bridges: Outcomes of a Social Skills Group for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder, and their Typical Peers Utilizing Parent Education. |
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research |
JASMINE TEJWANI (In Stepps), John Garlock (In Stepps), Elise Landgraf (In Stepps) |
Abstract: This poster examines the efficacy of combining brief parent training sessions along with the Teaching Interaction Model (Autism Partnership, 2012), and the Children's Friendship Training (Frankle, 2002) for three social skills training groups. Group 1 contained 5 children total (ages 4-5 years): 2 children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder, 1 child with selective mutism, 1 child with social deficits that do not meet the requirements for autism spectrum disorder, and 1 neurotypical peer. Group 2 contained 7 children total (ages 8-9): 6 children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder, and 1 neurotypical peer. Group 3 contained 7 children total (ages 6-7): 6 diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder and 1 neurotypical peer. Each group utilized the Teaching Interaction Model which teaches social skills by describing the behaviors, segmenting the skill into smaller steps, modeling the behavior, then having the child role play the behavior, and providing feedback. Small group parent training was provided at the end of each social skills class in order to facilitate generalization outside of the teaching environment though parent mediated skills training. Data taken on body orientation, on- topic conversation, responding to peers, joining conversation, initiating conversation, and joining peers in play showed significant gains in all areas. Data on skill use outside of the teaching environment shows successful generalization. Parents of participants also reported that socially significant skill gains were observed. |
|
|
64. Using an Abbreviated Assessment to Compare the Effectiveness of Different Error-Correction Procedures on Skill Acquisition for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University), Brad Joachim (West Virginia University), Jennifer Owsiany (West Virginia University), Jessica Morgan (West Virginia University), JESSICA CHEATHAM (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: Previous research supports the use of a variety of error-correction procedures to facilitate skill acquisition during discrete trial instruction. At present there is no quick and easy way for caregivers to determine which error-correction procedure is most effective for an individual learner. In the current study we used an abbreviated assessment to rapidly compare the effects of five error-correction procedures on skill acquisition for two children diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder. First, we conducted an abbreviated assessment exposing participants to 36 to 48 trials of each error correction procedure. Next, we conducted validation assessments and compared the effectiveness of the different error-correction procedures. Finally, we assessed participants’ preference for the different error-correction procedures using a concurrent-chains assessment. The results showed a high level of correspondence between the abbreviated assessment, validation assessments, and concurrent-chains assessment. Overall these findings suggest that an abbreviated assessment consisting of 36 to 48 trials may be useful for identifying the most effective error-correction procedure for individual learners. |
|
|
65. Improving the Conversation Skills of a College Student with High-Functioning Autism |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CHARLOTTE MANN (Western New England University), Amanda Karsten (Western New England University) |
Abstract: While intellectually capable of meeting the academic demands of college, many individuals with high functioning autism (HFA) struggle with social deficits which are characteristic of their diagnosis (Nuernberger, Ringdahl, Vargo, Crumpecker, & Gunnarsson, 2013; Pinder-Amaker, 2014). Few studies have examined tactics to assess and improve the social skills of young adults with HFA (i.e., engaging in reciprocal conversations and interpreting nonverbal cues.)
The purpose of this study was to improve the conversation skills of a college student diagnosed with HFA. A multiple baseline design across behaviors was used to demonstrate the effectiveness of a behavioral skills training package on increasing both the frequency and quality of questions, percentage of appropriate initiations and interaction endings in the context of a conversation. Interobserver agreement (IOA) was collected for 40% of sessions (mean = 95.98). |
|
|
66. A Methodology for Conducting Functional Analyses to Confirm Hypothesized Tangible Function of Food Stealing |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CORMAC MACMANUS (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children), Sean Heaney (University of Ulster) |
Abstract: Food stealing is a common disruptive behavior among individuals with developmental disabilities. Research is lacking in determining the function of this behavior to better inform effective treatment. Functional analysis is used to test the sensitivity of responding to three main types of reinforcement contingencies: social positive, social negative, and automatic. The current study assessed hypothesized tangible functions of food stealing for two individuals with autism. Food stealing was defined as actual or attempted taking of food without permission from a present teacher. Test-control functional analyses were conducted in which access to food was contingent on engaging in the response in the test condition. Noncontingent food was delivered on a fixed time schedule in the control condition. This timed delivery of food was based on the average inter-response time as measured in the first test condition conducted with each participant. Results showed high responding in the test condition and zero to low rates of responding in the control condition. |
|
|
67. Functional Analysis of Problem Behavior Occurring during Transitions from Activity to Activity |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
STACY COHEN (New England Center for Children), Clelia Deltour (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Children with autism and related disabilities may present difficulties with transitions, both between locations and between activities (Davis, 1987). As behavior analysts, we aim to identify the conditions under which problem behavior occurs and its maintaining variable. The purpose of this study was to develop and conduct a functional analysis of problem behavior occurring during transitions for two participants with a disability. First, we identified for each participant several preferred, neutral, and non-preferred activities using caregiver surveys and a structured assessment. Second, we conducted a preference assessment to further clarify the results obtained using the caregiver surveys and structured assessment and identify one preferred, one neutral and one non-preferred activity for each participant. Finally, we conducted a functional analysis of problem behavior occurring during transitions between the activities previously identified. The preliminary results obtained suggest that problem behavior occurred when the transition involved a worsening in the reinforcement condition, for example terminating one activity to initiate a non-preferred activity (negative reinforcement contingency). Interobserver Agreement (IOA) was collected for over 30% of the sessions and averaged over 90% for all scored responses. |
|
|
69. Comparing Treatment Options for Decreasing Inappropriate Vocal Behavior |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
JENNIFER CRONER (Temple University), Matthew Tincani (Temple University), Amanda Guld Fisher (Temple University) |
Abstract: Inappropriate vocal behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement is associated with negative outcomes including slowed skill acquisition and stigmatizations (DiGenarro Reed, Hirst, & Hyman, 2012; Liu-Gitz & Banda, 2010; MacDonald et al., 2007). Several behavioral interventions have been research to reduce inappropriate vocal behavior. Two consequence-based interventions response interruption and redirection (RIRD) and differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) have shown some promise with this reduction. The purpose of this study was to compare the efficacy of these interventions to reduce inappropriate vocal behavior in one young adult with intellectual disabilities. The results of this study suggest that DRO was slightly more effective during the alternating treatments design, and during the best treatment phase reduced levels of inappropriate vocal behavior further; this reduction was maintained as the DRO interval was increased. |
|
|
70. Teaching Facial Expressions to Children with Autism in Naturalistic Settings Using Video Modeling |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
ANA BIBAY (IME MAIA - Paris, France), Neal N. Fleisig (Professional Crisis Management, Inc.) |
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to assess the effects of video modeling to teach facial expressions to two school-age children with autism. The students are enrolled in a day school program in Paris (France). A multiple probe across responses design was used to evaluate the effects of video modeling on correctly responding to facial expressions. This study supports early research indicating that the use of video modeling procedures can increase correct responding to facial expressions in children with autism. The study also indicates that responses in naturalistic settings can be trained concurrently with the intervention to improve outcomes in terms of generalization. |
|
|
71. A review of the various models of home-based interventions in Behavior Analysis |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
AARTI HARESH THAKORE (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Ashley Whittington (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology) |
Abstract: Abstract
There are different types of treatment options for children diagnosed with Autism, and most can be classified as home-based, clinic-based, and interventions in school setting. Few studies have suggested that 35-40 hours per week of early, home-based intervention has a significant impact on the learning and development of children diagnosed with Autism (e.g., Lovaas, 1981; Sheinkopf and Siegel, 1998). Consequently, many organizations begin to provide home-based services to the families of children diagnosed with Autism. However, the nature and prevalence of home-based intervention is not yet clearly understood. Some in-home therapy is conducted by parents who are trained in ABA by BCBAs, whereas some in-home services are provided by a team of paraprofessionals who would conduct therapy under the supervision of a BCBA. Thus, this review will be an attempt to gather data on how many agencies across the U.S. provide in-home services, using the Google search engine. These data will be analyzed further to understand the nature of the advertised in-home services and role of BCBA supervision involved in the dissemination of home-based therapy. |
|
|
72. Decreasing Self-Stimulatory Behaviors utilizing
Differential Reinforcement of Low Rates (DRL) and
Differential Reinforcement of Diminishing Rates (DRD) in individuals with Autism |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
ASHLEY N. FIORILLI (Applied Behavior Consultants), Casey Dudley (Applied Behavior Consultants), Andrew R. Weiher (Applied Behavior Consultants Inc./ St.Cloud State) |
Abstract: Individuals with autism often display self-stimulatory behaviors that interfere with social skills and may even lead to more intense behavior excesses. Cooper, Heron, and Heward (2007) define DRL as reinforcement being delivered for the occurrence of the target behavior that is spaced from previous response by a minimum interresponse time. It is noted that the application of DRL should be linked with behaviors that occur too frequently but can remain in the individual’s repertoire. DRD occurs when the individual contacts reinforcement at the end of a predetermined interval contingent upon the specific criterion of target responses and then number of responses by a gradually decreasing criterion. The purpose of the intervention is to determine the effectiveness of these procedures for decreasing self-stimulatory behaviors. The procedures were effective in decreasing self-stimulatory behavior across all three participants. The procedures were successfully implemented by two different direct staff members. Staff was able to implement the individual’s regular ABA programming while collecting data on the DRD and DRL procedure. |
|
|
73. Assessment of Outcomes of Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder Receiving EIBI Services in a Bilingual, Centre-Based Environment |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
HAYLEY VININSKY (Gold Learning Centre), Ali Dussault (ABIL-T ABA Programme), Nathalie Garcin (Abe Gold Learning and Research Centre) |
Abstract: In May 2011, a bilingual (French and English) multicultural centre-based, non-profit EIBI centre was built to meet the needs of children aged 18 months to-6 years in a large urban area. Given results of EIBI on various variables in other jurisdictions, our team sought to assess several outcomes related to the receipt of EIBI services, and to ascertain whether they replicated what was indicated in the primarily American literature. Children aged 18 months to 6 years received at least 20 weekly hours of centre-based EIBI services. At intake, and each following year, parents completed two questionnaires: the PDDBI and the PSI. In addition, children’s progress was evaluated using the VB MAPP. Paired samples t-tests were used to evaluate changes in parental stress, autism symptomatology, problem behaviour, barriers to learning, language, and academics. Results indicated that there are no significant differences in parental stress following both one and two years of services. Significant differences were found in VB MAPP scores. Additionally, ANOVA results indicated no significant differences in VB MAPP scores between children of different linguistic backgrounds, suggesting all children, regardless of linguistic background, highly benefited from the intervention. |
|
|
74. Matrix Training of Verbal and Nonverbal Greetings with Primary School Students with Autism |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Malarie Thompson (Stephen F. Austin State University), GINGER KELSO (Stephen F. Austin State University), Glen L. McCuller (Stephen F. Austin State University) |
Abstract: By increasing a student’s repertoire of social skills, they will be better able to develop interpersonal relationships and be potentially more successful in the academic process. Matrix training, an approach that requires training to be framed around a matrix, intended to result in some information being taught and some being generalized, was utilized to develop a training format for two primary school aged boys with autism and in self-contained classrooms. A 4x4 matrix was set up to organize a training schedule for the boys, in which they would be taught to respond with the appropriate social greeting to an appropriate and familiar school staff member. The participants were taught four combinations of social greetings to four pictures of familiar school personnel. At the end of the study, matrix training was shown to facilitate generalization to untrained social greetings and to the actual school staff. This study demonstrates that matrix training is an effective and efficient means of teaching social skills, particularly social greetings, to primary aged children with autism. |
|
|
75. The Effects of Auditory Matching Protocol on Echoics in Students Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder and Speech/Language Delays |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Suzzanna Javed (Teachers College, Columbia University), LEANNA MELLON (Teachers College, Columbia University), Georgina Kemp (Teachers College, Columbia University), Nelcy Garcia (Rockland BOCES) |
Abstract: We tested the effects of an auditory match-to-sample protocol on the emission of echoics. The participants selected for the study were four elementary school students diagnosed with autism. Three participants functioned at the emergent listener/emergent speaker level of verbal behavior, and one participant functioned at the listener/ emergent speaker/pre-reader level of verbal behavior. All participants were selected because they did not emit vocal verbal operants with point-to-point correspondence to the vocal stimulus of another person. The independent variable was the implementation of the basic auditory match-to-sample protocol. The basic auditory match-to-sample protocol requires the participant to correctly match auditory stimuli when presented with a correct exemplar and a non-exemplar. The dependent variables were the emission of full echoics, partial echoics, and incorrect echoics. A time lagged multiple probe design was implemented. Results demonstrated the implementation of auditory matching protocol increased full echoics and partial echoics for all participants. Keywords: auditory match-to-sample, naming, verbal behavior, tact, learn unit, echoics |
|
|
76. Contingent adult vocal imitation promotes reciprocal vocal imitation for children with autism. |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
YUKA ISHIZUKA (Keio University), Jun'ichi Yamamoto (Keio University) |
Abstract: Several studies suggested that for children with autism, contingent adult imitation increase non-vocal communication such as attention and proximity to adult. However, few studied showed the effect of contingent adult imitation for vocal communication such as vocal imitation and vocal turn taking in children with autism. The previous study was to examine whether contingent adult vocal imitation increase vocal communication compared with contingent response. Six children with autism (CA: 36-63months) participated in alternating treatment design composed of contingent imitation condition and contingent response condition. One block composed of 4 sessions and two minutes session were conducted both conditions and lasted four blocks. During contingent imitation condition, adult imitated children’s vocal response immediately. During contingent response condition, adult didn’t imitate but responded their vocal response immediately. Children increased the number of vocal imitation and vocal turn taking between experimenter and participant compared with contingent response condition. The result showed that contingent imitation produced reciprocal vocal imitation and promoted vocal communication in children with autism. It is considered that contingent imitation was effective strategy for early intervention in children with autism. |
|
|
77. Generative Language Learning in Severe Autism: Matrix Training through a Mobile Application |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
OLIVER WENDT (Purdue University), Ning Hsu (Purdue University), Amber Torelli (Purdue University), Katelyn Warner (Purdue University) |
Abstract: Non-verbal individuals with autism who use tablet devices to communicate often do not surpass single-word responses for requesting and labeling with limited vocabulary. A mobile application, SPEAKmore!, was developed to carry out matrix training, an intervention to systematically build up vocabulary and teach longer word combinations. Linguistic elements (e.g., nouns, verbs) are presented in systematic combination matrices, which are arranged to induce generalized rule-like behavior.
A-B designs were replicated to assess the acquisition of action-object combinations on a tablet device. Generalization probes were taken during intervention to assess performance on combinations not taught before.
This design is currently implemented with five participants, 8-12 years old, with an official diagnosis of severe, non-verbal autism according to CARS-2 and ADOS-2 scores; these have no more than 10 spoken words, and communicate primarily on a tablet. Preliminary results for two participants (Figure 2) show performance measured as percentage of correct symbol combinations. Both participants demonstrate a similar pattern of successful acquisition during the intervention condition and subsequent generalization to untrained stimuli. Effect sizes measured by the Non-overlap of all Pairs Index indicate medium-strong and strong effects.
Results, with considerable, but limited confidence given the pre-experimental nature, suggest matrix training through a mobile application may be a promising approach. To further investigate the robustness of this technology intervention, findings need to be replicated using (a) full experimental designs, and (b) different language targets (e.g., agent-action, adjective-object combinations). |
|
|
78. Analyzing the relationship between social skills and success with a video-modeling intervention technique |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
LOGAN MCDOWELL (Florida International University), Anibal Gutierrez Jr. Jr. (Florida International University) |
Abstract: This study analyzed the effectiveness of video-modeling (VM) and live-modeling (LM) procedures for teaching imitation to young children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). Little research exists examining what predictors may impact success with VM, however age, social skills, attention, and imitation have all been suggested as potential factors. This study aims to explore a subset of these factors as they relate to a VM intervention for teaching imitation. Participants in this study included 6 children under the age of 4 with a diagnosis of ASD. All were taught to imitate two equivalent behaviors, one using LM and one using VM. Pre-treatment Autism Diagnostic Observation Schedule (ADOS) assessments were used to analyze the social skills of each participant. We hypothesize that those children with fewer social skills, as evidenced by higher social affect totals on the ADOS, will be more successful with the VM intervention. The results of this study will add to the available literature on VM by providing potentially valuable information about the impact of this individual variable. |
|
|
79. Effects of Instructional Videomodeling on Teaching Behavioral Skills to Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders Through Caregivers |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
ADRIANO ALVES BARBOZA (Universidade Federal do Pará), Romariz Barros (Universidade Federal do Pará) |
Abstract: Currently, the Autism Spectrum Disorder data has increased in prevalence rates in a manner that establishes an emergent need to disseminate the intervention based in Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA), considering that some countries do not have enough financial support or amount of behavior analysts dedicated to that cause. This paper shows results of a research aiming to teach behavioral skills to children with ASD by teaching caregivers using instructional videomodeling. Three children and their caregivers are participating in this research. The tasks to be taught are a preference assessment and two intervention programs based on the children assessments, using a multiple-baseline design. The performance on the preference assessment increased from 0% to 91% for Alice and from 19% to 99% for Cassio. The intervention programs performance increased from an average of 5% to 91% for Alice and from 35% to 98% for Cassio. We observed the generalization of this repertoire (90% for Alice and 91% for Cassio). The intervention is still in course with one more participant. By these data, the instructional videomodeling shows itself as a promising tool to teach caregivers of children with developmental disabilities and to disseminate the Behavior Analytic-based Intervention with good quality and lower costs. |
|
|
80. Video Modeling Intervention for a Elementary Students Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
LINA GILIC (St. John's University) |
Abstract: Video modeling can impact positively on social behaviors in students with autism. Specifically, video modeling was implemented for a young elementary student with ASD. This study was conducted in a reversal design, in which the student demonstrated an increase in social skills after presentation of the video model. The intervention data show that the students behavior decreased by three to five times from baseline. During the return to intervention, target behaviors had occurred between 0 to 2 times a day, a decrease of 3x from baseline. This data from the intervention suggests that the duration of the video and frequency viewed may influence its effectiveness as a teaching tool. Video modeling shows to have been a tool used to further improve this students behavior. |
|
|
81. Visual Scene Displays vs. Exchange-
Based Communication for Children with ASD |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
KRISTI MORIN (Texas A&M University), Jennifer Ganz (Texas A&M University), Ee Rea Hong (Texas A&M University), Whitney Gilliland (Texas A&M University), Nicole Svenkerud (Texas A&M University) |
Abstract: Visual scene displays (VSDs) are a novel type of augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) that have recently been investigated as an alternative to traditional, grid-based systems. However, most of the limited research on VSDs has focused on typically-developing populations. In addition, a limited range of communicative functions has been explored (i.e., requests). This study sought to expand on the existing literature on VSDs by investigating the differential impact that VSDs versus traditional, grid-based systems have on the number of spontaneous comments and correct answers to questions made by two male, preschool children with autism who exhibited different levels of functional speech. The participants in the current study were exposed to two conditions—a VSD condition and an exchange-based communication (EBC) condition—in an alternating treatment design. The results indicated that VSDs may be more appropriate for children who display echoic and matching-to-sample skills prior to being exposed to a VSD. |
|
|
82. Treatment Comparison between the Picture Exchange Communication SystemTM and Proloquo2Go for Manding Behaviour in a Young Boy with Autism Spectrum Disorder: What does the data tell us? |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
KATHRYN MANN (Monarch House), Tracie L. Lindblad (Monarch House) |
Abstract: There has been a growing body of literature examining the use of various augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) systems for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD). There exists emerging evidence to support the Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) and equivocal evidence for speech generating devices (SGDs) such as an iPadTM with Proloquo2Go to support functional communication skills in non-vocal/minimally vocal individuals. A young boy with ASD and limited vocal-verbal behaviour was taught PECS from Phase I to Phase IV to mastery. Parents and a Speech-Language Pathologist (SLP) from the local AAC clinic recommended transition to an SGD using Proloquo2Go. Baseline data regarding the number of sessions to mastery for PECS, frequency, and percent correct of mands were collected prior to transition to the SGD. Implementation of the SGD mirrored the implementation of PECS with corresponding data collected for treatment comparison purposes. The results showed that the frequency of manding favoured the SGD while the percentage of correct responses slightly favoured PECS. Clear differences existed in the number of sessions to mastery for Phase IV between the systems. Furthermore, generalization from one system to another was not automatic. Accordingly, data-based decisions are required when implementing and selecting a functional communication system. |
|
|
83. Using Demand Fading Sets to Decrease Multiple Problem Behavior For Adolescents with Autism: Group Study. |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
DAVID BARTON (Firefly Autism), Kenneth G. Winn (Firefly Autism) |
Abstract: An FBA was conducted on 6 individuals with developmental disabilities where instructional (demand) situations were the common antecedent to escape maintained behaviors consisting of loud vocalizations, physical aggression, dropping, self injurious behavior and property destruction among other behaviors. Treatment included a demand fading protocol where demands were graded based on difficulty and placed into demand sets that were ordered and introduced according to predetermined mastery criteria of low rates of problem behavior. Demand fading protocol resulted low rates of problem behavior across multiple individuals. |
|
|
84. Reinforcing Short Latency to Task Completion to Treat Noncompliance. |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
SARA JEGLUM (The University of Iowa), Deva Carrion (University of Iowa), Matthew O'Brien (The University of Iowa), James Green (University of Iowa), Gunsung Lee (The University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (The University of Iowa) |
Abstract: Some children with autism spectrum disorder struggle with staying on task. It may be due to excessive slowness. This excessive slowness may function in a social capacity, such as to avoid demands (i.e. long latency to task initiation). This poster presents a case study of an 8-year-old male, Tim, diagnosed with autism referred to a two-week Day Treatment clinic for noncompliance, aggression and destruction. To treat problem behavior, we implemented a work then break schedule. We saw noncompliance ascend over several sessions. To treat noncompliance, we then implemented a schedule in which Tim had a discrete time (i.e. 10 minutes) to complete a work task that was observed to take him 3 minutes when compliant. Once he completed the work, he had the remaining balance of time to play. Thus, short latency to task completion was reinforced. We saw a significant decrease of noncompliance. These results expand on Tiger et al. (2007)s work. Limited research has evaluated interventions to accelerate task completion. Further research concerning response-dependent reinforcement should be considered. |
|
|
85. Assessment and Treatment of Inappropriate Sexual Behavior in a Hispanic Child With Autism |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
NORMA ROJAS (The University of Texas-Pan American), Daniel Gonzalez (The University of Texas-Pan American), Noemi Trevino (The University of Texa- Pan American), Zina A. Eluri (The University of Texas-Pan American) |
Abstract: This poster focuses on the assessment and treatment of inappropriate sexual behavior (ISB) in a 4-year old Hispanic child with autism. A functional analysis was conducted and it was determined that inappropriate sexual behavior was maintained by multiple reinforcers including attention, escape from demands, and tangible items. Based on the results of the functional analysis and the nature of the behavior, treatment involved a discrimination training procedure. This procedure used a discriminative stimulus to indicate whether or not the behavior was appropriate in a specific location. The child was taught that he could engage in the behavior in the presence of a green stop sign and that he should not engage in the behavior in the presence of a red stop sign. This behavior was ignored throughout treatment. Treatment involved permitting the child to engage in ISB, as indicated by the green stop sign, for approximately 50% of the sessions. Reductions in this behavior were observed and continued to decrease when transitioned into the home setting. |
|
|
86. Dissemination of Evidence-based Intervention Strategies: Examining the Effectiveness of Performance Feedback |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
ATSUKO MATSUZAKI (Keio University), Jun'ichi Yamamoto (Keio University) |
Abstract: Evidence has demonstrated that early intervention based on applied behavior analysis (ABA) improved several functions of children with autism spectrum disorders. Studies of dissemination to community settings are now needed. The authors examined the effectiveness of performance feedback by comparing two groups. Twenty-one specialists, such as special education teachers, staff at regional support centers, and clinical psychologists, were assigned to a lecture with performance feedback group or a lecture only group. Both groups received a three-hr didactic lecture which explained the basic knowledge of ABA, intervention techniques, and intervention skills. The lecture with performance feedback group consequently received 30-min performance feedback, which applied modeling, verbal instructions, and immediate reinforcement, on one-to-one intervention setting. The participants intervention skills were assessed with a 20-item fidelity list, and their knowledge was assessed with a 20-question knowledge examination which the authors had developed. The results showed that (a) both groups increased their fidelity scores after the training, (b) the averaged post-training fidelity score was higher in the lecture with performance group than the lecture only group, and (c) the both groups increased their knowledge scores after the training. Implications in relation to the effectivity and feasibility of the performance feedback will be provided. |
|
|
|
|
DDA Monday Noon |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
12:00 PM–2:00 PM |
Exhibit Hall C (CC) |
|
87. A Competition Assessment to Identify Relative Preference between Positive and Negative Reinforcement for Multiply-Controlled Problem Behavior |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CAITLIN PARKER (Bancroft), Katie Donohoe (Bancroft), Susan Field (Georgian Court University), Nicole Sullivan (Bancroft), Tracy L. Kettering (Bancroft), Sean Smith (Bancroft), Patrick Thulen (Bancroft) |
Abstract: Access to contingent or noncontingent positive reinforcement has been shown to compete with problem behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement (Fisher et al.,1997; Hagopian et al., 1994), escape (Lomas et al., 2010, Piazza, 1997), or attention (Fisher et al., 1997). Lalli et al. (1999) used a competition assessment to predict the effectiveness of positive reinforcement-based interventions for escape-maintained problem behavior. Similar assessments may help to identify critical components of intervention for multiply-controlled problem behavior, particularly when consumption of one reinforcement (e.g., a break) limits the availability of the alternative reinforcer (e.g., tangible item for appropriate behavior). The current study extends the research of Lalli et al. to multiply-controlled problem behavior in individuals with developmental disabilities. Relative preference for positive (tangible) and negative (escape) reinforcement were assessed using a concurrent schedule of reinforcement. Results indicated that the assessment may predict situations when a thin schedule of positive reinforcement may be effective for reducing multiply-controlled problem behavior. |
|
|
88. Increasing Duration on Vocational Tasks using Visual Prompt and Self-Monitoring by an Adult with Developmental Disabilities |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
ICHA K. ARIEF (St. Cloud State University), Kim Frost (TSE, Inc.), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University) |
Abstract: This intervention compared continuous independent work during two different vocational tasks through the use of visual prompts and a self-monitoring schedule, by an adult with multiple developmental disabilities across group and individual activities. The accuracy of behavioral product was measured before and during program implementation. Visual prompts included pictures of objects and performance steps in 3 x 5 in. pictures compiled in a binder. The self-monitoring materials included a reinforcement schedule board and timer. Results indicated high levels of continuous independent work during the use of visual prompts and self-monitoring, and high levels of accuracy for behavioral product. |
|
|
90. Using Problem Behaviour as an Indicator of Preference in Individuals With Profound Multiple Disabilities |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
BRENNA HENRIKSON (University of Manitoba), Brenna Henrikson (University of Manitoba), Alison Cox (University of Manitoba), Jade Wightman (University of Manitoba), CT Yu (University of Manitoba) |
Abstract: Individuals with profound multiple disabilities (PMD) have a limited set of skills, including choice making. Often individuals with PMD engage in challenging behaviours (e.g., self-injury, stereotypy), and it is possible that they do this to indicate preference. Identifying items that are preferred by individuals with PMD may improve behaviour program outcomes. However, existing studies that have examined preference among individuals with PMD do not often incorporate reinforcer assessments to confirm preference assessment outcomes. The current study examines whether problem behaviour can be used as an indicator of preference in individuals with PMD. Four phases were conducted. In phase 1 caregivers completed the Reinforcer Assessment for Individuals with Severe Disabilities (RAISD) to provide information about preferences. Phase 2 involved conducting a standard functional analysis to determine the environmental variables maintaining challenging behaviour. Next, a single stimulus preference assessment was conducted to evaluate participants preference for items that were indicated as highly favored by the caregiver. Finally, a direct reinforcer assessment will be conducted to validate the results of the preference assessment. Frequency of engagement in problem behavior, engagement with preferred items, and touching items served as the dependent variables for preference assessments. |
|
|
91. Conditional Discrimination Abilities and Differentiation of Functional Analysis Data |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
JANIE FUNK (University of Nevada, Reno), Billy Rom (University of Nevada, Reno), W. Larry Williams (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Abstract: Despite established utility, functional analyses have long been noted for disadvantages including inconclusive data as evident by the numerous modifications of the standard methodology since its development. As such, researchers continue to evaluate the predictive use of descriptive assessments, though they have been poor predictors of FA outcomes (Camp, Iwata, Hammond, & Bloom, 2009, and Pence, Roscoe, Bourret, & Ahearn, 2009). Undifferentiated data is often attributed to a deficit of discrimination skills of the individual. Greenwald, Senuik, & Williams (2012) evaluated the extent to which conditional discrimination abilities affected a participant’s differential responding during a multi-element FA. Additionally, discrimination affects with inclusion of programmed SDs during the FAs were evaluated. Conditional discrimination abilities were assessed by the Assessment of Basic Learning Abilities (ABLA) developed by Kerr, Meyerson, and Flora in 1977. They concluded that individuals who were unable to make conditional discriminations were less likely to show differentiated results in an FA and the inclusion of programmed SDs may not aid in discrimination between conditions. The current poster discusses theoretical implications of Greenwald et al., 2012 with respect to utilizing the ABLA-R prior to a formal functional analysis (DeWiele, Martin, Martin, Yu, & Thomson, 2010). |
|
|
92. Using Redistribution to Decrease Packing and Meal Duration in a Child with Feeding Problems |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
STEPHANIE MILLER (Clinic 4 Kidz), Meeta R. Patel (Clinic 4 Kidz) |
Abstract: Packing is a problematic behavior in children with feeding problems where children hold food or liquids in the mouth for extended periods of time. This may cause meals to last for long durations and impede an increase in caloric intake and cause insufficient weight gain. Multiple treatments have been used to reduce packing behaviors including food redistribution, texture manipulation, simultaneous presentation of preferred and non-preferred foods, flipped spoon presentation, and liquid and solid chasers. However the majority of these studies focused on pureed food as the target texture. In addition, meal duration has not been used as a major dependent variable. The purpose of this study was to decrease packing behaviors of regular textured food using redistribution with a Nuk® brush in order to decrease the duration of meals for a child with severe feeding problems. A reversal design was used to evaluate the treatment protocol. Data showed that even though packing behaviors only reduced moderately, the duration of packing behaviors substantially reduced which then reduced the overall duration of meals. This allowed for an increase in the volume of meals which led to higher caloric intake. |
|
|
93. Implementing Bolus Fading and Escape Extinction to Decrease Gagging and Expulsion in a Child who is Liquid Dependent |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
STEPHANIE MILLER (Clinic 4 Kidz), Meeta R. Patel (Clinic 4 Kidz) |
Abstract: Children with severe feeding problems have restricted diets and only consume certain types or textures of food and in some cases may only consume liquids at inappropriate ages. When presented non-preferred food and/or liquids they display a wide variety of inappropriate behaviors to avoid them. When problematic eaters refuse to consume age-appropriate textures, they are not exposed to opportunities of learning the oral motor skills needed to eat successfully. Underdeveloped skills make it more difficult to control food efficiently which may lead to more problematic behaviors such as gagging and expulsion when presented more difficult textures. Treatments used to reduce expulsion include escape extinction via re-presentation with a spoon, escape extinction via re-presentation with a Nuk brush, presentation via flipped spoon, texture manipulation, chasers, and presentation via flipped spoon combined with chin prompting. The purpose of this study was to use bolus fading and escape extinction to decrease gagging and expulsion with solids in a child who is liquid dependent. A reversal design was used to evaluate the treatment package. Data showed that in baseline gagging and expulsions were high when the child was presented a level spoon of crumbles (crushed meltable solids) and regular textured meltable solids. As the bolus of crumbles was faded in small increments, both gagging and expulsion decreased. During this time skill training was being implemented using non-food tools (e.g., Nuk® brush, chew stick). Once the target bolus was obtained, regular textured meltable solids were presented following escape extinction (re-presentation). Data showed that both gagging and expulsions reduced when presented regular textured meltable solids. |
|
|
94. Tantalizing or Tedious Tokens: The effect of pictures of preferred versus neutral stimuli as tokens on behavior and task completion |
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery |
JOSEPH BAIRD (Indiana University South Bend), John Haggard (Indiana University South Bend), Sorah Stein (Partnership for Behavior Change) |
Abstract: Using effective reinforcers is crucial to progress in the therapy setting. Numerous studies (i.e., Matson & Boisjoli, 2009) demonstrate the effectiveness of tokens as secondary reinforcers in ABA programming. In particular, using pictures of objects of obsession as tokens was demonstrated to decrease a variety of inappropriate behaviors and increase appropriate, on-task behaviors in three children diagnosed with Autism (Charlop-Christy, 1998). The current study replicates this, with an older child, who has a lower tested IQ than the children in the Charlop-Christy study. We compared using neutral tokens (stars on a plain, white background) with pictures of preferred items (characters and a scene from the movie Frozen®) as tokens to reinforce task completion and attending behaviors associated with the child’s therapy. We also measured inappropriate behaviors related to task refusal for the child during therapy. Implications for the use of pictures of preferred items versus neutral pictures as tokens will be discussed. |
|
|
95. A Comparison of Prompting Tactics to Teach Intraverbals to an Adolescent With Down Syndrome |
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery |
ABIGAIL WALLACE (University of West Florida), D. Reed Bechtel (University of West Florida), Sue Heatter (University of West Florida), Leasha Barry (University of West Florida) |
Abstract: Ingvarsson and Hollobaugh (2011) found that tact-to-intraverbal-transfer-of-stimulus-control (i.e. a picture prompt) was more effective than echoic-to-intraverbal-transfer-of-stimulus-control (i.e. an echoic prompt) in teaching correct responses to intraverbal questions in three preschool-aged boys with autism. The current study was a systematic replication of Ingvarsson and Hollobaugh with a 14-year-old girl with Down Syndrome as a participant. A multi-element design with baseline and best condition was used to compare the effectiveness and efficiency of picture prompts presented on an iPad, in vivo picture prompts, echoic prompts presented on an iPad, and in vivo echoic prompts in teaching correct responding to targeted WH questions when utilizing tact-to-intraverbal or echoic-to-intraverbal transfer of stimulus control procedures. Reliability data were collected in 50% of sessions and averaged 96%; treatment fidelity data were collected in 53% of sessions and averaged 99%. Although all prompt conditions eventually were effective (Figure 1), results showed that echoic prompts presented on an iPad were most efficient in terms of trials to acquisition (i.e. 3 consecutive sessions of at least 80% correct responding) in teaching correct responding to the targeted WH questions followed by picture prompts presented on an iPad (Figure 2). A best condition phase with new Wh questions reflected a consistent pattern of acquisition for iPad echoic prompts. Generalization probes for both iPad conditions reflect criterion level performance. Prompting method preference of the participant was assessed via a paired choice procedure; results indicated a preference for the iPad Echoic condition Conclusions and recommendations for future research are presented. |
|
|
96. Prerequisites to Video Modeling in Adults with Intellectual Disability |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
KAREN BECKER (University of West Florida), D. Reed Bechtel (University of West Florida), Sue Heatter (University of West Florida), Leasha Barry (University of West Florida) |
Abstract: This study examined prerequisite skills for subjective (point of view (POV)) video modeling in adults with intellectual disabilities. Experiment 1 was a replication and extension of Robinson’s (2009) work and evaluated the relation between these skills and responding to in-vivo versus embedded voice over prompting in twelve adults, ages 25 to 69 with disabilities ranging from mild to severe. Experiment 2 used a multiple baseline across subjects matched by intellectual level with an alternating treatment design, to compare the effects of in-vivo prompting and embedded voice over prompting on responding to instruction presented via subjective (POV) video modeling. Occurrences and non-occurrences of correct imitation were recorded. Interrater reliability data were collected during 31% of all sessions and averaged 97% for occurrences and 82% for non-occurrences. Treatment fidelity probes included stimulus prompts, materials utilized, time allowed and reinforcement delivered. Probes were taken utilizing a procedural checklist for each task during 30% of the sessions and averaged 97%. Experiment 1 revealed that adults with Intellectual Disabilities may respond to one step in-vivo or voice over video modeling without possession of the prerequisite skills thought to be required of children with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Further examination into the variables responsible for successful use of video modeling with adults is warranted. Preliminary data from Experiment 2 indicated that some individuals may display higher accuracy with voice over prompting in subjective (POV) video modeling instruction. Two participants displayed no benefit from the procedure. Potential variables for further investigation are suggested. |
|
|
97. Improving Medication Administration: Applied Behavior Analysis Training for Medical Professionals |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
MEGHAN BRENNAN (Bancroft), Rebeca Torres (Bancroft), Lauren F. Troy (Bancroft) |
Abstract: Medication compliance in individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder and other intellectual disabilities is a widespread problem. Failure to take medications as prescribed can lead to health complications and unclear treatment effects. In addition, challenging behaviors that interfere with medication compliance may restrict individuals from less restrictive settings and disrupt access to educational time. Previous research has utilized behavioral techniques such as high probability request sequencing (Riviere et al. 2011), stimulus fading, and positive reinforcement (Schiff et al. 2011) to increase compliance with medication consumption with this population. While behavioral techniques have been shown to be effective, people who assist individuals with medication administration often have little to no training in applied behavior analysis. The purpose of the current study is to evaluate the effects of providing basic applied behavior analysis training to nurses at a campus-based residential treatment facility for individuals with intellectual disabilities and behavior disorders. An A-B design was used to evaluate the effects of the general training on nurses’ adherence to a behaviorally-based medication administration task analysis. Didactic training is not typically effective in changing behavior (Sarkoff & Sturmey, 2004), so additional hands-on training and feedback was provided and evaluated using a multiple baseline across participants design. Concomitant changes in medication compliance, measured by duration of medication administration, was also measured and will be discussed. |
|
|
98. Token Reinforcement and Treatment Durability in the Treatment of Escape-Maintained Problem Behavior |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
JESSICA GARCIA (The Kennedy Krieger Institute), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida), Michelle A. Frank-Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Mariana I. Castillo (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Daniel Clark (Kennedy Krieger Institute, University of Maryland Baltimore County) |
Abstract: Interventions for treating problem behavior (PB) in children with intellectual and developmental disabilities typically involve promoting alternative behaviors that produce the reinforcers hypothesized to maintain PB. Our prior research demonstrated that if PB continues to be reinforced, reinforcing alternative behavior with arbitrary, edible reinforcers not implicated in the maintenance of PB often results in more “durable” treatment effects (i.e. less re-emergence of PB) during schedule thinning. The current study evaluated whether interventions that reinforce appropriate behavior with tokens later exchangeable for arbitrary reinforcers would be as durable. Three interventions were evaluated with two individuals who engaged in problem behavior to escape demands: (a) tokens earned contingent upon meeting the schedule requirement that were then exchanged for an activity (both participants) or food (1 participant) after session, (b) food delivered immediately upon meeting the schedule requirement (both), and (c) access to a 30 s break contingent upon meeting the schedule requirement (1 participant). PB always resulted in a 30 s break on an FR 1 schedule. Results indicated that interventions incorporating tokens were as durable as those that incorporated immediate access to food (both) and were more effective than those that included the functional reinforcer (1 participant). |
|
|
99. On the relation between Adaptive Functioning and Behavior Disorders |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
PHILLIP ORCHOWITZ (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jonathan Dean Schmidt (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Patricia F. Kurtz (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Adaptive functioning varies for individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities. Due to deficits in functioning, these individuals may be more likely to engage in problem behavior to have their needs met. Some prerequisite adaptive skills such as communication or social skills may make particular treatments more effective than others. The Vineland-II assesses adaptive behavior in domains of communication, daily living skills, socialization, and motor skills. Thus, the outcome of the Vineland II may predict the maintaining variables of problem behavior and enhance treatment selection. The purpose of this study was to: 1) evaluate the correlation between the Vineland-II Parent/Caregiver Survey results and functional analysis outcomes for 64 individuals who were hospitalized for the treatment of severe problem behavior, and 2) assess the intensity of treatment (based on treatment components) as related to Vineland-II scores. Many Vineland-II scores were in a similar range for this population, however, results suggest that individuals with behavior maintained by escape from demands generally had the lowest Vineland scores across domains. Additionally, Vineland-II scores were not predictive of the effectiveness of components selected for treatment of problem behavior; potential reasons for this finding due to the homogeneity of the sample will be discussed. |
|
|
100. Checking the Retention of Skills Taught in a One to One Setting |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Michelle Harrington (Judge Rotenberg Center), JILL HUNT (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center) |
Abstract: Over the past seven years, our developmentally delayed clients have received extensive one to one instruction in the Activities of Daily Living. These skills include Washing Hands, Brushing Teeth, Buttoning, Unbuttoning, Zipping, Unzipping and Toileting. These skills were taught in a variety of settings (classroom, one to one room, residence), by several different staff. Multiple rewards were used. Teaching methodologies included forward and backwards chains. Data was collected daily on number of prompts needed, type of prompt needed and time needed to complete the skill. As a skill was mastered, the client did not receive daily one to one instruction in them. It was expected that these skills would be performed daily, as part of the clients daily life. We will be revisiting these skills to see what skills were retained over the past seven years. We will be looking at prompting required to complete the skill and time needed to complete the skill. |
|
|
|
|
VRB Monday Noon |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
12:00 PM–2:00 PM |
Exhibit Hall C (CC) |
|
102. Tact-Mand Transfer as a Higher-Order Verbal Operant: Assessing and/or Establishing this Relation in Early Learners with Autism |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
GENAE HALL (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism, Behavior Analysis), Jennifer Elia (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism), Meghan Miles (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism), Kelli Luck (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism), Mark L. Sundberg (Sundberg and Associates) |
Abstract: With the variety of experimental arrangements that have been employed and differing entering repertoires of the participants, it is not surprising that results of studies on tact-mand independence have seemed to vary. Tact-mand transfer appears to constitute an abstract relation between tacts and mands--a higher-order verbal operant. Assessing this relation would seem to involve training specific verbal topographies as tacts, arranging effective mand conditions, and assessing whether the same topographies emerge as mands. If they do not, the learner is currently naïve with respect to this relation; that is, tacts and mands are functionally independent in his or her repertoire. In many learners, an abstract relation between tacts and mands may then be established via multiple exemplar training. The present study replicated and extended Hall & Sundberg (1987) by first assessing a pre-existing abstract relation between tacts and mands in several early learners with autism. If this relation was absent, one or more tact-mand pairs were trained in an effort to establish it. For all participants (five, to this point), the experimenter specified three tact-mand targets for each of three behavioral chains (nine total) and probed all mands after all tacts had been trained to criterion; this was accomplished by manipulating transitive conditioned motivating operations via the interrupted behavior chain procedure. If mands did not emerge, participants were considered naïve with respect to an abstract relation between tacts and mands and received direct mand training on one or more topographies previously trained only as tacts. After each mand was trained, the remaining untrained mands were probed, to assess the point at which untrained mands began to emerge (i.e., the point of transfer). |
|
|
103. Use of Textual Prompts to Teach Mands for Information using “who?” |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
WILLIAM WALTON (Marcus Autism Center), Cassondra M Gayman (Marcus Autism Center), Brittany Bartlett (Marcus Autism Center), Sarah Wymer (Marcus Autism Center), Sarah Frampton (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: Recent research on teaching mands for “information” to children with language deficits have focused on manipulating establishing operations (EOs). However, only a few of those studies have focused on programming both EO and abolishing operation (AO) conditions to ensure functional use of the mand for information. Shillingsburg, Bowen, Valentino, and Pierce (2014) provided a successful demonstration of differential responding between conditions in which information was needed (EO condition) versus when it was already provided (AO condition) demonstrating control of the response by the relevant EO. Although the two participants (both diagnosed with autism) acquired mands for information “who?” via echoic prompting, they were not observed repeating the initial mand to the novel listener in both EOA and EOP. For example, in the EOP condition the children were observed emitting a request for the item, appropriately asking “who has the item?”, successfully approaching the identified person but not emitting an additional mand for the item. The current study sought to replicate and expand the methods employed by Shillingsburg and colleagues for two children diagnosed with autism by including the repeated request for the item upon approaching the novel listener. Textual prompts reading “Who” were used with all participants during prompted trials. Procedures resulted in differential use of the mands for information during EO and AO conditions for both participants. Results have implications for an alternative way to prompt mands for information. Participant’s use of information obtained via emitting mands for information is also discussed. |
|
|
104. The Effects of Topography Specific Distractors on Joing Controlled Sequencing: A Preliminary Investigation |
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research |
Curtis Clough (California State University, Sacramento), CAREEN SUZANNE MEYER (California State University, Sacramento), Timothy Fechter (California State University, Sacramento), Stephanie Cran (California State University, Sacramento), Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento) |
Abstract: The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the effects of vocal and motor distractors on sequencing arbitrary stimuli. Seven undergraduate students were exposed to different sets of stimuli and were given either vocal or motor (hand signs) instructions to sequence them in a multielement design. The effects of tact, echoic/mimetic, and joint control training were evaluated in a multiple baseline design, while distractor tasks were presented in a reversal design. The results indicated that four participants arranged the sets taught vocally and with hand signs in novel sequences after tact and echoic training. Three participants required additional training for the set taught with hand signs prior to accurate novel sequencing. In addition, accurate responding deteriorated in all participants for sets taught vocally and with hand signs, when a vocal distractor task was required. Accurate responding also deteriorated for four participants during distractor tasks that required tapping to the sound of a metronome, but when consistent tapping without the sound of a metronome was used, responding in three participants was not affected. |
|
|
105. Teaching Mands for Information Using "When" |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
ROBIN K. LANDA (Marcus Autism Center), Chelsea Kremer (Marcus Autism Center), Olivia Sadler (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: Mands for information may be considered pivotal skills that are often deficient among children with autism. Previous research has demonstrated the efficacy of contriving motivating operations to teach children with autism to mand for information using, “What,” “Who,” “Where,” “Which,” and, “How”. However, literature evaluating acquisition of the mand, “When,” is comparatively limited. As an extension of Shillingsburg et al. (2014), we taught a child with autism to engage in differentiated mands for information regarding the availability of reinforcers, under alternating conditions in which either a contrived establishing operation (EO) or abolishing operation (AO) was present. Textual prompts and prompt delays were utilized to teach the child to ask a framed, “When”, question under EO conditions. Treatment resulted in differentiated mands for information under EO and AO conditions and correct use of the provided information. In addition, acquisition of the mand for information under EO conditions resulted in a significant increase in the proportion of the child’s tangible requests that resulted in reinforcement, compared to extinction. These findings further support the use of contrived motivating operations and prompt delays to teach mands for information and extend upon previous literature by demonstrating effective procedures promoting acquisition of the mand, “When.” |
|
|
106. A Preliminary Investigation on Intraverbal Naming and the Emergence of Generalized Equivalence Classes |
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research |
ADRIENNE JENNINGS (California State University Sacramento), Charisse Ann Lantaya (California State University, Sacramento), Devin Galdieri (California State University, Sacramento), Amanda Chastain (California State University, Sacramento), Margaret Alvarez (California State University, Sacramento), Careen Suzanne Meyer (California State University, Sacramento), Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento) |
Abstract: The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the effects of teaching baseline intraverbal relations in a statement format on the emergence of generalized equivalence classes. Eight undergraduates were exposed to tact training with three stimulus sets (A1B1C1, A2B2C2, and A3B3C3), listener testing, and baseline intraverbal training (A’B’ and B’C’). Formation of equivalence classes was assessed using visual-visual matching-to-sample (MTS) tasks and intraverbal tests for symmetrical (BA, B’A’, CB, C’B’) and transitive relations (AC, A’C’, CA, C’A’). Generalization MTS posttests were then presented for four untrained sets of stimuli. Five participants passed all MTS and intraverbal posttests. The remaining three required either tact or intraverbal remedial training in order to achieve passing criterion. During the vocal MTS posttest, all participants emitted either trained or abbreviated tacts and/or intraverbals for each trial and for two participants, performance improved. These findings show the efficacy of intraverbal training in the formation of generalized equivalence classes. Overall, results suggest verbal mediation strategies (i.e., intraverbal naming) may have facilitated MTS performance. |
|
|
107. Comparison of Picture Exchange and Modified Sign Language Training to Establish Discriminated Mands |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
CASSONDRA M GAYMAN (Marcus Autism Center), Sarah Frampton (Marcus Autism Center), Dianna Shippee (Marcus Autism Center), Emily Napier (Marcus Autism Center), Ashley Neitzer (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: For some individuals, repeated failure to acquire vocal manding results in the teaching of alternative topographies such as modified sign language or picture based communication. In determining which topography of manding to teach, clinicians must consider a variety of factors; often overlooked is the correspondence between the mand and the motivating operation at strength. The current investigation compared two mand modalities using an adapted alternating treatments design, embedded into a multiple baseline across behaviors for an individual with autism. To assess correspondence between the mand and the motivating operation, the Pre-Test and Post-Test conditions included a discrimination check between the individual’s indicating response (i.e., reach), the picture selected or sign emitted, and the item consumed. Data show the participant acquired picture exchange more rapidly than modified sign language. Further, the discrimination checks in the Post-Tests revealed errors following the initiation of training for the third mand; suggesting that the mands were not discriminated until additional remedial training was conducted. This study extends the mand comparison literature through the inclusion of discrimination checks, ensuring the learner’s indicating response, mand response, and consumption correspond with each other. Further, the inclusion of maintenance phase demonstrated the strength of these responses in the individual’s repertoire over time. |
|
|
108. The Effects of Multiple Exemplar Instruction Across Listener and Speaker Responses on the Acquisition of Naming in Three Children with Disabilities |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
GABRIELLE SWEENEY (Teachers College Columbia University) |
Abstract: We tested the effects of Multiple Exemplar Instruction (MEI) across listener and speaker responses on the acquisition of Naming in three preschool children diagnosed with disabilities. The experiment was conducted in a CABAS® classroom using a non-concurrent delayed multiple probe design across participants. Participants were selected for the study because they did not demonstrate full Naming during the initial Naming probe, required direct instruction on tacts, and required a high number of learn units to meet instructional objectives. The dependent variable was the acquisition of Naming, which consists of both listener (point to topography) and speaker (tact and intraverbal tact topographies) components, measured during Naming probes. The independent variable was MEI, in which match, point, tact, and intraverbal tact responses were rotated across multiple exemplars of stimuli within the same session. Upon completion of two intervention sets of MEI, all three participants demonstrated the Naming capability during the post intervention probes using the original set and novel sets. It was determined that Naming emerged for all three participants as a function of MEI across listener and speaker repsonses. |
|
|
109. Teaching Recalling Past Events Using Tact and Echoic Prompts |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
SARAH WYMER (Marcus Autism Center, Georgia State University), Sarah Frampton (Marcus Autism Center), Robin K. Landa (Marcus Autism Center), Jordyn Turner (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of M) |
Abstract: Many children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD), despite significant mand, tact, and listener repertoires, fail to develop a functional intraverbal repertoire beyond simple intraverbal behavior such as providing their names (Sundberg & Sundberg, 2011). Because intraverbal behavior is essential to academic and social skills, it is important to establish responding to more complex intraverbals (Partington & Bailey, 1993). One type of complex intraverbal is the ability to answer questions about events in the past. In the current investigation, two children with autism were taught to answer questions about what activities they had completed earlier in their treatment sessions at three different locations. Intervention consisted of echoic and tact prompts using pictures of the participant engaging in the activity, with reinforcement provided following correct responses on independent opportunities. Training was conducted immediately following activity completion and then throughout the instructional day using an increasing inter-trial interval to establish correct responding at the end of the day. Following training, both participants demonstrated increased accuracy when they recalled what activities they had participated at each location at the end of the day. |
|
|
110. Referent-Based Verbal Behavior Instruction for Children With Autism |
Area: VBC; Domain: Service Delivery |
ANASTASIA SAWCHAK (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Stephanie Curtis (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Lee L. Mason (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Alonzo Andrews (The University of Texas at San Antonio) |
Abstract: Skinner's (1957) analysis of verbal behavior deconstructed language according to stimulus control. Al- though the functional independence of these verbal operants has been empirically demonstrated, more commonly, a speaker's verbal behavior is induced by a convergence of controlling stimuli. However, circumscribed stimulus control may inhibit the development of complex verbal repertoires for some individuals, including those with autism spectrum dis- orders. For this reason, in the current paper, we propose a behavior analytic intervention with the overarching goal of establishing multiple control over verbal behavior through the conditioning of referent stimuli. Thirteen children received referent-based teaching at a university-based center for applied behavior analysis. Each participant received 90 minutes of referent-based instruction four days a week for 13 weeks. Instruction was individualized to the needs of the participant, but focused on the four primary verbal operants: mands, echoics, tacts, and sequelics. Using the Verbal Behavior Milestones Assessment and Placement Program (VB-MAPP; Sundberg, 2008) as a pre- and post-test, we analyzed the effects of RBT. A Wilcoxon Signed-ranks test indicated that, after one semester of RBT, participants scored significantly higher on the VB-MAPP post-test (Mdn = 65.5) than when initially assessed on the VB-MAPP pre-test (Mdn = 32.5), Z = -3.18, p = .001, r = .62. The results of this study will be discussed within the context of the limitations. Overall, however, referent-based teaching appears to be an effective method for increasing the language of children with autism. |
|
|
111. An Evaluation of Extinction on Increasing Functional Vocal Language |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
DIANNA M. SHIPPEE (Marcus Autism Center), William Walton (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: Previous research has shown that extinction is effective at increasing vocalizations in non-vocal children with an established alternative mand topography, such as sign language (Valentino, Shillingsburg, Call, Burton, & Bowen, 2011). In this study, we evaluated the effects of extinction on promoting vocal language for a young child diagnosed with autism who failed to acquire an alternative functional mand topography. Four preferred items were identified and randomly assigned to one of two conditions. For each session, only one of the four items was available. In the baseline condition, indicating responses (i.e., reaching or pointing) and vocal word approximations for the item present were reinforced with access to that item. In the extinction condition, only word approximations for the item present were reinforced and indicating responses were not reinforced. Results found an increase in the rate of word approximations for one out of two items in the extinction condition and a decrease in the rate of indicating responses emitted; whereas in baseline, rates of word approximations remained stable and low. |
|
|
112. Establishing Derived Textual Control in an Activity Schedule With an Adult With Down Syndrome |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
Daniel Ortega (Trellis Center), SADIE L. LOVETT (Central Washington University), Paige Thornton (Central Washington University) |
Abstract: Many adults with developmental disabilities rely on picture activity schedules for completing daily and vocational tasks. The use of text-based activity schedules better approximates the daily behavior of typical adults. This study extended the findings of Miguel et al. (2009) who used conditional discrimination training to transfer control from pictures to printed words in activity schedules for children with autism. In the current study, conditional discrimination training was used to teach one adult diagnosed with Down syndrome to select pictures and printed words when provided with their dictated names. This instructional arrangement was designed to promote the emergence of equivalence relations between the pictures and printed words, which were never directly paired during training. A multiple probe design across stimulus sets was used to evaluate the transfer of control from pictures to text. Following instruction, the participant successfully completed the activity schedule using printed words. He also orally named the textual stimuli in the absence of direct training for this skill. |
|
|
113. Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
BRITTANY BARTLETT (Marcus Autism Center), Taylor Thompson (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of M) |
Abstract: It has been estimated that 20-50% of those diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) do not develop functional vocal language (Graziano, 2002; Lord, Risi, & Pickles, 2004). In fact, language deficits are one of the most common presenting complaints of parents of children with ASD (De Giacomo & Fombonne, 1998). Stimulus-stimulus pairing (SSP), based on the principles of both respondent and operant conditioning, involves intensive and systematic pairing of adult produced vocalizations with identified preferred items. In this study, we evaluated the effects of stimulus-stimulus pairing for 3 minimally verbal children diagnosed with autism between the ages of 2 years and 3 years 11 months. Following baseline measures, treatment consisted of approximately 5 (10 minute sessions) per day, 5 days per week, for 6 weeks. A collection of assessments were administered every 3 weeks including the Early Echoic Skills Assessment (EESA) and language observations measuring the rate of sounds emitted during a 20 minute observation. Results found an increase in the EESA score for 3 out of 3 participants following 6 weeks of treatment. An increase in rate of sounds emitted was observed for 2 out of the 3 participants following 6 weeks of treatment. |
|
|
114. Examination of the Explicit-Zero Effect Via Behavior-Behavior Relations |
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research |
PHILIP ERB (University of Florida), Jesse Dallery (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Altering the format in which hypothetical discounting choices are presented has been found to influence discounting rate. For example, relative to the traditional format frame, significantly higher proportions of choices for the larger-later (LL) reward have been observed with each of the choice options presented in terms of a sequence – an effect termed the explicit-zero effect. Using a within-subjects design, undergraduate students completed the monetary choice questionnaire (MCQ), and a modified version of the MCQ with the choice options presented in the explicit-zero format frame. A concurrent think-aloud procedure was employed during each task administration. To date, the results replicate previous findings; a significantly higher proportion of LL choices was observed when the choice options were presented in the explicit-zero format, relative to the traditional format. Unfortunately, consistent relationships between discounting choices and participants’ verbalizations have not been identified. Given that these subtle alterations in the formatting of temporal discounting choices result in changes in discounting rate, and these changes presumably involve intervening mental processes and/or covert verbal behavior, the use of concurrent think-aloud methodology during the completion of temporal discounting tasks may help to isolate how these structural alterations are exerting their respective effects. |
|
|
115. Language Outcomes of Nonvocal Children Following Intensive ABA Intervention |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
RACHEL YOSICK (Marcus Autism Center), Hannah Robinson (Marcus Autism Center), Tylor Thompson (Marcus Autism Center), Caitlin H. Delfs (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: It has been estimated that 20% of children with Autism Spectrum Disorder are “nonverbal,” defined as using fewer than five words per day (Lord, Risi, & Pickles, 2004). Traditionally, it was thought that if children had not acquired speech by age five, their prognosis for developing it in the future was poor (Ornitz, 1973). However, recent evidence supports the notion that many individuals over age five with significant language delays acquire useful speech (Wodka et al., 2013). The current study examined the outcomes of a large sample of children (n=98; average age 5.2 years, range 1-16 years) with language deficits who received intensive ABA intervention to address language deficits at an outpatient treatment facility (average months of intervention 16, range 3-59 months). Outcomes such as the development of functional language, spontaneous vocalizations, and an echoic repertoire were examined to determine possible predictors of these outcomes (i.e., age, treatment length, skills at admission, etc.). Results include the portion of the sample that achieved specific vocal language outcomes (%) and which demographic and treatment variables were predictive of these outcomes (odds ratios for significant predictors). Implications of results are discussed in light of demographic and treatment variables that influenced positive treatment outcomes. |
|
|
|
|
Investigating gambling problems: Through the behavioral analytic lens |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
1:00 PM–1:50 PM |
006D (CC) |
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale) |
Abstract: Gambling as a leisure activity has been gaining popularity in the past decades. Both positive and negative side effects of gambling have been observed. Societal and personal gains have been made for many, and for others the gains have only been aversive in nature. The aim of the current symposium is to present research that has been conducted by our team of investigators, and to presenting data we provide a conceptual discussion about how behavior analysts can contribute to the field of gambling research and at the same time expand our own. Our symposium will be diverse; we will look at basic research, discuss how to conduct research at gambling establishments, and also we will have a conceptual discussion on behavioral economics and the way behavioral economic research methods can improve current research and understanding of the variables that influence pathological gambling. This symposium is meant for anyone interested in gambling and behavior analysis, and anyone interested in lively discussions on important societal issues. |
Keyword(s): Addiction, Behavioral-economics, Gambling |
|
Direct observation of gambling behavior in gambling settings |
MAUREEN O'CONNOR (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Emily Durako (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: A common problem amongst gambling researchers is finding casino owners that will allow them to conduct research within their establishments. The reasons why casino companies do not allow researchers to conduct investigations at their establishments are many, both of financial origin, and ethical. The need still remains, that researchers have to understand gambling behavior in the context of gambling. One way to investigate gambling behaviors at casinos is to do direct observations of public behaviors. In the current study, our research team investigated happiness level of gamblers when playing slot machines, and compared it to gamblers playing table games. The results indicated that despite winning, the slot machine gamblers did not engage in overt behaviors indicative of happiness. Gamblers playing table games did engage in more overt behaviors indicative of happiness. The implications of the study are discussed with regard to pathological gambling and the effects of gambling on society. |
|
Experimental and natural observation of the game of Craps |
ALLISON RIBLEY (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jomi Hirata (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Brian Morgan (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Various “expert” gamblers offer various strategies to novice gamblers with a promise of great gains of money. In the game of Craps there are many online “experts” that provide these strategies for free. In the current study the authors investigated the effectiveness of these strategies through a natural and experimental observation of gambling behaviors. Nine recreational gambles were trained on strategies and then observed utilizing them during a game of Craps. In order to evaluate the effects of differing strategies within subjects, the participants were presented with more than one strategy during gameplay. The results indicated that some strategies were superior to others in regard to monetary outcomes. With gambling becoming more popular as a leisure activity and with the presentation of gambling in popular media pathological gambling may become of greater concern in coming years. Implications of the results are discussed in regards to problem and pathological gambling. |
|
The use of Behavioral economics in behavior analytic gambling research: A conceptual discussion |
SARAH STERNQUIST (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: In the current behavior analytic literature on gambling there is ample space for behavioral economical investigations. The behavioral economical model could be effective in the analysis and identification of variables influencing pathological gambling. The current talk will be a theoretical discussion the value of behavioral economics in regards to gambling research and pathological gambling. We will demonstrate preliminary research that has been conducted at the Gambling laboratory at Southern Illinois University. The discussion will be aimed at providing an argument for how future research might be constructed in order to alter the factors commonly described as contributing to pathological gambling (i.e. contingencies, verbal behavior, and, motivating operations and setting events). This discussion will aim to shed some light on possible treatment procedures that can be derived from current and future researches and how a possible clinical model could be constructed. |
|
|
|
|
Advances in the Application of Motivating Operations with Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC) |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University) |
CE Instructor: Tonya Nichole Davis, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The manipulation of motivating operations can be an effective intervention component. In this symposium we present research regarding the application of motivating operations in assessment and treatment of individuals with autism spectrum disorders. The first paper evaluates the effects of systematically-identified durations of reinforcer access on task completion. Individualized durations of reinforcer access were identified based on the mean latency of satiation. Results indicate that this method can be utilized to identify a precise duration of reinforcer access to influence an evocative effect. The second paper evaluates the effects of a motivating operation-based treatment on escape-maintained problem behavior. After a trial based EO analysis confirmed that problem behavior was motivated by tasks with a low probability of correct responses, a high probably response sequence was successfully implemented to decrease problem behavior and increase skill acquisition. The third paper conducted a parametric evaluation of two variations of the implementation of the behavioral indicator of satiation method. Results identify not only a wide variation in latency to the first and subsequent displays of the behavioral indicator, but also that the selected method influences the abative effect on subsequent challenging behavior. Collectively, studies present innovative uses of the manipulation of motivating operations. |
Keyword(s): abolishing operation, establishing operation, motivating operations |
|
Examination of Pre-session Systematic Durations of Reinforcer Access |
ALLEN MOM (Baylor Univeristy), Rachel Scalzo (Baylor University), Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University), Dana Leeper (Baylor Univeristy), Alicia Kobylecky (Baylor University), Jayden Conte (Baylor Univeristy) |
Abstract: The current study examines an approach to systematically select a precise duration of reinforcer access that maximizes an evocative effect on task completion. Participants were given access to reinforcers to determine a mean latency to satiation. Systematic durations of reinforcer access were determined based on individual mean latency to satiation; specifically durations of time that equaled 3% and 75% of mean latency to satiation were utilized as pre-session reinforcer access. Participants were exposed to pre-session durations of reinforcer access that equaled 3% and 75% of the mean latency to satiation; immediately following the presession reinforcer access, work tasks were presented and access to the same tangible stimulus was provided as reinforcement on a fixed ration schedule. Results indicate that individualized durations of reinforcer access can be systematically identified and utilized to increase task completion. Clinical implications of the results will be discussed. |
|
A Trial-Based Approach to Isolating Establishing Operations for Negatively Reinforced Challenging Behavior |
JENNIFER NINCI (Texas A&M University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A&M University), Stephanie Gerow (Texas A&M University) |
Abstract: In this study we assessed a potential EO for escape-maintained challenging behavior with three boys with autism spectrum disorder. A pairwise functional analyses indicated participants’ challenging behaviors were at least in part maintained by negative reinforcement, in the form of escape from task demands. It was hypothesized that each participant engaged in more challenging behaviors when presented with difficult tasks in which there was a low probability of a correct response as compared to tasks with a high probability of a correct response. To evaluate this hypothesis, we implemented a trial-based EO analysis. Task demands were chosen and divided among two groups (high-probability and low-probability) for each participant based on prior performance observations and embedded within discrete-trial instructional sessions. Data were collected on ranges of criteria for correctness with corresponding percentages of challenging behavior. The EO analysis confirmed challenging behaviors were motivated by tasks that participants had relatively little history of performing correctly. An MO intervention based on these results showed high-probability request sequences were effective to reduce challenging behaviors in one participant and increase skill acquisition for two participants. Trial-based EO analyses may be a practical and efficient way to analyze the influence of EOs during instruction. |
|
Analysis of Behavioral Indicators as a Measure of Satiation |
RACHEL SCALZO (Baylor University), Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University), Kelsey Henry (Baylor University), Allen Mom (Baylor University) |
Abstract: Challenging behavior often occurs when access to a preferred item is restricted. For children with developmental disabilities these challenging behaviors can impede learning opportunities and decrease possibilities for social interaction, which are already severely diminished (Lang et al., 2010). One way to proactively address challenging behaviors is through the manipulation of motivating operations. This study examined behavioral indicators of satiation using the item rejection procedure developed by O’Reilly and colleagues (2009) with differing levels of criteria. All participants were diagnosed with a developmental disability and engaged in tangibly maintained challenging behavior. Specifically, this multi-element single subject research design compared the duration of a tangible session following pre-session access to tangibles. Pre-session access was ended after a participant engaged in one instance of rejection behavior, which was compared to sessions ending after three rejection behaviors were used. Results suggest differences between using one and three rejection behaviors as indicators of satiation. Implications for clinical applications will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Activities and Activism for Cross-Cultural Dissemination of Behavior Analysis |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
204B (CC) |
Area: CSE/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Robyn M. Catagnus, Ed.D. |
Chair: Robyn M. Catagnus (Ball State University) |
SAKURAKO SHERRY TANAKA (Mutlicultural Alliance of Behavior Analysts) |
KOZUE MATSUDA (Children Center) |
ELIZABETH HUGHES FONG (Fielding Graduate University) |
Abstract: All behavior analysts should be passionate about the dissemination of behavioral science as a way of creating solutions to important social issues. Traditional methods of sharing scientific information include written documents such as journal articles, but this approach is often insufficient to reach culturally diverse and international groups. We must seek more active and engaged ways of reaching our audiences. Panel members will discuss their personal activities and activism toward creating connections between research, practice, and policy. Examples will include research and practice, sharing behavioral applications in other fields, providing free trainings, creating alternate pathways to BCBA certification, expanding access to supervision and services internationally, cross cultural connections, collaborating actively with groups hostile to behavior analysis, networking with community leaders, translating behavioral information, becoming involved in global initiatives at the World Health Organization and participating in the United Nations. Ideas from the literature will be discussed and audience members will be invited to share the ways they are advancing the science of human behavior. Audience members will leave with new ideas and motivation for sharing our science with multi-cultural populations to change our world. |
Keyword(s): alternate pathways, dissemination, international, multi-cultural |
|
|
|
|
Science is Not All Mathematics, Nor All Logic, but it is Somewhat Beauty and Poetry* |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC) |
Area: CSE/EDC; Domain: Theory |
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Travis Thompson, Ph.D. |
Chair: Mark P. Alavosius (Prxis2LLC) |
Presenting Authors: : TRAVIS THOMPSON (University of Minnesota) |
Abstract: Throughout the Renaissance, the arts and science were both often practiced by women and men of scholarship of all sorts. The very notion of a "Renaissance Man or Woman," speaks to the idea that today we have somehow lost our way, and expect divergence not integration. It was more common than not, that scientists also were practitioners of some form of painting or artistic writing, and the converse. From Leonardo da Vinci to B.F. Skinner, the two have more often than not been interwoven. The notion that the two are separate endeavors emerged after the Renaissance when science and the humanities diverged, reaching its culmination during and after World War II when C.P. Snow presented his famous Rede Lecture, "Two Cultures." The arts are integral features that create the context within which our practices as research and applied behavior analysts are conducted. Artistic factors also are behavioral variables in our analysis of behavior. They are also uniquely effective in creating the context for socio-cultural conditional learning and discriminations. As we look about us, we are compelled to ask, "Why do artists create art?" "Why can people with severe disabilities often create stunning artistic products while being unable to speak an intelligible sentence?" "Why do so many of us feel artistic activities are uplifting and add a dimension to our lives that exceed those of our science, alone?" "How can the concepts of the arts and sciences be integrated to mutual benefit?" In today's discussion, Dr. Travis Thompson will explore the intrerplay of artistic activities and behavior analytic endeavors, where they intertwine and separate. *The title is from a comment by the first American woman astronomer, Maria Mitchell in the 19th century. |
Instruction Level: Basic |
Target Audience: Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to answer: Why do artists create art? (2) Why can people with severe disabilities often create stunning artistic products while being unable to speak an intelligible sentence? (3) Why do so many of us feel artistic activities are uplifting and add a dimension to our lives that exceed those of our science, alone? and (4) How can the concepts of the arts and sciences be integrated to mutual benefit? |
|
TRAVIS THOMPSON (University of Minnesota) |
Travis Thompson is professor of educational psychology and emeritus professor of psychology at the University of Minnesota, a Fellow of the ABAI, and recipient of the Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis Award for Impact of Science on Application. He has been a member of the ABAI Executive Council, distinguished scientist, clinical practitioner, author and lesser known, a visual artist and poet. He previously designed and constructed stained glass, has written essays on art glass, does watercolor paintings and writes engaging poetry. Among behavior analytic scientists he is one of the more effective in expressing the humanity of our science. His is the author or editor of 238 articles and chapters and 34 books, several written for practitioners and parents of children with autism. He is known to be especially effective in communicating with nonscientists about the importance of our work. He is the ABAI coordinator of the Behavior Analysis and the Arts Special Interest Group. |
|
|
|
|
Meaning, Scanning, Induction of Writing, and Equivalence |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
007A (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College ) |
Abstract: The present symposium focuses on meaning, scanning, induction of writing, and equivalence. The first paper by Hansen and Arntzen extracted additional knowledge from our eye-tracking data, the purpose of the following analysis is to expose the differential outcomes among eye-movement topographies (i.e., observing sequences during matching-to-sample performance and eye-movement length, or saccade speed) gathered with eye-tracking equipment that recorded eye-movements while establishing five 3-member classes as well as three 5-member in a concurrent training format, using the MTO, OTM, and LS training structures. Data reveal differences in eye-movement sequences to comparison stimuli, as a function of learning conditions, and in eye-movement lengths (i.e., saccade speed) as a function of not only learning but also motivation (see Figure 1). The second paper by Serna, Thanopoulos, and Fields In a potential 5-member stimulus-equivalence class of non-representational forms, ABCDE, past research has shown a high percentage (yield) of participants demonstrated equivalence relations if the C stimuli were meaningful (familiar pictures), but a low yield if all the stimuli are non-representational. The results will be discussed in terms of conditions that may be responsible for the high yield typically found when one set of stimuli are familiar pictures in similar experimental preparations, as well as the importance of pre-training and testing prior to the study of 5-member equivalence-class yield. (see Figure 2) The third paper by Spear and Fields presents Understanding statistical interaction, and interpreting and writing descriptions of complex graphs that depict interaction, is one of the more difficult tasks facing undergraduate Psychology majors. Such skills are also quite difficult to teach. The reported research used conditional discrimination training to establish such a writing repertoire, and the data presented indicate differential effects of this conditional discrimination training on the writing of descriptions of different features of such graphs (see Figure 3). |
Keyword(s): instructional design, meaningfulness, stimulus equivalence |
|
Pattern, Variability, and Speed in Eye-Movements and their Functional Relations to Learning and Motivation |
STEFFEN HANSEN (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences), Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College) |
Abstract: The use of eye-tracking technology to study observing behavior in Matching-to-Sample research is gaining in popularity. For example, the analysis of eye-movements during conditional discrimination training proposes that changes in topographically different measures, such as fixation duration and fixation rate, are a function of established conditional discriminations (i.e., learning), and therefore contribute with additional knowledge on the formation of stimulus equivalence classes, when trained with different training structures (e.g., Hansen & Arntzen, 2013, October; Hansen & Arntzen, 2014, May). Extracting additional knowledge from our eye-tracking data, the purpose of the following analysis is to expose the differential outcomes among eye-movement topographies (i.e., observing sequences during matching-to-sample performance and eye-movement length, or saccade speed) gathered with eye-tracking equipment that recorded eye-movements while establishing five 3-member classes as well as three 5-member in a concurrent training format, using the MTO, OTM, and LS training structures. Data reveal differences in eye-movement sequences to comparison stimuli, as a function of learning conditions, and in eye-movement lengths (i.e., saccade speed) as a function of not only learning but also motivation. Applied to 60 university college participants, divided into six groups, five 3-member classes as well as three 5-member classes, trained with MTO, OTM, and LS, respectively, we expect to provide differential results among eye-fixation sequences and eye-movement lengths as a function of learned conditional discriminations and changes in motivational operations. |
|
The effects of three-member equivalence-class pre-training on subsequent five-member equivalence-class formation yield |
RICHARD W. SERNA (University of Massachusetts Lowell), Katerina Thanopoulos (University of Massachusetts Lowell), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York) |
Abstract: In a potential 5-member stimulus-equivalence class of non-representational forms, ABCDE, past research has shown a high percentage (yield) of participants demonstrated equivalence relations if the C stimuli were meaningful (familiar pictures), but a low yield if all the stimuli are non-representational. The present experiment investigated (1) variables that may contribute to this effect and (2) pre-training control conditions. Group 1 received pre-training in which C stimuli became part of an equivalence class (CFG) prior to ABCDE equivalence training and testing. Group 2 received equivalence pre-training and testing unrelated to ABCDE. Group 3 also received pre-training and testing (PFG), but P stimuli were familiar pictures that appeared in subsequent ABPDE equivalence training and testing with otherwise non-representational stimuli. The results showed relatively higher yields in Groups 1 and 3 than in Group 2. These results were contrasted with Group 4, an ABCDE group that received no pre-training and showed a low yield. The results will be discussed in terms of conditions that may be responsible for the high yield typically found when one set of stimuli are familiar pictures in similar experimental preparations, as well as the importance of pre-training and testing prior to the study of 5-member equivalence-class yield. |
|
Statistical interaction, and interpreting and writing descriptions of complex graphs |
JACK SPEAR (Queens College and the Graduate Center, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York) |
Abstract: Understanding statistical interaction, and interpreting and writing descriptions of complex graphs that depict interaction, is one of the more difficult tasks facing undergraduate Psychology majors. Such skills are also quite difficult to teach. The reported research used conditional discrimination training to establish such a writing repertoire, and the data presented indicate differential effects of this conditional discrimination training on the writing of descriptions of different features of such graphs. |
|
|
|
|
Nonbehavioral Providers Using Time-Based Reinforcment to Decrease Problem Behaviors in School Settings. |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
210AB (CC) |
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Johanna Staubitz (Vanderbilt University) |
Discussant: Johanna Staubitz (Vanderbilt University) |
CE Instructor: Christina F. Noel, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Students with emotional and behavioral disorders (EBD) or autism often receive low rates of positive attention in the classroom. Further, disruptive behavior exhibited by students with EBD or autism may elicit negative attention from teachers and peers and increase the likelihood the behavior will occur in the future. Two studies were conducted on using time-based, noncontingent statements to decrease problem behavior. The first was in an alternative school and the second was in an after-school program for students with autism. Each study used a single-subject, reversal design. Noncontingent attention reduced disruptive behavior and increased on-task behavior for all participants. Additionally, the teacher provided more praise and fewer reprimands during intervention phases. Social validity measures were given to the cooperating teachers to view the acceptability of the intervention. Results suggest NCA can decrease attention-maintained disruptive behavior, increase student engagement, and improve student-teacher dynamics in students with EBD and autism. |
Keyword(s): autism, emotional behavior, school settings, time-based reinforcement |
|
Using Noncontingent Reinforcement to Decrease Problem Behavior and Increase Appropriate Behavior in an Alternative Setting |
CHRISTOPHER RUBOW (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Students with emotional and behavioral disorders (EBD) often receive low rates of positive attention in the classroom. Further, disruptive behavior exhibited by students with EBD may elicit negative attention from teachers and peers. Using a withdrawal design, a teacher provided noncontingent attention (NCA) to a student with EBD with attention-maintained disruptive behavior. Noncontingent attention reduced disruptive behavior and increased on-task behavior. Additionally, the teacher provided more praise and fewer reprimands during intervention phases. Results suggest NCA can decrease attention-maintained disruptive behavior, increase student engagement, and improve student-teacher dynamics in students with EBD. |
|
Using Time-Based Reinforcement to Increase On-Task Behaviors in an After-School Setting for Students with Autism Spectrum Diagnosis |
JOHANNA STAUBITZ (Vanderbilt University), Christina F. Noel (Western Kentucky University) |
Abstract: Students with an Autism Spectrum Disorder may have difficulty complying with class-wide instructions. Using a withdrawal design, three pre-service teachers provided noncontingent attention (NCA) to three students with attention-maintained disruptive behavior. Noncontingent attention reduced disruptive behavior and increased on-task behavior. The pre-service teachers were given a social validity questionnaire about the feasibility of the intervention. Results suggest NCA can decrease attention-maintained disruptive behavior, increase student engagement, and can be implemented with high levels of social validity. |
|
|
|
|
The Implementation of Interventions for Self-Directed Interventions to Promote Generalization for Postsecondary Students with Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities. |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
212AB (CC) |
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jennifer Marie Cullen (Ball State University) |
Discussant: Christopher A. Tullis (Georgia State University) |
CE Instructor: Jennifer Marie Cullen, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Implementation of self-directed interventions can promote self-determination and generalization among individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities in postsecondary settings such as education, employment, and the community. Postsecondary settings are a setting in which individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities have historically been excluded. However, current initiatives have opened the doors to higher education for these students. Success in postsecondary settings requires the skills of problem-solving, self-management, and task completion. This symposium will present self-directed interventions to promote success in academic and daily living tasks, and look at generalization effects self-directed interventions have in these settings. |
Keyword(s): daily living, generalization, postsecondary, self-determination |
|
The Effects of a Self-Determination Intervention on the Performance of Academic and Social Behaviors of College Age Youth with Intellectual Disabilities in Postsecondary Settings |
EVETTE A. SIMMONS-REED (Ball State University), Ralph Gardner III (The Ohio State University), Jennifer Marie Cullen (Ball State University) |
Abstract: Historically, youth with intellectual disabilities have poor postsecondary outcomes in the areas of employment, education, and independent living and lack the self-determination skills needed to become self-sufficient adults. Research indicates that the acquisition of skills related to self-determination improve the postsecondary outcomes and overall quality of life, including those with intellectual disabilities. In this study, the Self-determined Learning Model of Instruction (SDLMI) is used to determine the effects of the acquisition and performance of academic and social behaviors of college-age adults with intellectual disabilities in a multiple baseline design across behaviors. A problem solving questioning sequence will be used to teach goal attainment and planning through: (a) identification of the problem, (b) identification of possible solutions, (c) identification of potential barriers, and (d) the evaluation and reevaluation of their results. Generalization of behaviors will be assessed using behavior checklist and the Behavior Tracker Pro app on iPads in the participants audited courses throughout the study. |
|
The Effects of Self-Directed Video Prompting on Generalization of Independent Living Tasks in Postsecondary Settings for Young Adults With Autism and Intellectual Disabilities |
JENNIFER MARIE CULLEN (Ball State University), Evette A. Simmons-Reed (Ball State University), Lindy Weaver (Ohio State University) |
Abstract: Contributing factors to discrepancies among independent living for individuals with disabilities compared to those without are barriers in acquiring, maintaining, and generalizing daily living skills. Acquisition of daily living skills allows people with disabilities to meet their own needs without reliance on others. In addition, proficient daily living skills help people with disabilities increase their self-sufficiency and quality of life. Self-directed video prompting, in which individuals independently access prerecorded task instructions, is an innovative method for teaching daily living skills to individuals with disabilities, but generalization effects have been limited in the literature. . Using technology to teach daily living skills can increase participation in the community and improve independence by providing a level of task competence unattainable without these devices. In this multiple baseline across participants study, self-directed video prompting on an iPad using the My Pictures Talk application was used to help three young adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities in a postsecondary program acquire independent living tasks. Generalization tasks that differed by one, two, and three were measured intermittently throughout the study. All three participants demonstrated generalization to the three tasks. . Our working hypothesis was that study participants would demonstrate improved daily living skill performance and be able to generalize these skills to home and community environments. |
|
|
|
|
Adopting Behavior Analysis to Improve Learning Outcomes |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
211 (CC) |
Area: EDC |
Chair: Katherine Kavanaugh (Florida Institute of Technology) |
|
Evaluating Fluency Based Instruction with Mathematics Skills and Associated Generalized Outcomes: A Randomised-Controlled Trial |
Domain: Applied Research |
AOIFE MC TIERNAN (National University of Ireland, Galway), Jennifer Holloway (National University of Ireland, Galway), Olive Healy (Trinity College Dublin), Michael Hogan (National University of Ireland) |
|
Abstract: A between-groups design was used to demonstrate the ability of a frequency-building curriculum to increase fluency with component mathematics skills. The effects of fluent responding on endurance, stability and application were evaluated. Standardised assessments of mathematical ability were conducted to assess the impact of learning component skills fluently on such measures. Statistically significant differences between an experimental and treatment as usual control group were found on measures of fluency, endurance, stability and one subtest of the standardised assessment of mathematical ability. Results indicate the efficacy of the curriculum for building fluency with component skills and the importance of such instruction. |
|
Increasing School Readiness in Early Education Programs with a Behavior Analytic Approach |
Domain: Service Delivery |
KATHERINE KAVANAUGH (Florida Institute of Technology), Joshua K. Pritchard (Florida Institute of Technology) |
|
Abstract: In 2004, due to the rising number of students inadequately prepared for Kindergarten the state of Florida initiated a Voluntary Prekindergarten program that would allow all students, regardless of ability to pay, access to free half-day preschool. This program increased rates of Kindergarten readiness rates by nearly 10% each year. However, when assessing letter identification and sounds, only 72% of students who did not attend VPK were ready and only 80% of students who attended VPK were ready. This means that almost 30,000 students entering kindergarten do not have the required skills to succeed. And that is only in the state Florida. Several other states also have a VPK program or similar. But surprisingly, 11 states do not have any state funded pre-kindergarten programs. Many studies demonstrate that children who enter Kindergarten that are prepared will be more likely to be successful throughout their schooling and children that are not adequately prepared tend to fall behind in kindergarten. This delay frequently continues throughout the rest of the student’s schooling. This paper introduces several procedures that could be used to increase kindergarten readiness and decrease negative implications for the individual, the family and society. |
|
Teaching Generalized Action Verb-Referent Relations: An Application of Instructional Design to Equivalence-Based Instruction |
Domain: Applied Research |
ANUSHA SUBRAMANYAM (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), John W. Eshleman (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology) |
|
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to expand the applied research on establishing generalized equivalence classes to target concept formation. This study compared the effects of using static (i.e., picture) and dynamic (i.e., brief video clip) instructional formats to teach conceptual classes comprised of action word-referent relations. Verbsgiven their transitory, dynamic, and relational naturewere targeted as a conceptual class distinct from other grammatical classes. Instructional design features, including multiple exemplars and fluency criteria, were applied to a computerized match-to-sample procedure in order to target both equivalence class formation and concept formation given 24 actions involving an actor manipulating an object. Five elementary school students, between 5 and 6 years of age, were selected for participation in this study. Participants had no known diagnoses, but performed at below-average levels in both reading and vocabulary at the start of the study. A multiple treatments, multi-probe experimental design was conducted, during which students progressed through six phases of instruction then testing for emergent and generalized relations. The results provided (1) initial information on acquisition, generalization, and maintenance of verbs as concepts; and (2) information on the conditions that are sufficient for establishing generalized equivalence classes comprised of action word-referent relations. |
|
|
|
|
|
PDS EVENT: Conversation Hour With Prominent Women in OBM |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
201 (CC) |
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Amber Marie Candido (University of Nevada, Reno) |
MARIA E. MALOTT (ABAI) |
RAMONA HOUMANFAR (University of Nevada, Reno) |
LAURA L. METHOT (CLG, Inc.) |
Abstract: At this event, OBM-interested students will hear about challenges (and successes) faced by women in OBM who are either in academia and/or are practitioners. |
Keyword(s): OBM, Women |
|
|
|
|
Channel Your Inner Entrepreneur: There's More to Consulting Than "Hanging up a Shingle" |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
203AB (CC) |
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Julie M. Slowiak, Ph.D. |
Chair: Julie M. Slowiak (University of Minnesota Duluth) |
DARRYL WAHLSTROM (D.A.W. Organization Consulting Solutions) |
Darryl A. Wahlstrom, Ph.D., is an expert and leader in organizational performance. During the past 20 years, he has partnered with a wide variety of workplace teams and leaders to help them identify and overcome critical roadblocks to improved performance. S&P and Fortune companies such as DENSO Manufacturing, Pfizer, Inc., and Zoetis have partnered with Dr. Wahlstrom to help achieve organizational goals. He believes coaching is a powerful, dynamic, and creative process. He provides direct, confidential assistance for executives, leaders, and managers to help them identify their strengths and what may be presently holding them back. Honest feedback and valuable guidance combine to help them craft a workable pathway for personal growth that is both goal-oriented and focused on specific outcomes. He is a certified provider of the pioneering organizational and leadership technologies from Bartell & Bartell, Ltd. He holds the Associate Coach Certification (ACC) credential recognized by the International Coaching Federation (ICF) and advanced certification in Organizational Development Human Resource Management from Columbia University. Dr. Wahlstrom earned his Ph.D. in education at the University of Michigan, with a multi-disciplinary focus on organizational psychology. He frequently speaks and contributes content on leadership and coaching. He is active in several professional organizations including Michigan Manufacturers Association (MMA), Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM), and Society for Industrial and Organizational Psychology (SIOP). |
Abstract: The Era of Big Work in which corporations recruited and retained qualified workers, metered productivity over a 40-hour week, and incented workers with total compensation packages is the historic norm for the U.S. economy. After the Great Recession (2007-09) and massive layoffs, predictably many professionals did not return to positions comparable to the ones they previously held because of the slow, protracted economic recovery. Many workers, instead, re-appraised their personal direction and took stock of market factors and emerging trends. They intentionally chose not to return to traditional corporate jobs and have pursued careers as freelancers, independent consultants, and contract workers. In fact, estimates suggest that about 42 million, or one-third of all U.S. workers, fall into this category and that by the end of the decade, the numbers will rise by 40% to 60 million people. These independents are often seen as entrepreneurs as if the label were all encompassing, one-size-fits-all, and their success is determined by the presence--or absence--of some elusive quality or trait. There is an opportunity to view entrepreneurism more broadly and, in doing so, support the journeys of a growing number of individuals in their personal and professional growth. |
Keyword(s): consulting, entrepreneur |
|
|
|
|
An Analysis of Practice Changes Following the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
213AB (CC) |
Area: PRA/TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Deirdre Lee Fitzgerald (University of Saint Joseph) |
CE Instructor: Deirdre Lee Fitzgerald, Ph.D. |
Abstract: As the field of Behavior Analysis evolves, our practice codes and guidelines have similarly undergone transformations in specificity, rigor, precision, and scope. The 2016 implementation of the BACB Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts will have widespread impacts for certificants, preparations and training programs, and practice sites. An analysis of needed changes in these applied domains will be presented. Specific attention to needed changes to content required to move from the Guidelines for Responsible Conduct for Behavior Analysts and the Professional Disciplinary and Ethical Standards to the new compliance code will be outlined. Methods of integrating the new Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts into graduate curricula will be identified with suggestions for instructional designers and program evaluators. Finally, applications of the new code to daily practice by certificants, supervisees, and individuals preparing for certification will be presented with a focus on activities and assessments that will address competency. |
Keyword(s): Compliance Code, Ethics, Graduate Training, Practice Standards |
|
Components of the New Professional and Ethical Compliance Code that May Change your Practice |
DEIRDRE LEE FITZGERALD (University of Saint Joseph) |
Abstract: A comprehensive look at the professional practice of Behavior Analysis from actively involved practitioners along with extensive data from certificants have driven changes in the standards of practice for Behavior Analysts. These changes bring clarity and coordination to the various rules of our profession and allow for the address of issues across constituencies that are important to us. An analysis of components of the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts and implications for practice changes that they may produce will be discussed. Ways to integrate these elements into training of new practitioners and the practice or current certificants will be addressed. |
|
Embedding the New Ethics in the Graduate Curriculum Effectively |
Michael F. Dorsey (Endicott College), MICHAEL WEINBERG (Orlando Behavior Health Services, LLC) |
Abstract: Over the past several months, a number of changes have occurred in the evolution of the ethical codes governing the profession of Applied Behavior Analysis. In particular, in a special issue of their newsletter, the Behavior Analysis Certification Board recently announced the 2016 implementation of the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts, which will replace the Guidelines for Responsible Conduct. In addition, there are now over 20 states with licensing laws governing the profession of Behavior Analysis, some based in part or in whole on the BACB standards, while others have extended the BACB standards or promulgated regulatory standards idiosyncratic to their respective states. Incorporating this diverse body of knowledge, especially with the advent of on-line graduate programs serving students residing outside of the state/country in which the institution of higher education is located, is critical to the future success of students. The goal of this presentation will be to review these new standards, including suggestions of how to best incorporate the information onto a successful curricula. |
|
Current Issues and Approaches to Certification Exam Preparation for the Revised BACB Ethical Standards |
MICHAEL WEINBERG (Orlando Behavior Health Services, LLC) |
Abstract: The BACB recently posted a revised Ethical Standards document in September, 2014 that will go into effect as of January, 2016. As of this year’s ABAI conference, BACB certification candidates must complete Task List 4 course requirements, requiring changes in exam preparation assistance and products provided to these candidates. Some major changes in the ethical standards have been made and to that end, efforts have been made to incorporate these into the exam preparation materials and ensuring an understanding of these, as well as competence as behavior analyst practitioners. Revisions and methods for exam review and ensuring competence as practitioners will be presented along with strategies for assisting those who are preparing to take the exam to increase chances of successfully passing the first time. Current efforts to work with university programs to enhance exam preparation and study will be addressed as a component of providing exam preparation services. |
|
|
|
|
PDS EVENT: Standard Celeration Chart, Equal Interval Graphs, or Both? You Decide |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
214A (CC) |
Area: PRA/TPC; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Megan Miller, M.S. |
Chair: Megan Miller (The Ohio State University) |
RICHARD M. KUBINA JR. (Penn State) |
MICHAEL M. MUELLER (Southern Behavioral Group) |
CLAIRE ELLIS (Navigation Behavioral Consulting) |
Abstract: Problem solving and decision making encompass one of the most important practices in service delivery for behavior analysts. Different options exist for engaging in this process such as Standard Celeration Charts and Equal Interval Graphs. Most service providers use one type of graphing method within their service delivery but this may be because of a lack of training or exposure to other graphing options. The purpose of this panel is to expose students and practitioners to each type of graphing method so they can make informed decisions regarding which method is more appropriate for the services they provide. Panelists will answer questions about the graphing methods they use to engage in effective problem solving and decision making, how they train others to use these graphing methods, and the benefits and disadvantages of these graphing methods. One panelist will focus on the use of the Standard Celeration Chart, one will focus on the use of Equal Interval Graphs, and one will focus on the feasibility of both types of graphs from a practitioner perspective. |
Keyword(s): Decision Making, Graphing, Problem Solving |
|
|
|
|
Behavioral Economics of Sexual HIV Risk Behavior in Humans: Sexual Discounting |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
006AB (CC) |
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research |
Instruction Level: Basic |
CE Instructor: Matthew W. Johnson, Ph.D. |
Chair: Christine E. Hughes (University of North Carolina Wilmington) |
MATTHEW W. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine) |
Matthew W. Johnson, Ph.D., is an associate professor of psychiatry at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine. His behavioral economics research has applied delay discounting and demand analyses to addiction. Highly cited early contributions include validation of human delay discounting methods and approaches for evaluating discounting data. His research has indicated delay discounting of condom use to be a critical variable influencing sexual HIV risk. Dr. Johnson also has conducted human studies determining the acute effects of numerous drugs including cocaine, methamphetamine, nicotine, caffeine, GHB, alcohol, triazolam, ramelteon, psilocybin, dextromethorphan, and salvinorin A. His recent research has combined his areas of expertise by determining the effects of acute drug administration on the discounting of sexual outcomes. Dr. Johnson has published more than 50 manuscripts and chapters. He has been awarded more than $5 million as principal investigator from the National Institutes of Health. Dr. Johnson received the 2011 Young Psychopharmacologist Award from the Psychopharmacology and Substance Abuse Division of the American Psychological Association, and the 2014 Federation of Associations in Behavioral & Brain Sciences Early Career Impact Award. Dr. Johnson has been interviewed about the behavioral effects of drugs by CNN’s Wolf Blitzer Show, NPR’s Morning Edition, NPR’s Kojo Nnamdi Show, The New York Times, and The Washington Post. |
Abstract: Many studies have shown that greater delay discounting of money is associated with drug-use disorders. The Sexual Discounting Task was developed to determine the effect of delay on decisions to use condoms in casual sex contexts. Findings show that sexual discounting is typically hyperbolic, consistent with discounting results across species and outcomes. Data show sexual discounting to be: sensitivity to sexual partner desirability and likelihood of having a sexually transmitted infection (STI); related to self-reported recent sexual risk (contrasting with money discounting); greater in drug-dependent vs. nondependent individuals; and reliable at a one-week interval. Recently examined were the acute effects of drugs associated with sexual risk on the Sexual Discounting Task, including a novel probability discounting variation assessing the effects of uncertainty of STI contraction on condom use. Results suggest that cocaine, methamphetamine, and alcohol increase both delay and probability discounting of condom use. For methamphetamine, this increase was observed only for those individuals for whom methamphetamine increased sexual arousal ratings. These drugs showed no effect in changing money discounting. Collectively, these data suggest that delay and probability discounting are processes contributing to HIV risk behavior. The results also highlight the limitations of assessing discounting with only monetary outcomes. |
Target Audience: Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the event, participants should be able to: (1) identify similarities in results between the discounting of condom use and the discounting of money in humans and primary reinforcers in nonhumans; (2) describe the effects of methamphetamine, cocaine, and alcohol on the discounting of sexual and monetary outcomes; and (3) identify evidence indicating that monetary and nonmonetary tasks show differential relations with clinical variables of interest. |
Keyword(s): drug-use disorders, risky behavior, sexual discounting |
|
|
|
|
Technological Innovations for the Teaching of Behavior Analysis in Colleges |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
206AB (CC) |
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Emaley Bladh McCulloch (Relias Learning) |
CE Instructor: Dana R. Reinecke, Ph.D. |
Abstract: With the proliferation of new technology, there are more ways to teach behavior analysis than ever before. Technology allows us to reach students who would not otherwise be able to learn about behavior analysis due to geographical or other barriers. Additionally, technology provides inexpensive alternatives that allow students to have meaningful learning experiences that would otherwise be costly in terms of financial and other resources. The presentations in this symposium will discuss some recent innovations in the use of technology to teach behavior analysis at the post-secondary level, to graduate and undergraduate students in a variety of disciplines and at three different college and university settings in the US and in Mexico. Specifically, we will address the use of technology in online education in behavior analysis at the post-college level, a technology-based functional behavior assessment training protocol used to teach about behavior analysis to non-behavior analysis students, and the use of a readily-available hardware and software solution for student participation in operant conditioning laboratory exercises. |
Keyword(s): online education, teaching BA, technology |
|
Assessment of the Effectiveness of Virtual Functional Behavior Assessment Training on the Understanding of Functions of Behavior in Graduate Students |
DANA R. REINECKE (The Sage Colleges), Cheryl Ostryn (The Sage Colleges) |
Abstract: An understanding of the functions of behavior is beneficial in many fields. The availability of technology for virtual training in assessment of the functions of behavior presents unique opportunities to provide training in functions of behavior to students in human services outside of ABA. In the current study, students in a graduate-level dietetic internship program were provided with the opportunity to learn about functions of behavior through an online module, which included videos and guided activities for functional behavior assessment. Pre- and post-tests were presented, which provided case study materials relevant to their field, and asked specific questions to determine if there was a change in the students’ understanding of behavior from a functional assessment perspective. Blind reviewers scored pre- and post-tests on three variables, including descriptions of behavior, antecedents and consequences, and causes of behavior. Comparisons of pre- and post-test scores across these variables indicate modest improvements in use of objective, behavioral terminology to describe relevant behavior, environmental events, and possible functions of behavior. |
|
Inexpensive Setup Based on Arduino and Visual Basic for Laboratory Courses on Operant Conditioning |
ROGELIO ESCOBAR (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Carlos Alexis Perez Herrera (National Autonomous University of Mexico) |
Abstract: Because of the increasing popularity of microcontroller boards, interfaces for controlling operant conditioning chambers can be built at low cost with barely any knowledge of electronics. One example is the Arduino board that can be programmed and controlled through one USB port of a laptop or netbook computer. These boards were used in combination with Visual Basic 2010 Express Edition programming for providing users with a “friendly” graphic interface in operant laboratories. Additionally, Visual Basic programs allowed storage and visual display of real-time data in digital counters and cumulative records. This Arduino-Visual Basic interface was used in two laboratory courses in the National Autonomous University of Mexico. Low-cost operant conditioning chambers were built and students connected the interface and uploaded the programs to the computers in the classroom. During the courses, the students conducted basic schedules of reinforcement using rats as subjects. The cost of each interface and experimental chamber was less than 60 dollars. This presentation will provide detailed instructions for setting up the equipment and will describe how the equipment was used. The portable setup developed for laboratory courses could be used without previous knowledge in electronics and in places where resources are an issue. |
|
A Comparison of Two Reading Assignments on Quiz Performance by Online Students |
CHERYL J. DAVIS (Institute for Behavioral Studies, Endicott College), Thomas L. Zane (Institute for Behavioral Studies, Endicott College) |
Abstract: Online instruction continues to increase in popularity. However, just as in traditional classroom instruction, online education can be done well or be done poorly. The research literature on online instruction is fraught with problems that make establishment of learning principles for how to teach effectively online highly skeptical. This research base consistently lacks the application of a natural science methodology, such as the use of established research designs, operational definitions of key terms, and quantifiable and reliable measurement. What is needed in this field of online instruction, is well-developed research studies that experimentally test different factors that may (or may not) contribute to effective online instruction. The purpose of this study was to compare the influence of two different types of online assignments on weekly quiz scores in classes that were exclusively online. The dependent variable was the score on weekly quizzes. The independent variable was either written responses to study questions that targeted specific points for that week’s reading material, or a simple summary of the readings for that week. We used an alternating treatments design over 4 sections of graduate-level classes in applied behavior analysis. Results showed that study questions resulted in higher quiz scores than the reading summaries. Although students reported more time spent each week completing the study questions than reading summaries, they preferred the study questions, as those gave them a better “understanding” of the material. |
|
|
|
|
Contingencies and Metacontingencies |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
007C (CC) |
Area: TPC |
Keyword(s): Contingencies |
Chair: Diego Zilio (State University of São Paulo) |
|
The Biggest Matching Law Study You Never Heard Of: A Behavior Analytic Appreciation of Barker and Wright's Lost Classic, Midwest and Its Children |
Domain: Theory |
JAMES T. TODD (Eastern Michigan University) |
|
Abstract: The history of behavior analysis is primarily one of keen attention given to the discrete responses of individual organisms under carefully controlled conditions. From this, we aspire to deal effectively with the totality of behavior under ordinary, undesigned conditions. One of our great advancements in getting to this goal is the matching law, which tells us that various measures of responding are proportional to various measures of reinforcement. This we usually ascribe to Herrnsteins basic experimental work in the early 1960s. Nowadays, however, when we want to prove the general worth of the matching law, we sometimes use it to explain scoring attempts in sports or the behavior of individual children in reasonably typical settings. However, more than half a century ago, in the early 1950s, the Ecological Psychologists were already attempting to relate rates of socially relevant classes of objectively measured behaviorin everyone in an entire cityto various objectively measured aspects of the physical environmentacross an entire city. One of the results of this effort was an anticipation of a matching-type analysis of the participation every inhabitant in a city in all of its response opportunities, as described in Roger Barker and Herbert Wright's lost classic, Midwest and Its Children (1954). The complexity and sophistication of this massive effort, and the attempts of Barker and Wright to graphically and mathematically organize the data, can serve as a lesson to behavior analysts looking to expand the relevance of their work from discrete responses in the lab to everyday behavior of great general import. |
|
Homogenous and/or Pragmatic Reductionism: Comments on the Relation Between Contingency and Metacontingency |
Domain: Theory |
DIEGO ZILIO (State University of São Paulo), Kester Carrara (State University of São Paulo) |
|
Abstract: One of the main arguments for the defense of metacontingency as a model for explaining social phenomena is that it embraces another kind of selection (cultural selection) beyond natural and operant selection which, despite being emergent on operant processes, would not be reducible to operant selection. Therefore, for being in another level of analysis, cultural selection demands a conceptual framework of its own, hence the metacontingency. Our goal here is to discuss the argument of irreducibility through two models of reductionism: (a) Ernest Nagel's homogeneous reduction, according to which reduction is established when it's possible to derivate the reduced theory from the reductive theory without needing bridge laws; and (b) what we have called pragmatic reduction, which occurs when a theory situated at a lower level of analysis presents more parsimonious explanations as well as better conditions for prediction and control of phenomena supposedly occurring at a higher (emergent) level. Having these two models of reduction as our analytical framework, we will analyze the relations between two dyads present in the discussions regarding cultural selection: (a) individual social behavior and culture; and (b) contingency and metacontingency. We will suggest that although metacontingency seems to be reducible to contingency (and that we can explain social behavior in terms of operant behavior), from that does not necessarily follows that culture is reducible to individual social behavior. |
|
Bridging the Gap Between a Science of Individual Behavior and a Science of Cultural Practices: From Social Behavior to Metacontingency |
Domain: Theory |
KALLIU COUTO (Oslo and Akershus University College), Ingunn Sandaker (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences) |
|
Abstract: Just as explanations of individual behavior based on three-term contingency benefit from knowledge of other levels of analysis (e.g. inter- and intra-species particularities), explanation of cultural practices also may benefit by incorporating knowledge from other levels. Behavior analysts adopt a selectionist approach when explaining behavior of human and nonhuman organisms. For human beings this selection process can be conceptually divided into three levels: phylogenetic, ontogenetic and cultural (Skinner, 1981). Although all levels of selection interact to determine human behavior, the focus of the field of behavior analysis has been on ontogenesis. The formulation of the metacontingency concept (Glenn, 1986, 1988; Glenn & Malott, 2004; Malott & Glenn, 2006) brought a tangible way of studying selection on the third level. However, as Mattaini (2006) postulates, the metacontingency concept might not capture all aspects of cultural selection. On the other hand, the three-term contingency concept on its own also may not capture all aspects of individual selection. It will be argued here that an alternative approach may be carried out by bridging the gap between science of individual behavior and science of cultural practices through better integration of knowledge from behavioural contingencies and interlocking contingencies into metacontingency. |
|
Keyword(s): Contingencies |
|
|
|
|
The Future of ABA Interventions for Children With Autism |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
217A (CC) |
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Mark R. Dixon, Ph.D. |
Chair: Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth) |
MARK R. DIXON (Southern Illinois University) |
RUTH ANNE REHFELDT (Southern Illinois University) |
ANDY BONDY (Pyramid Educational Consultants) |
Abstract: The field of applied behavior analysis has contributed greatly to the wellbeing of children with autism and related disabilities. Problematic behaviors have been reduced, social skills enhanced, and language repertoires established through the use of behavior analytic technologies and teaching strategies. While these successes have helped to improve the lives of children and families, critics of behavior analysis continue to assert that the repertoires established by behavior analytic treatments are narrow, lacking in generalization, and neglectful of important cognitive skills. In particular, verbal behavior approaches designed to instruct language skills have been criticized as lacking the necessary complexity required to develop genuine understanding or fluent conversation. The present panel will address this issue in the context of current research trends, available manualized treatment models, and issues related to the acceptance of behavior analytic treatment. Special emphasis will be placed on moving the field toward contemporary behavior analytic approaches that are designed to increase communication skills beyond elementary verbal operants. |
Keyword(s): Autism, PEAK, PECs, Verbal Behavior |
|
|
|
|
Enhancing the Effectiveness and Efficiency of Instructional Procedures |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
217B (CC) |
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University) |
Discussant: Alison M. Betz (Florida Institute of Technology) |
CE Instructor: Regina A. Carroll, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Practitioners and researchers have effectively used a range of instructional techniques from applied behavior analysis to teach critical social, language, and academic skills to children with and without intellectual disabilities. The collection of studies in this symposium will explore how different variations in instructional procedures can influence the acquisition and generalization of skills. First, Casey Nottingham will present a study examining the effects of differential reinforcement on the acquisition of tacts for children with an autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Second, Brad Joachim will present a study evaluating the effects of different consequences for correct responses on skill acquisition for children with ASD during discrete trial instruction. Third, Brittany LeBlanc will present a study comparing the influence of errors of omission and commission on skill acquisition for typically developing children. Fourth, Marc Lanovaz will present a study comparing serial and concurrent training on the generalization of receptive identification skills for children with ASD. Finally, Alison Betz will discuss interesting components of each study, and describe future areas of research on skill acquisition. |
Keyword(s): Autism, discrete trial, Skill acquisition |
|
A Comparison of Differential Reinforcement Procedures on the Acquisition of Tacts in Children with Autism |
CASEY NOTTINGHAM (Caldwell College), Brittany English (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell College), Tiffany Kodak (University of Oregon), Paul Argott (EPIC School), April N. Kisamore (Caldwell College) |
Abstract: Differential reinforcement is an operant procedure implemented to increase the occurrence of desired behavior while simultaneously decreasing the occurrence of undesired behavior. Although researchers and early interventions manuals have recommended the use of differential reinforcement arrangements during skill acquisition programming, the most appropriate means to using differential reinforcement to maximize unprompted responding remains unclear. The purpose of the current study was to extend the extent research by comparing the effects of multiple differential reinforcement arrangements and a nondifferential reinforcement arrangement the acquisition of tacts in children with autism. The current study is the first to include a manipulation of reinforcement magnitude and include a methodology to identify reinforcement values. The results demonstrate that differential reinforcement procedures are effective in increasing correct unprompted responding for some individuals. |
|
A Comparison of Different Consequences for Correct Responses During Discrete Trial Instruction |
BRAD JOACHIM (West Virginia University), Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: When a child is first learning a skill with discrete trial instruction (DTI), it is typically recommended that teachers provide brief access to highly preferred tangible items contingent on every correct responses. Few studies have systematically evaluated the effects of delivering different types of consequences for correct responses on skill acquisition during DTI. We compared the effects of four different consequences for correct responses on skill acquisition for three children with an autism spectrum disorder. Specifically, we compared skill acquisition when correct responses resulted in (a) access to praise and a preferred tangible item, (b) praise and a token exchangeable for access to a preferred tangible item at the end of the session, (c) praise only, and (d) no differential consequence. Next, we assessed participant’s preference for each of the teaching conditions using a concurrent-chains assessment. The results suggested that each participant acquired the target skills in one or more teaching conditions; however, the consequence that resulted in the quickest acquisition of target skills differed across participants. During the concurrent-chains assessment, participants preferred conditions that were also associated with the quickest acquisition of target skills. These results are discussed in terms of best practice for teaching children during DTI. |
|
Comparing the Effects of Errors of Commission and Omission on Skill Acquisition |
BRITTANY LEBLANC (University Of Oregon), Tiffany Kodak (University of Oregon), Samantha Moberg (University of Oregon), Jacqueline Kammer (University of Oregon), Shaji Haq (University of Oregon), Patricia Zemantic (University of Oregon) |
Abstract: The current study extends DiGennero Reed, Reed, Baez, and Maguire (2011) by comparing the effects of errors of commission, errors of omission, and no errors on the acquisition of auditory-visual conditional discriminations with two typically developing children. We used an adapted alternating treatment design, and the dependent variable was the number of sessions to meet the mastery criterion. During errors of commission, the experimenter reinforced incorrect responses during 17% of the trials. During errors of omission, the experimenter failed to reinforce correct responses during 17% to 18% of the trials. Kyle’s results showed that he acquired targets in 7, 8, and 18 sessions for the no errors, errors of commission, and errors of omission conditions, respectively. Cassie acquired targets in the no errors condition in 4 sessions and 8 sessions in the errors of omission and commission conditions. Thus, both types of errors delayed acquisition, and errors of omission had a greater impact on acquisition for one participant. We will discuss the importance of empirical evaluations that compare different types and amounts of treatment fidelity errors and the impact these errors have on skill acquisition. |
|
A comparison of serial and concurrent training on the generalization of receptive labeling |
MARC J. LANOVAZ (Universite de Montreal), Marie-Michèle Dufour (Université de Montréal) |
Abstract: Researchers have shown that serial and concurrent training both promote generalization of learned skills in children with autism spectrum disorders. However, few studies have compared both training strategies together, and to our knowledge, none of these comparisons involved receptive labeling. Thus, the purpose of our study was to compare the effects of serial and concurrent training on the generalization of receptive labeling in nine children with autism spectrum disorders. We taught one to three pairs of concepts to each participant. One concept within each pair was taught using concurrent training and the other using serial training. We alternated teaching sessions within a multi-element design and staggered the introduction of the subsequent pairs as in a multiple baseline design. Overall, five participants generalized at least one concept more rapidly with concurrent training, four participants generalized approximately simultaneously following both strategies, and none showed generalization more rapidly with serial training. Our results are consistent with other comparison studies on the topic and indicate that practitioners should prefer concurrent training over serial training when teaching basic concepts to children with autism spectrum disorders. |
|
|
|
|
Recent Research on Skill Acquisition in Children with Autism |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
Grand Ballroom C1 (CC) |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Erin Richard White (Alpine Learning Group) |
Discussant: Amanda Karsten (Western New England University) |
CE Instructor: Erin Richard White, M.A. |
Abstract: This symposium will be comprised of four data-based presentations that describe innovative research on teaching skills to children with autism. The first study investigated the use of a procedure to decrease the inappropriate echolalia of the echoic prompt “say.” A pause was introduced between the say prompt and the echoic prompt and then systematically shortened in duration. Appropriate echoic responding increased for all participants following the pause procedure. The second presentation compared three procedures (i.e., vocal imitation training, stimulus-stimulus pairing, mand-model procedures) for establishing echoic repertoires. The results suggested that the most effective teaching procedure may differ across participants. The third study evaluated the eight-step prompting sequence outlined by Horner and Keilitz (1975) to teach self-case skills. They then investigated whether delivery of reinforcement for correct responses following general prompts increased the likelihood of prompt dependency. The results were idiosyncratic across participants. The final paper evaluated the effects of a 2-component monitoring response plus a prompting procedure on the differential motor imitation responses of two children with autism. The participants learned to imitate the model’s response only during trials in which a high-preference item was delivered to the model. |
Keyword(s): Echoic, Echolalia, Observational Learning, Prompting |
|
Use of a Pause Procedure to Teach Appropriate Echoic Responding Following the Instruction, “Say” |
ANDRESA A. DE SOUZA (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Nicole M. Rodriguez (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Megan Ashley Levesque (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jessica Niemeier (UNMC Munroe- Meyer Institute), Michelle Ocen (Center for Autism and Neuro-developmental Disabilities of Southern California, UC Irvine Medical Center) |
Abstract: Children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) often engage in indiscriminate echoic responding such as echolalia of the instruction “say” when prompted to repeat a word or phrase. Despite the prevalence of echolalia in ASD and its potential to interfere with the acquisition of functional language, few studies have addressed echolalia of instructions during language training (Ingvarsson, 2011; Kodak, 2012; Valentino, Shillingsburg, Conine, Powell, 2012). In the present study, we used a nonconcurrent multiple baseline to evaluate a procedure in which a pause was introduced between the say prompt and the echoic prompt and then systematically shortened in duration on inappropriate echolalia of the word “say” and appropriate echolalia of the echoic prompt. Three children diagnosed with an ASD and one diagnosed with Unspecified Adjustment Reaction Disorder participated. For all participants, zero or near-zero levels of correct responding were observed during baseline in which there was differential reinforcement for correct echoic responding but no pause. Appropriate echoic responding increased for all participants following the pause procedure, although some participants required an additional blackout procedure to produce desirable outcomes. Appropriate echoic responding maintained across new words, therapists, and settings. |
|
A Systematic Comparison of Commonly Used Echoic Teaching Procedures |
CATIA CIVIDINI-MOTTA CIVIDINI (New England Center for Children), Nicole Scharrer (The New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: There is limited investigation of procedures for establishing echoic responses. In this presentation we will be reviewing data from treatment comparisons of various iterations of vocal imitation training, stimulus-stimulus pairing, and mand-model procedures. Preference assessments were conducted to identify highly preferred items, including edibles and tangible items. At least two sets of three target sounds were then selected for each participant. Data were collected on target vocalizations emitted during training sessions and during play sessions completed prior to and after training sessions. These data, in addition to the participants’ performance during probes assessing the function of their vocalizations, were compared to assess the efficacy of each teaching procedure. Interobserver agreement data were collected on over 33% of all sessions above and have averaged above 90% agreement. The results suggested that the most effective teaching procedure may differ across participants. In addition, data indicated that the mand-model procedure may be more likely to be effective when prompts are provided for both errors of commission and omission. Finally, data from the first few comparisons showed that play sessions completed prior to and post-training sessions may be unnecessary, at least in cases when establishing echoic responses is the priority. |
|
A Systematic Replication of the Horner & Keilitz Prompting Sequence |
CATHERINE B SIMMS (University of Florida), Jonathan K Fernand (University of Florida), Sarah K. Slocum (University of Florida), Christopher Rubow (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Horner and Keilitz (1975) used an eight-step prompting sequence to teach the self-care skill of tooth brushing to eight individuals with intellectual disabilities. The Horner and Keilitz study included responding to a “general” prompt and independent responding within the chaining task as “correct” responding. It is possible that the inclusion of a general prompt as a correct response may result in any step of the chain being prompt dependent, or at the very least, the initiation of the chain may be prompt dependent. Therefore, the purpose of the current project was to, first, evaluate the Horner and Keilitz (1975) eight-step prompting sequence by evaluating responding at each prompt level and, second, to investigate whether delivery of reinforcement for correct responses following general prompts increased the likelihood of prompt dependency. Three individuals with intellectual disabilities have participated. Thus far, participant responding has been idiosyncratic as to whether mastery of the chain was reached at the independent level or at the level of the general prompt. |
|
Teaching Children with Autism to Differentially Imitate Observed Behaviors |
PAULA GAGLIOTI (Caldwell College), Tina Sidener (Caldwell College), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell College), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group) |
Abstract: Imitation has been taught to children with autism using contrived procedures (e.g., stating “do this” prior to instruction); however, to date no studies have demonstrated effective procedures to teach imitation controlled by natural antecedents and consequences. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of a 2-component monitoring response plus a prompting procedure on the differential motor imitation responses of two children with autism. Three types of trials were interspersed during each session: (1) model receiving a high-preference item contingent upon a motor response, (2) model receiving a neutral item contingent upon a motor response, and (3) model receiving nothing contingent upon a motor response. Generalization was assessed with a peer, novel stimuli and responses, and in the absence of the monitoring response. Both participants learned to imitate only during trials in which a high-preference item was delivered to the model. These results add to the literature an effective teaching procedure to increase imitation through observation using natural antecedents and consequences. |
|
|
|
|
Teaching Children with Autism and Developmental Disabilities Critical Safety Skills |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
217C (CC) |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: David Garcia (Behavior Analysis Inc.) |
Discussant: Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University) |
CE Instructor: David Garcia, Ed.D. |
Abstract: Children with autism often lack critical safety skills that put them at serious risk of injury or harm by others. Often the use of specialized teaching methods is required for children with autism to learn these important skills. At this time there is very limited research in this important area. This symposium will attempt to begin to fill this void by presenting a series of studies that address fire safety, navigating safely through parking lots, and safety skills related to social media. The first two studies will address fire-safety skills and will demonstrate simple to use, teaching methodologies consisting of modeling and rehearsal to teach children with autism to evacuate settings when hearing a fire-alarm and to notify an adult. These strategies also resulted in generalization across settings and different sounding alarms for most participants. The third study will show the effectiveness of video-modeling with in-situ feedback to teach several critical skills needed to navigate through parking lots. Lastly, a study will be presented that addresses social safety skills in a charter high school using behavioral skills training and video-modeling. Results and implications for future research and application will be discussed for all studies. |
|
Using Modeling and Rehearsal to Teach Fire Safety to Children with Autism |
DAVID GARCIA (Behavior Analysis Inc.), Charles Dukes (Florida Atlantic University), Michael Brady (Florida Atlantic University), Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University), Cynthia L. Wilson (Florida Atlantic University) |
Abstract: We evaluated the effectiveness of a modeling and rehearsal strategy to teach young children with autism to evacuate different settings when hearing a fire-alarm and to report it to an adult outdoors. A multiple baseline across participants design was used with three children between 4 and 5 years of age. Results showed that modeling and rehearsal were effective in teaching the fire safety skills to all children. Safety skills also maintained during a 5-week follow-up and generalized to novel settings for each participant. Furthermore, the skills maintained in the generalization settings 5-weeks following the conclusion of the study. This study demonstrates a simple-methodology that can be used by practitioners and teachers to teach children with autism. Implications of safety skill instruction for children with autism will be discussed with particular emphasis on the applied significance of the results as well as new directions for future research related to safety skill instruction. |
|
Are Modeling and Rehearsal Both Necessary? Teaching Fire Safety Skills Without Modeling |
JIMENA VAILLANT-MEKRAS (Florida Autism Treatment Centers), David Garcia (Behavior Analysis Inc.) |
Abstract: A recent study conducted by Garcia et al. (2013) showed that modeling combined with rehearsal was an effective teaching methodology for teaching children with autism the necessary skills to evacuate different settings when hearing a fire-alarm and notifying an adult. Results also showed that the skills maintained and generalized across settings. However, the authors did not evaluate whether participants generalized the skills across different sounding alarms. The current study used a multiple baseline across participants design with 5 children with autism to evaluate whether rehearsal alone with most-to-least prompting would be sufficient to teach fire-safety skills without the need for a modeling component. Results showed that this methodology was effective in teaching the same fire-safety skills as in the Garcia et al. (2013) study without the need of a modeling component. Most participants showed maintenance and generalization of the skills across settings. Furthermore, one of the participants showed generalization across different auditory stimuli (different sounding alarms) and 3 participants showed generalization across alarms following brief multiple exemplar training. Implications for the simple use of this teaching methodology by caregivers and teachers will be discussed as well as suggestions for future research. |
|
Using Video Modeling with In-Situ Video Feedback to Teach Parking Lot Safety to Individuals with Autism |
TOBY J. HONSBERGER (Renaissance Learning Academy) |
Abstract: Parking lots present a plethora of dangerous situations for pedestrians and require a unique set of skills to be navigated safely. Individuals with autism spectrum disorder often have poor pedestrian skills due to their insensitivity to subtle environmental cues and deficient problem solving in unfamiliar environments (Goldsmith, 2009; Jossman et al, 2008). The present study used video modeling to teach three individuals with autism spectrum disorder between the ages of 15 and 19 years old how to safely navigate a parking lot. Participants were taught to move through a parking lot using strategies based on the Radburn Principle, which emphasizes the separation of pedestrians and motor vehicles. The parking lot of a public charter school was the setting for the study, a location that was familiar to the participants and accessed regularly. In situ video prompting feedback was provided to participants immediately following any deviations from the target responses. A multiple probe across participants was utilized and revealed rapid acquisition by all participants. Maintenance probes will be collected to determine whether skills will be maintained over time. |
|
School Based Social Safety Skills Program: A Community Application |
JENNIFER AGGANIS (BCBA) |
Abstract: Teaching social safety skills using evidence-based practices in school and community settings has important implications to the overall safety of individuals with developmental disabilities. Social safety skills combine nonverbal communication, social reciprocity, social cognition, and self-awareness. The presenter will briefly review current literature on instructional methodologies for teaching social safety skills through the use of behavior skills training and video modeling. Instructional strategies, as well as general categories that can be used to create a solid base for teaching social safety skills in schools will also be presented. Preliminary data for several individuals with developmental disabilities will be provided consisting of baseline and in situ training of social safety skills. Baseline and in situ training was conducted in the community through collaboration with a local charter high school. The implications of the results will be addressed with particular emphasis on the utility of the teaching procedures by school staff. This study will address critical social safety skills that are necessary for any school age student to maintain their safety. |
|
|
|
|
Advancements in Skill Acquisition Research for Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
217D (CC) |
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Kimberly Sloman (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University ) |
Discussant: Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University) |
CE Instructor: Kimberly Sloman, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The symposium includes four papers related to the effectiveness of various skill acquisition techniques for individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). In the first paper, Rebecca Werle will present on a comparison of simple discrimination and conditional-only teaching methods in teaching receptive identification to individuals with ASD. In the second paper, Mariana Torres Viso will present on a comparison between speech output and no speech output conditions in teaching receptive identification to individuals with ASD. In the third paper, Shimin Bao will present on a comparison of three training sequences on acquisition of expressive and receptive skills for individuals with ASD. In the fourth paper, Shaji Haq will present on a comparison of massed and distributed practice in skill acquisition for individuals with ASD. Finally, Thomas Higbee will serve as the discussant for the four papers. |
Keyword(s): autism, skill acquisition, treatment comparison |
|
An analysis of the simple-conditional and conditional only methods |
REBECCA WERLE (Florida Institute of Technology), Alison M. Betz (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: Children with autism spectrum disorder often have difficulty in making conditional discriminations. As such, various teaching methods have been developed and evaluated to determine the best approach for teaching conditional discriminations for this population. The purpose of this study was to evaluate various extensions of the previous research that compared the efficacy of the simple-conditional and conditional-only methods on teaching receptive identification tasks (Grow et al., 2014) by: 1) modifying teaching procedures, 2) determining the extent to which there may be interaction effects in the experimental designs, and 3) evaluating the effectiveness of a modified simple-conditional method. Results will be discussed in limitations and practical application. |
|
The Effects of Speech Output Technology on Skill Acquisition in Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder |
MARIANA TORRES-VISO (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kimberly Sloman (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Katelyn Selver (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University) |
Abstract: Previous research on the use of voice output communication aids (VOCAs) has found a number of positive effects including that incorporating speech output into language learning tasks may result in more efficient learning (e.g., Schlosser et al, 1998). However, the relationship between speech output and skill acquisition has not yet been evaluated for individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). The present study compared acquisition of receptive identification of stimuli with speech output (SO) to a no speech output (NSO) condition. Two individuals with ASD participated. For both participants, a multielement design along with a multiple baseline probe across sets was used to evaluate the conditions. Results showed higher rates of correct responding and lower rates of errors for targets were obtained in the SO condition across sets. Furthermore, participants generally met mastery criteria with SO targets in fewer sessions, indicating higher efficiency of the SO condition. Findings from this investigation provide strong preliminary evidence for the benefits of speech output in skill acquisition for children with ASD, both in terms of student accuracy and session efficiency. |
|
The Effects of Receptive and Expressive Sequencing on the Acquisition of Feature, Function, and Class |
SHIMIN BAO (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Taylor Sweatt (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sarah Antal (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sarah A. Lechago (University of Houston-Clear Lake) |
Abstract: Many Early and Intensive Behavioral Intervention (EIBI) curricula recommend targeting receptive language skills prior to targeting the corresponding expressive skills (Leaf & McEachin, 1999; Lovaas, 2003). However, there is very little empirical support for this recommendation. Moreover, some of the research literature on this topic demonstrates that expressive language training may facilitate the acquisition of receptive language (Cuvo &Riva, 1980; Keller &Bucher, 1980; Smeets, 1978). Additional research is warranted to investigate the effects of receptive-expressive sequencing in teaching language to children diagnosed with autism (Petursdottir & Carr, 2011). This study contributes to this body of literature by comparing the effects of three training sequences: 1) expressive-receptive, 2) receptive-expressive, and 3) mixed expressive and receptive, on the acquisition of object feature, function, and class in three children diagnosed with autism. An alternating-treatments design was used to examine the total number of trials to the mastery criterion for both expressive and receptive targets. Thus far, the results demonstrate that targeting the expressive skills before targeting the corresponding receptive skills produces fewer total trials to the mastery criterion for all three participants. Additionally, there was greater emergence of receptive responding after training responses expressively than there was emergence of expressive responding after training responses receptively. |
|
Comparing the Effects of Massed and Distributed Practice for Children with Autism |
SHAJI HAQ (University of Oregon), Tiffany Kodak (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Eva Kurtz-Nelson (University of Oregon), Marilynn Porritt (University of Oregon), Kristin Rush (University of Oregon), Tom Cariveau (University of Oregon), Vincent E. Campbell (University of Oregon), Traci Elaine Ruppert (University of Oregon) |
Abstract: The ways that educators format instruction has implications for children's acquisition of skills. The frequency of practice opportunities that are provided in an instructional session, and the number of instructional sessions that are conducted per week, are two ways to format instruction. Massed practice is an instructional format in which many practice opportunities are provided in an instructional session on one day during the week. In contrast, distributed practice involves presenting fewer practice opportunities in sessions that are conducted across several days per week. The current study replicated and extended Haq and Kodak (in press) by comparing massed and distributed practice on the acquisition of tacts, textual, and intraverbal behavior for children with autism using an adapted alternating treatments design. Dependent measures included total trials, minutes, and weeks to mastery. The results showed that distributed practice led to faster acquisition for all participants. Future research and implications for practice will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Get Moving: Behavior Analysis of Physical Activity for Health and Fitness |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
Texas Ballroom Salon B (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Matthew P. Normand (University of the Pacific) |
Discussant: Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida) |
CE Instructor: Matthew P. Normand, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The widespread prevalence of physical inactivity in both adults and children presents a problem of great social significance in this country and around the world. The behavioral assessment and promotion of physical activity is an emerging area of research in which behavior analysis is well suited to undertake. Continued research in the assessment and promotion of physical activity is necessary for developing useful strategies to combat an increasingly sedentary population. The four papers in this symposium address the problem of physical activity in the following ways: 1) using contingency management to increase physical activity with adults, 2) comparing function-based interventions for children to interventions based on CDC and WHO recommendations, 3) assessing the effect of activity context on physical activity and activity preference with children with developmental disabilities, and 4) evaluating the ways that physical activity data are best analyzed and depicted. |
Keyword(s): data analysis, fitness, health, physical activity |
|
Increasing Physical Activity Deficiencies with Deposit Contracts in Healthy Adults |
WENDY DONLIN WASHINGTON (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Derek McMullen (University of Central Florida), Amanda Devoto (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Lilian Hatcher (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Bryan Acton (Virginia Tech) |
Abstract: Monetary reinforcers, or financial incentives, are often effective at increasing physical activity, but are expensive. To facilitate dissemination, costs must be reduced. Deposit Contracts require participants to invest money in a treatment, which can be earned back by meeting goals. We compared the efficacy of a $50 program on walking when either $0 (N=9) or $25 (N=10) had been deposited by the participant. Nineteen healthy adults who were deficient walkers (<10,000 steps/day on average), wore a Fitbit accelerometer during all waking hours for 5-6 weeks. For a 1-2 week baseline, participants reported stepcounts but received no programmed reinforcers. During a 3-week intervention, $1.50 per day could be earned for meeting individualized stepcount criteria, with bonuses ($2.65) awarded for meeting criteria on three consecutive days. In the final week, a return to baseline condition included no reinforcers or goals. Sixteen participants (84%) increased average daily stepcounts by at least 1600 steps/day (> 1mile). Of those with a treatment effect, nine (56%) relapsed to baseline levels of walking when the reinforcer contingency was removed. A RMANOVA revealed significantly higher stepcounts during the reinforcer condition. Monetary deposit amount did not affect stepcounts or sensitivity to the reinforcers. |
|
A Comparative Analysis of Physical Activity Interventions for Young Children |
HEATHER ZERGER (University of South Florida), Matthew P. Normand (University of the Pacific) |
Abstract: Evidence suggests that physical inactivity is increasingly prevalent among young children. A common recommendation provided to parents suggests that they become actively involved in increasing their child’s physical activity. However, this recommendation does not specify how a parent should become involved. Further, the evaluation of parental involvement in children’s physical activity has yet to be conducted. The purpose of the current study was to conduct a functional analysis to identify a social, environmental variable that would engender a higher level of physical activity in young children. Once a social consequence was identified, reinforcement provided contingently on higher levels of physical activity and according to a fixed-time schedule was compared in an intervention analysis. The overall results of the study indicated that children were most active when receiving a form of social reinforcement contingent on higher levels of physical activity. These results suggest that parents of young children should become involved in increasing their child’s physical activity by providing attention or physical engagement contingent on higher levels of physical activity. |
|
The Effect of Activity Context on Physical Activity and Activity Preference Displayed by Children with Developmental Disabilities |
SHARI M. PINCUS (University of Maryland Baltimore County), Nicole Lynn Hausman (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), SungWoo Kahng (University of Missouri) |
Abstract: The purpose of the current study was to determine the effects of different environmental contexts on the level of moderate-to-vigorous physical activity displayed by children with intellectual and developmental disabilities, and to subsequently determine individual preference for sedentary activities versus more physically active alternatives. An adapted version of The Observational System for Recording Physical Activity in Children (OSRAC) was used to define the test conditions and various levels of physical activity. Individual preference for sedentary and activity contexts was then assessed. If necessary, a differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) intervention was implemented to increase engagement in moderate-to-vigorous physical activity. Results indicated that the fixed-activity condition produced the highest levels of moderate-to-vigorous physical activity. Only one participant required the addition of the DRA component, as the other participants demonstrated a clear preference for the physical activity context. Although the intervention phase was successful in increasing moderate-to-vigorous physical activity for this participant, results of the final preference assessment indicated that participant preference for the sedentary activity context remained unchanged. |
|
Evaluating Methods for Enhancing Data Display and Analysis in Physical Activity Research |
DIEGO VALBUENA (University of South Florida), Bryon Miller (University of South Florida), Andrew L. Samaha (University of South Florida), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: Recent research has focused on increasing physical activity levels in sedentary individuals. Physical activity is measured through mechanical devices (pedometers and accelerometers) that record activity while they are worn by individuals throughout the entire day. Because of the daily differences in participants’ routines, daily step or activity data varies substantially from day to day. Consequently, traditional visual analysis of these data is difficult given their lack of stability and high variability. The purpose of this study is to evaluate different methods (Phase mean lines, daily average step total per week, weekly cumulative step totals, moving average, proportion of baseline, change-point detection, and confidence intervals) for analyzing and depicting daily activity data in ways that facilitates visual analysis without altering results. This was achieved by performing the analysis and displays on a representative data set of daily step counts. The different methods are compared to the raw data time series, and advantages and limitations of each method are discussed. |
|
|
|
|
What the Flex: Exploring Behavioral Conceptualizations of Psychological Flexibility and Implications for Assessment |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
Texas Ballroom Salon C (Grand Hyatt) |
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Skylar Fusilier (University of Louisiana at Lafayette) |
Discussant: Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center) |
CE Instructor: Michael Bordieri, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Psychological flexibility has been posited as a fundamental aspect of psychological well being and as a mechanism of change in clinical behavior analysis. A mid-level term, psychological flexibility is often defined in the clinical context as involving open, ongoing awareness to private events in such a way as to decrease avoidance and facilitate effective, values-based behavior. This symposium includes four papers, each linking mid-level conceptualizations of psychological flexibility with basic behavioral principles. The first paper considers a number of behavioral concepts that seem fundamental to psychological flexibility. The second paper explores how those trained in psychological flexibility tact their experience. The third paper examines psychological flexibility and inflexibility in terms of appetitive and aversive control, and introduces a measure of body image flexibility based on this conceptualization. The last study explores qualities of derived relational responding as indicative of flexibility and inflexibility investigates the IRAP as a tool for predicting inflexibility in certain domains of living. |
Keyword(s): acceptance, assessment, mindfulness, Psychological flexibility |
|
Bringing Back the Basics: Relating Basic Behavioral Processes to the Psychological Flexibility Model |
GRAYSON BUTCHER (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette) |
Abstract: Among contextual behavioral scientists, psychological flexibility is proposed to be a unified model of human functioning (Hayes, Strosahl, & Wilson, 2012). The aim of this inductive mid-level model is to simultaneously summarize mechanisms of psychopathology, psychological health, and psychological interventions. Psychological flexibility is described as the ability to engage in valued behaviors, even in the presence of unwelcome thoughts, emotions, and experiences, and is typically conceptualized as comprising six coherent processes (being present, cognitive defusion, experiential acceptance, perspective taking, values, and committed action). This paper will review the roots of the psychological flexibility model from early radical behaviorism to Relational Frame Theory, relating basic principles to the behavioral phenomena being described with this mid-level term, psychological flexibility. Amongst the literature reviewed will be delay discounting, aversive vs. appetitive control, contingency adduction, the variation and selection of behaviors, rule governed behavior, and discriminant generalization. Implications for behavioral assessment of psychological flexibility and for psychological flexibility-based interventions will be discussed. |
|
Modeling Body Image Flexibility Using the Concepts of Transfer of Function and Competing Sources of Control |
NOLAN WILLIAMS (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Gina Quebedeaux Boullion (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Jessica Auzenne (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emmie Hebert (University of Mississippi), Shelley Greene (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette) |
Abstract: Body image can be painful and cause disruption in valued life domains. This disruption might be most likely when the body experience is painful and avoided (i.e., when body image is aversive). Over time, an increasing number of stimuli acquire aversive body image functions, making life more and more difficult. Body image flexibility involves remaining in contact with the full range of experience and serving chosen values, even when painful experiences might help to mitigate this dysfunction. This multi-part project centers around an effort to create a behavioral measure of body image flexibility by using RFT to model 1) the process by which stimuli come to acquire aversive body image functions, 2) the process by which stimuli come to acquire values functions, and 3) varying levels of control that body image or values functions might have over the repertoire at any one moment. Various ways of quantifying participant performance on this task will be discussed in conjunction with different ways of conceptualizing body image flexibility. |
|
Use Your Words: An Examination of Student Writing in Response to Experiential Learning Exercises Targeting Psychological Flexibility |
EMILY ALLEN (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emmy LeBleu (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Ryan Albarado (University of Louisiana Lafayette), Bronwyn Frederick (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Jada Horton (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Alaina Kiefner (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Lauren Griffin (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette) |
Abstract: College students are often faced with a number of transitions across important domains of life. For many students, academic demands, living conditions, financial status, primary relationships and social activities undergo repeated changes during the course of their college education. Psychology of Adjustment is a course designed to teach non-majors fundamental concepts of psychological health. As currently taught, the course includes primarily experiential interventions in which students learn the concepts of psychological adjustment by practicing psychological flexibility in and out of class. Informal student evaluations suggest that these methods not only ensure intellectual grasp of the concepts but also improve students psychological adjustment more broadly. The current qualitative study examines the content of students journal assignments in order to identify ways in which the class impacts psychological flexibility and college adjustment. Preliminary thematic analysis of 157 students journal assignments has revealed the following themes: the identification and clarification of values, observable changes in valued domains of life, the realization that everybody struggles, the awareness of psychological inflexibility and its consequences, willingness to experience painful thoughts and feelings, and gratitude for newfound presence in everyday experience. Implications for future research and course development will be discussed. |
|
This Is How We Do: Use of Word-level IRAP Analyses to Identify Relative Flexibility & Inflexibility with Specific Verbal Stimuli |
EMMIE HEBERT (University of Mississippi), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Kerry C. Whiteman (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi) |
Abstract: The Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP) has most often been used to examine differences between the performances of groups of people with a particular set of stimuli and between specific trial-types. The present study is a continuation of a previous study that examines the possibility of using analyses of individual words in the IRAP to identify relatively strong verbal repertoires. These repertoires may be clinically relevant for the participating individual or for his/her community. They may also be seen as areas of psychological inflexibility. This paper examines multiple methods for examining IRAP outputs at the word level. Additionally, the workability of stimuli (e.g. using “not” with a stimulus versus a new opposing word) will also be discussed. Undergraduate students who participated for course credit showed marked variability in IRAP performance across words within trial types. The discussion focuses on the potential to predict and develop interventions for specific domains for individuals where high levels of bias, rigidity, or fusion are present. |
|
|
|
|
Increasing the Safety of Pedestrians with Behavioral Interventions |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
204A (CC) |
Area: CSE/OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Ron Van Houten (Western Michigan University) |
Discussant: Miles K. Bennett (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Increasing motorist yielding right-of-way to pedestrians in crosswalks reduces the number of collisions between motorists and pedestrians. One very cost effectively technology, which has recently been demonstrated to increase the safety of pedestrians, is the use of a gateway configuration of the in-street yield to pedestrian sign. In the first series of three studies supported by Michigan Department of Transportation examined variables that influenced the efficacy of this sign and determined how to use this treatment most effectively. These studies also examined the effectiveness of various configurations of this treatment that could increase the survival of the treatment in the roadway. In a fourth study supported by the Federal Highway Administration we examined variables related to the efficacy of the countdown pedestrian signal to determine ways to improve their effectiveness. This study examined whether pedestrians could accurately discriminate how much time they needed to cross roadways of various widths, which change interval signal was most clearly understood by pedestrians, and pedestrians with low vision uses countdown pedestrian signals. These studies will inform the use of these technologies across the country. |
|
The Effects of the Symbol Sign and the Use of City Posts on the Efficacy of a Gateway Configuration of the In-Street Sign |
MILES K. BENNETT (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: This study examined whether sign message contributed to the effectiveness of the gateway configuration of the in-street sign at two sites using a reversal design. The percentage of driver yielding right-of-way to pedestrians was consistently low at both sites during baseline conditions. The installation of the gateway configuration increased the yielding to very high levels. The use of the gateway treatment with blank signs. signs that only contained the background reflective yellow green material produced only half as much yielding as the treatment with the sign message present. These data show that the results could not be explained entirely by the perceived narrowing of the road. This study also examined whether replacing the sign element most likely to be struck by vehicles with a robust city post which can withstand many more high speed hits could increase yielding. The results showed that this configuration produced results that were somewhat inferior to that produced by the use of in-street signs in each position. |
|
A Comparison of the Efficacy of a Wide and Narrow Configuration of the In-Street Sign on Driver Yielding to Pedestrians |
JONATHAN HOCHMUTH (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: This study examined whether the width of the gateway configuration of the in-street sign influenced the efficacy of the treatment. Data were collected at there sites with a narrow and a wider gateway configuration. The gateway treatment was more effective in the narrow configuration then the wide configuration at two of the three sites and made little difference at the third site. Contextual variables appeared to be related to whether the narrow or the wide configuration were more effective. These data showed that perceived narrowing was a variable influencing the efficacy of this treatment. These data were interpreted in terms of behavioral principles. |
|
A Comparison of Edge Signs Alone, Lane Lines Alone and a Full Gateway Treatment on Driver Yielding Right-of-Way to Pedestrians |
JONATHAN HOCHMUTH (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: This study compared the use of edge lane in-street signs alone, lane line use of in-street signs alone and the full gateway (edge lane and lane line signs used together on driver yielding behavior to pedestrians. The edge line alone and lane line alone configurations produced marginal increases over baseline levels of yielding behavior while the full gateway configuration lead to a marked increase in yielding behavior at this site. These data were explained using behavioral principles. |
|
Countdown Pedestrian Signals Legibility and Comprehension without Flashing Hand |
GREGORY DELAERE (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Van Houten, LaPlante, & Gustefson (2012)’s previous research on the addition of a Countdown Pedestrian Signal (CPS) to the Flashing Don’t Walk (FDW) display has shown a reduction in pedestrian crashes. Due to the proposed change in meaning to the CPS with a FDW display, the present study attempted to systematically replicate the findings of Singer and Lerner (2005), who investigated the comprehension of the CPS alone display and the CPS with the FDW display and found the comprehension of the CPS alone more closely matched the proposed change in meaning. Additionally, this study investigated the comprehension of a CPS with a WALK signal. Following the comprehension study, another study was conducted to measure the judgment abilities of pedestrians. This study asked additional subjects to cross a simulated crosswalk at their normal walking speed so that they finished their crossing when the CPS reached zero. The results are similar to the results of Singer and Lerner, with the CPS with the WALK signal showing even greater comprehension. Results also indicated pedestrians are able to reliably judge the amount of time needed to cross multiple crosswalk lengths, or will adjust their walking speed accordingly. Future research should investigate the removal of the FDW from the CPS’s effect on low vision pedestrians as well as replicate the field study conducted by Singer and Lerner with longer crosswalks. |
|
|
|
|
Training the Next Generation of Behavior Analysts: Striving for Excellence in Graduate Instruction and Pre-Professional Training |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
2:00 PM–3:50 PM |
205 (CC) |
Area: TBA/PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jonathan J. Tarbox (Autism Research Group, Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)) |
Discussant: Darlene E. Crone-Todd (Salem State University) |
CE Instructor: Jonathan J. Tarbox, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The continued health and vitality of the science and practice of behavior analysis depends on providing top-quality graduate and practical training to current and future generations of new behavior analysts. This symposium brings together four papers that describe programs for such training, as well as discussing and critiquing strengths and limitations of how behavior analysis is traditionally taught. The symposium begins with a paper on arrogance by Jonathan Tarbox. The second paper, by Grace Cascone, applies Skinners analysis of self-control to designing learner behavior that enhances the quality of graduate education in behavior analysis. The third paper, by Taylor Hill, describes a system for designing behavioral classrooms as teams to enhance graduate education. The final paper, by Cheryl Young-Pelton, describes a program for training pre-professional skills and includes preliminary program evaluation data. The symposium will conclude with a discussion by Dr. Darlene Crone-Todd. |
Keyword(s): graduate instruction, interdisciplinary collaboration, pre-professional skills |
|
Behavioral? Great! Arrogant? Not so Great |
JONATHAN J. TARBOX (Autism Research Group, Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD)) |
Abstract: Behavior analysis is a highly specialized discipline, with unique cultural practices, including rites of passage, values statements, and almost-religiously-held beliefs and rules. The way that we behavior analysts talk about ourselves and our field, and the relative value of our field in comparison to others, is one such cultural practice. In many respects, behavior analysis is superior to other disciplines. In particular, the conceptual foundation of behavior analysis is more scientifically rigorous than many other disciplines. In addition, the treatment effects obtained by applied behavior analytic treatments are more robust and more empirically supported than those of many other disciplines. Being aware of and standing up for the many strengths and virtues of the field of behavior analysis is important. However, as a group, we tend to foster a sense of arrogance or superiority that has many potential negative side effects. This presentation will describe what we believe is a systemic problem in the behavior analytic culture and will provide practical suggestions for how we might make behavior analysts better at respecting and interacting with others. Actively valuing others and being respectful of others is not merely an ethical imperative. We will argue that behavior analysts “playing nicely” with others (or failing to) has very serious practical consequences for the health and vitality of the discipline of behavior analysis, particularly with respect to the field’s ability to affect change on a broader, more mainstream level. Practical suggestions will be made for how to train current and future generations of behavior analysts to be more effective in their interactions with those outside of the discipline, while simultaneously maintaining hardcore behavioral philosophical, scientific, and practical repertoires. |
|
Making Students Make You Better: Self-Control in the Learning Environment |
GRACE CASCONE (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jamine Dettmering (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Megan Durocher (Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Danika Stone (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology) |
Abstract: Teachers are accountable for creating an environment in which students meet learning objectives. They structure content, organize its delivery, create contingencies to manage student behavior, and design assessments to evaluate effectiveness. In a sense, teachers are the environment in which learning occurs. However, when class is in session, the students are the environment that support effective or ineffective teaching behavior. This paper will examine Skinner’s (1953) notion of self-control as a response (the controlling response) that alters the environment in such a way as to alter the probability of another response (the controlled response). This analysis will be applied to the behaviors of teaching, and the authors will review several fun and educational exercises that motivate students to behave in ways that evoke engaging behavior from the teacher. Attendees will have the opportunity to participate in one of these exercises and then have the rest of ABAI to use what they learned to make the conference better for everyone. |
|
Everybody Gets an "A": Using Teams and Teamwork in the Classroom |
TAYLOR HILL (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Nathaniel Lachica (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Allison Bihler (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Ashley Anderson (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology) |
Abstract: In a classroom environment, learning is rarely an individual phenomenon. At one level, there is a student/teacher interaction in which the teacher manages the contingencies that influence the students behavior. Beyond that, there are student/student interactions that have an additional influence on learning. Students talk to each other during breaks, form study groups, become friends, and the conversations they have with each other influence their development as behavior analysts. Creating structures that encourage and facilitate these student to student interactions can bring a new level of intentionality to the learning environment. This paper will review a method for promoting intentional, supportive interactions among students that is being used across three sections of a Basic Concepts and Principles in Behavior Analysis Class. The method involves creating the class as a team playing a common game. The authors will outline the use of assessments as scoreboards, methods to promote leadership and cooperation within the student body, and coaching practices to empower struggling students. |
|
Pre-Professional Behavior Analyst Competencies Demonstrated by Graduate Students Enrolled in a University-Supervised Intensive Practicum |
CHERYL A. YOUNG-PELTON (Montana State University in Billings) |
Abstract: Graduate students have the opportunity to enroll in a three-semester university intensive practicum course to complete the necessary hours to meet their BACB supervision requirement. In 2013, a comprehensive curriculum of skill competencies for this course was developed and implemented. This curriculum was developed based on feedback from student evaluations and the need to observe and document professional behavior analytic behaviors. The third semester competencies emphasize pre-professional skills like “getting along with therapists from other professions,” and “working with difficult people.” This paper will present outcome measures generated from triangulated sources (university supervisor, graduate intern, and site supervisor). These measures include: student evaluation of course assignments, site supervisor’s rating of student’s professional dispositions, and university supervisor ratings of pre-professional competencies from the curriculum. Data will be analyzed semester-by-semester. A comparison of data will be conducted before and after implementation of the professional skill competencies. Discussion of these outcome measures will be highlighted. |
|
|
|
|
PDS EVENT: A Select Guide to Parent Training |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC) |
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Joseph Hacker (McNeese State University) |
ROBERT K. ROSS (Beacon ABA Services) |
MARY JANE WEISS (Endicott College) |
PATRICK E. MCGREEVY (Patrick McGreevy, Ph.D., P.A. and Associates) |
Abstract: Providing services for individuals with behavioral deficits can be complex, with many problem behaviors having been reinforced intermittently throughout their entire lives. Time has shown that these services have proven to be quite effective at dealing with those problem behaviors, increasing in their effectiveness the more time these individuals spend receiving them. Parent training is an integral, and often disregarded, part of the process. Most of the time these individuals receiving services will be around their families more than those giving the services; therefore, making sure everyone is on the same page is vital to the treatment of these behavioral deficits. When the parents of these individuals have been properly trained, they can bring many of the treatments their loved ones are receiving into their home life and the increased support and exposure to the treatment reinforces it effectiveness. This panel will discuss the benefits of parent training in addition to showing why it is a necessity to truly effective behavioral therapy: as well as, discuss ways in which parent training can be effectively conducted. |
Keyword(s): ABA, autism, behavioral deficits, parent training |
|
|
|
|
Antecedent Interventions to Increase Toleration to Aversive Situations |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
007B (CC) |
Area: EAB/CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jill Marie Harper (Melmark New Englnad) |
CE Instructor: Jill Marie Harper, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behavioral interventions might consist of altering antecedent events, consequences, or both antecedents and consequences. This symposium consists of three data-based presentations that will focus on the manipulation of antecedent events to increase toleration to aversive situations. The first study evaluates the effects of preference and choice of products (tooth paste and tooth brush) on the completion of an oral-hygiene routine for individuals with developmental disabilities. The second study recruits undergraduate participants to examine tolerance of a recorded infant cry when distracting activities are either restricted or available. The final study analyzes pausing during transitions between tasks associated with relatively rich and lean schedules of reinforcement for three individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder, as well as the participants preference for the availability of schedule-correlated stimuli during such transitions. These three studies attempt to reduce the aversive characteristics and, therefore increase toleration to three distinct aversive situations through the use of antecedent interventions. |
Keyword(s): Activity Transition, Antecedent Intervention, Choice Preference, Infant Care |
|
Effects of Preference and Choice on Completion of an Oral Hygiene Task |
KIMBERLY L. DUHANYAN (Melmark New England), Jill Marie Harper (Melmark New Englnad), Nicole Heal (Melmark New England) |
Abstract: The American Academy of Pediatrics and the National Institute of Health have identified a trend of poor oral hygiene in individuals with developmental disabilities and Down syndrome (Fenton, Hood, Holder, May, & Mouradian, 2003). Poor oral hygiene may result from difficulty acquiring necessary skills or interfering behavior during such tasks. Previous research has shown that choice making opportunities among task materials or reinforcers both increase performance and decrease challenging behavior. This study examined the effects of preference and choice of products on completion of, and levels of challenging behavior during an oral hygiene routine. Preference assessments were conducted to determine low- and high-preferred toothbrushes and toothpastes. Completion of the routine and levels of challenging behavior were then examined under low-preference no choice, high-preference choice, and high-preference no choice conditions within a mutlielement design. Initial data indicate similar rates of completion across the high-preference choice and high-preference no choice conditions, as compared to the low-preference no choice condition for two participants and similar levels of performance across the low-preference no choice, high-preference choice and high-preference no choice conditions for the second participant. Challenging behaviors were not observed during any conditions for either participant. Interobserver agreement was collected during 66.7% of sessions, and mean agreement was 97.9%. |
|
Do Distracting Activities Increase Tolerance of an Infant Cry? |
KATHRYN ROSE GLODOWSKI (Western New England University), Rachel H. Thompson (Western New England University), Erica Clayton (Western New England University), Cassandra Hilpert (Western New England University) |
Abstract: Golton and St. James-Robert (1991) demonstrated young infants cry about 2 hours each day, and Michelsson et al. (1990) found that one episode of crying could last at least 30 min despite attempts to provide care. Experts recommend that caregivers engage in a distracting activity when an infant engages in prolonged periods of crying (Barr et al., 2009; Deyo et al., 2008), but no one has previously evaluated whether distracting activities are helpful for caregivers. We examined tolerance of a recorded cry when distracting activities were differentially available. We recruited 29 undergraduates to participate; 24 tolerated the recorded cry for more than 5 min without distracting activities. For the remaining participants, distracting activities increased tolerance of the recorded cry for 2 participants but had no effect for 3 participants. An independent observer collected data during at least 30% of sessions for each participant, and reliability ranged from 86% to 100%. |
|
Pausing and Preference in Transitions between Relatively Rich and Lean Reinforcement Contexts |
BERGLIND SVEINBJORNSDOTTIR (New England Center for Children), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Transitions between activities commonly are reported to be challenging for individuals with developmental or intellectual disabilities. Three young men with Autism Spectrum Disorders who were students at a residential school for children with autism served as participants in two translational studies of behavior in activity transitions. In Study 1 we measured pausing in transitions between tasks associated with relatively rich and lean schedules of reinforcement. Pausing was greatest in transitions from richer to leaner contexts, as compared with that in transitions from rich to rich, lean to lean, and lean to rich contexts. In Study 2 participants chose whether schedule-correlated stimuli would be presented. The upcoming lean schedule component, however, was inescapable. To date, one participant has demonstrated preference for a condition with no schedule-correlated stimuli in the transition from the richer to the leaner context. In this case, it appears that stimuli correlated with an upcoming lean schedule component were aversive. These studies are two in a line of research designed to provide recommendations for practitioners in selecting strategies for presenting activity transitions to their clients with developmental or intellectual disabilities. |
|
|
|
|
PDS EVENT: Life After Graduation: Academic and Clinical Careers |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
211 (CC) |
Area: EDC/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Mirela Cengher, M.A. |
Chair: Mirela Cengher (City University of New York, The Graduate Center), Mariam Chohan (CUNY Graduate Center) |
TERRY S. FALCOMATA (The University of Texas at Austin) |
HENRY S. ROANE (State University of New York Upstate Medical Unive) |
JOHN CLAUDE WARD-HORNER (Beacon ABA Services) |
LAUREN KRYZAK (Queens College, City University of New York) |
Abstract: After graduation, doctoral-level behavior analysts typically emerge in either an academic or a clinical career. This panel will focus on identifying pros and cons, as well as discussing competencies and experiences that can make one a successful candidate for each. The discussion will be grounded in the experiences accrued by our panelists, who are prominent behavior analysts with expertise in both academic and clinical settings. |
|
|
|
|
Recent Research on Performance Feedback in OBM: From Telemedicine to Laboratory Studies |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
201 (CC) |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Carl Merle Johnson (Central Michigan University) |
Abstract: Performance feedback in organizational behavior management research and practice is
pervasive; however, a clear understanding of necessary and sufficient conditions under which
feedback improves performance is still absent. The first study explored performance feedback
in a telemedicine setting using an ABACAC multi-component reversal design. Results indicated
a combined intervention of corrective feedback with contingent movie theatre gift certificates
produced greatest change in accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity in five behavior
line technicians. The second study was a 2 X 2 group design that explored contingent vs.
independent and supportive vs. critical performance feedback in a laboratory setting. Results
suggested that contingent evaluative feedback improved performance relative to independent
feedback (supportive or critical). The third study was a group design that explored exaggerated
(tripled), underreported (one-third), accurate performance feedback, compared to no feedback
in a laboratory setting. Results suggested that accurate and exaggerated (tripled) performance
feedback may lead to better performance than underreported (one-third) or no feedback. Clearly
performance feedback is not a simple stimulus; it is multidimensional and extremely complex.
Organizational behavior management has much more to learn about its most commonly used
intervention component. |
Keyword(s): Feedback, Feedback Accuracy, Telemedicine |
|
Differentiated and Combined Effects of Corrective Feedback via Telemedicine and a Group Contingency on Treatment Integrity and Behavior Note Accuracy |
GREGORY R. MANCIL (Louisiana Tech University) |
Abstract: An ABACAC multi-component reversal design was used to examine the effects of a group reinforcement contingency and corrective feedback intervention via telemedicine on the behavioral accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity. Five behavior line technicians participated in this study with a total of 20 clients. The workers chose gift certificates for a movie theater as the reward. Results demonstrate a small change from baseline to corrective feedback delivered via telemedicine. However, results indicate a greater change from baseline to combined intervention (group contingency plus corrective feedback) to 100%. Upon removal of the intervention, the pinpoint objectives (i.e., TI and daily note accuracy) decreased below intervention levels. In addition, pinpoint objectives increased when the intervention was reintroduced. |
|
The Role of Accuracy and Type of Evaluation in Feedback Delivery |
RACHAEL TILKA (Western Michigan University), Jessica Rocheleau (Western Michigan University), Douglas A. Johnson (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Performance feedback remains a commonly implemented and successful intervention within organizational behavior management, but a comprehensive understanding of the components that influence the effectiveness of feedback tends to be lacking. The present study sought to contribute by analyzing the variables of accuracy (contingent or independent of performance) and evaluation type (supportive or critical judgments) on performance using a simulated work environment. Seventy-five undergraduate students were randomly assigned to one of four experimental conditions: (a) contingent and supportive feedback, (b) contingent and critical feedback, (c) independent and supportive feedback, or (d) independent and critical feedback. Outcomes suggested that contingent feedback improved performance relative to independent feedback, however, no differences were found between supportive and critical types of feedback. The need for additional research into the functional and formal elements of effective feedback will be discussed. |
|
A comparison of accurate and inaccurate performance feedback on college students doing data entry tasks |
MICHAEL PALMER (Central Michigan University), Carl Merle Johnson (Central Michigan University) |
Abstract: Performance feedback is ubiquitous in Organizational Behavior Management. It has been assumed that performance feedback must be accurate, but this assumption has not been empirically validated. This experiment tested objective feedback from previous performance, provided immediately before the next session, to determine if feedback must be accurate to improve future performance. A repeated measures between-groups design was conducted with college students engaging in a simulated bank-check-processor task. Six 45-minute sessions were carried out with the first session serving as a baseline before different types of feedback were presented to the experimental groups. The number of correctly completed checks and time off-task served as the primary dependent variables. The type of performance feedback served as the independent variable: accurate, 1/3 actual performance, triple actual performance, and no feedback. All earned pay for participating. Results indicated accurate and tripled feedback improved performance over the control and one-third feedback groups. Performance feedback also reduced time off-task across all feedback conditions compared to the control group. Survey responses indicated many participants could not detect the false feedback. Results suggest not underreporting performance and that data need multi-faceted analysis to fully understand performance feedback research. |
|
|
|
|
Efforts Toward More Practically Sensitive Functional Analyses and Efficient Treatments for Problem Behavior. |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
213AB (CC) |
Area: PRA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Stephanie A. Hood (Briar Cliff University ) |
CE Instructor: Stephanie A. Hood, M.S. |
Abstract: This symposium covers refinements in the assessment and treatment of problem behavior. Hood et al. evaluated methodological modifications to functional analyses to be able to identify attention functions when it was difficult for therapists to eliminate stimulus changes following problem behavior (e.g., flinching or blocking.). The results demonstrated differential responding with a concurrent-operant arrangement. In a second presentation, the effect of therapists wearing protective equipment on the outcomes of functional analyses of aggression was assessed (Oropeza et al.). The results demonstrated that the use of protective equipment did not alter conclusions from the functional analysis. Fernand et al. conducted a functional analysis of problem behavior maintained by interrupting ritualistic behavior. Following functional communication training, they evaluated the extent to which systematic delay-fading steps were necessary. The results demonstrated that FCT plus delay fading was effective at reducing problem behavior, and, for some participants, progression across delay-fading steps may not be necessary. |
Keyword(s): Functional Analysis, Problem behavior |
|
Concurrent-Operant Functional Analysis of Aggressive Behavior Maintained by Attention |
STEPHANIE A. HOOD (Briar Cliff University), Nicole M. Rodriguez (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Kevin C. Luczynski (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Todd M. Owen (University of Nebraska Medical Center) |
Abstract: Certain forms of aggression may be difficult to completely ignore resulting in physical reactions from the therapist. Controlling when putative reinforcers are and are not available is integral to identifying the function of behavior. In the current study, we evaluated a concurrent-operants arrangement for assessing whether attention maintains problem behavior when it was difficult for therapists to eliminate stimulus changes following problem behavior. For one participant, an initial pairwise functional analysis (FA) resulted in undifferentiated responding, with relatively more responding in the control condition, and, for a second participant, an initial trial-based FA resulted in relatively more responding during the control component. For one participant, we added protective equipment in an attempt to increase procedural integrity with reactions following problem behavior but responding decreased to zero. Differential levels of responding were observed for both participants in a second FA in which two therapists were concurrently available but associated with the presence (vocal attention plus animated physical reactions) versus near absence (no vocal attention and minimal physical reactions) of attention. A function-based treatment resulted in low levels of responding. The concurrent-operant arrangement provides a method for assessing the function of behavior when eliminating stimulus changes in the control condition proves difficult. |
|
Effects of Protective Equipment in Functional Analysis of Aggression |
MANUELLA OROPEZA (University of Houston Clear Lake), Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Melissa Nissen (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Lauren Phillips (University of Houston – Clear Lake), Amy Terrell (University of Houston – Clear Lake) |
Abstract: The effects of protective equipment (PE) on functional analysis (FA) outcomes for aggression were evaluated. Each condition of the FA was assessed with PE and without PE in a multielement design. Results showed that there was no difference in the identified function of participants’ aggression during the FA in which the therapist wore PE compared to the FA in which the therapist did not. These results suggest that therapists should be able to protect themselves with PE during FAs of aggression and reduce risks posed by the problem behavior without negatively influencing the results of the assessment. |
|
An Evaluation of Delays to Reinforcement in the Treatment of Problem Behavior Maintained by Access to Routines |
JONATHAN K FERNAND (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Behavioral characteristics of individuals diagnosed with autism can include difficulty adjusting to novel situations or changes in routines, insistence on sameness, and repetitive movements (i.e., stereotypy). Research has shown that individuals often emit problem behavior when access to engaging in repetitive behavior is interrupted. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate procedures to assess and treat problem behavior when interrupting the ritualistic behavior displayed by three children with autism. All participants engaged in repetitive item manipulation as well as aggression when routines were interrupted. Following a functional analysis, we replicated and extended prior functional communication training research that employed delays to reinforcement (Rispoli et al., 2014) by assessing if all steps in a delay-fading procedure were necessary in the treatment of these particular ritualistic behaviors. Results indicated that functional communication training drastically reduced problem behavior, and delay fading may not always be necessary for every case. Further, the necessity of a signaled versus unsignaled extinction contingency for problem behavior was idiosyncratic for the current participants. |
|
|
|
|
Teaching Parents and Interventionists to Increase Communication and Decrease Challenging Behavior in Children with Autism |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
206AB (CC) |
Area: TBA/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A) |
Discussant: Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon) |
CE Instructor: Mandy J. Rispoli, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Innovations in preparing families and educators to implement high quality behavioral interventions are critical for enhancing the capacity of natural change agents to serve children with autism spectrum disorder. Research shows that children with autism spectrum disorder often require intensive, individualized intervention to treat core features of the disorder, such as social-communication skills and repetitive, restrictive interests or behaviors. Yet few families or service providers are skilled in implementing these research-based interventions. This session will present two papers which address this issue. The first paper presents results of a Pyramidal Training model delivered using telepractice (video conferencing, email, and file sharing) in teaching service providers to implement incidental teaching with young children with ASD. The second paper presents a model for teaching parents to implement a differential reinforcement procedure with their child with ASD. Data on maintenance and generalization of parent implementation from the training location to the home are reported. Following the paper presentations, Dr. Wendy Machalicek will offer a discussion regarding the potential impact of coaching delivered via telepractice on service providers intervention skills. She will also reflect on factors that may enhance the generalization and maintenance of parent implemented behavioral interventions. |
Keyword(s): DRO, incidental teaching, parent, telepractice |
|
Implementation of Pyramidal Training via Telepractice to Prepare Interventionists in Incidental Teaching |
LESLIE NEELY (Texas A&M University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A&M University) |
Abstract: A recent focus on the use of telepractice to disseminate behavioral interventions has demonstrated the utility of technology in preparing parents and educators as interventionists for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). However, to date, there has not been an evaluation of pyramidal training delivered via telepractice. The purposes of this study are: (a) to examine the use of pyramidal training to prepare interventionists to implement incidental teaching (b) to investigate the effectiveness of implementing pyramidal training via telepractice and (c) to assess the generalization of interventionists skills to untrained settings. Training procedures include an online module, self-evaluation, and feedback on participants self-evaluation delivered via videoconferencing. A multiple-probe across participants design was employed to evaluate the effects of the training package on therapists implementation fidelity, as measured by the percentage of procedural steps completed and the number of communication opportunities offered. The effect of the therapists use of incidental teaching on their students subsequent manding behaviors was also obtained. After training, the effectiveness of the training procedures will be evaluated based on the ease of acquisition of the procedures (as measured by trials to criterion) and the social validity of the training procedures. Implications for practice as well as future research will be discussed. |
|
Assessing Maintenance and Generalization of Parent Treatment Fidelity Following Parent Training |
STEPHANIE GEROW (Texas A&M University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A&M University), Leslie Neely (Texas A&M University) |
Abstract: There is a growing body of literature on the importance of training parents in behavioral interventions. The presentation will present a case study assessing the generalization and maintenance of parent treatment fidelity following parent training. One parent-child dyad participated in the study. A 4-year-old female with autism and her mother participated. The case study consisted of an AB design, with the baseline (A) phase consisting of typical parent-child interactions. Next, the parent was trained on procedures to increase requesting (mands). The training consisted of written instructions, verbal instructions, and answering questions. During the performance feedback (B) phase, the parent received immediate performance feedback in a clinic setting. Generalization to the home setting was assessed during the A and B phases. No parent training was conducted in the home setting. Results indicated that parent treatment fidelity and child requests increased following parent training, generalized to the home setting, and maintained after three weeks. These data suggest that parents may be able to generalize the implementation of an intervention from the training setting to the home setting. However, these results need to be replicated using a multiple baseline design with other participants. Data collection is ongoing and more participants are being recruited. |
|
|
|
|
A Neuroplasticity Centered Approach to the Intersection of Neuroscience and Behavior Analysis |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
007C (CC) |
Area: TPC/EAB; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Teresa C Kolu (Cusp Emergence) |
CE Instructor: Teresa C Kolu, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The fields of neuroscience and behavior analysis have established rich bodies of independent knowledge. Despite the separation of their respective levels of analysis, the two fields are intrinsically connected: environment-behavior relations involve an organism endowed with a nervous system, and that nervous system is structurally determined in part by environment-behavior relations. Of the many approaches to neuroscience, the study of brain adaptation and change (neural plasticity) provides the most likely point of intersection with behavior analysis. This subfield seeks to account for both common structural specializations in the brain and the highly variable and malleable nature of many of those specializations by elucidating the range of conditions under which they develop rather than simply specifying their typical form. Highly compatible with the selectionist approach advocated by Skinner and others, a focus on plasticity opens the door to parsimonious explanations of a range of phenomena. In this symposium, we will highlight the distinction between neuroplasticity-centered and other approaches to studying structural specialization in the brain. We will then explore a few brain regions which become engaged in plastic processes in meaningful ways during behaviorally relevant events |
Keyword(s): behavioral neuroscience, neuroscience, plasticity |
|
Essentialism and Selectionism in the Neurosciences |
DANIELE ORTU (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: Within neuroscientific research it is possible to distinguish between two approaches: the neuropsychological perspective - concerned with mapping cognitive processes to specific brain areas - and the neuroplasticity approach, focused on the mechanisms of neural change and adaptation. Experimental evidence is typically used in neuropsychology to ‘dissociate’ processes. For instance, when brain Area X is necessary for carrying out Operation A but not Operation B, and brain Area Y is required for Operation B but not Operation A, neuropsychologists use that evidence to extrapolate that there is a ‘double dissociation’ of the processes involved, i.e. different processes supported by different areas are engaged across experimental conditions. Conversely a neuroplasticity approach might investigate under which conditions Area X can carry out Operation A or B, and Area Y can carry out Operation B or A, searching for each area's adaptive boundaries. The difference between the two perspectives is not just a discrepancy in methods, but lies deep into the contrast between an essentialist and a selectionist philosophical approach. We propose that essentialistic descriptions of the neocortex may be masking its adaptive qualities, as demonstrated by the flexibility in which many neocortical operations are carried out. |
|
Neuromodulation, Brain Plasticity and Behavior Analysis |
APRIL M. BECKER (The University of Texas Southwestern Medical Cente) |
Abstract: This presentation will focus on the relationship between modulated neural plasticity and behavior analysis and will submit basic research that could lead to clinical applications of such knowledge. “Functional” neural plasticity, or specific changes in patterns of cellular activation in relation to stimuli and responses, often occurs during learning. A wide body of research reveals that both neural plasticity and behavior change are linked to the activation of deep brain structures where many cells are capable of firing in phase with one another and in response to behaviorally important events such as reinforcement. This coordinated firing delivers transmitters capable of modulating the rules for neural changes (neuromodulators) across large portions of the brain; these neuromodulators include dopamine, acetylcholine, norepinephrine and serotonin. The traditional descriptions used by neuroscientists to describe the function of these systems in terms of their associated psychological processes such as mood and attention, are unnecessary when investigating their role in learning and plasticity. The effects of the manipulation of neuromodulatory systems reveal interesting insights into that role, and present potential targets for optimizing functional and behavioral change during interventions in clinical settings. |
|
The Role of Behavioral Interpretations in the Investigation of Brain Function |
CALEB D. HUDGINS (Rutgers University) |
Abstract: Accumulating evidence suggests the hippocampus is necessary for learning Pavlovian trace fear conditioning, but not delay fear conditioning. To further complicate this issue, general deficits in learning trace versus delay conditioning have been debated since the procedures were investigated by Pavlov. The major procedural difference is the insertion of a temporal gap between the offset of the CS and onset of the US in trace conditioning. The learning differences between these two tasks has historically been attributed to this temporal gap, with common interpretations invoking hypothetical mechanisms ranging from the “neural trace,” to storage and retrieval of neural representations and memories. Such interpretations suggest the animal is ultimately learning the same CS-US contingency in both tasks, just to a lesser extent in trace conditioning; however, a more rigorous behavior analysis suggests otherwise. Our findings suggest that organisms learn two critically different stimulus-stimulus contingencies within the two tasks, and that it is not the temporal gap per se but the differences between these contingency arrangements that may differentially engage the hippocampus. These data have implications for how we interpret the role of the hippocampus in trace conditioning, suggesting a role for variables contributing to contextual conditioning. |
|
|
|
|
PDS EVENT: The Intersection of Verbal Behavior and Derived Relational Responding |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–3:50 PM |
217A (CC) |
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Colleen Yorlets (RCS Behavioral & Educational Consulting) |
JUDAH B. AXE (Simmons College) |
GRETCHEN A. DITTRICH (Simmons College) |
KENNETH F. REEVE (Caldwell College) |
Abstract: Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior remains largely a theoretical endeavor. However, recent research in the areas of stimulus equivalence, relational frame theory, the naming hypothesis and joint control suggest that derived relational responding (i.e., the emergence of complex and untrained stimulus-stimulus relations) may be a viable explanation for the acquisition and maintenance of verbal behaviors. This panel will discuss Skinner's verbal behavior in the context of this research. Of particular import will be the degree to which each of these lines of research can account for the emergence of untrained and novel verbal behaviors. Additionally, the panel will discuss how stimuli that were documented to be under a specific form of stimulus control in one context (e.g., echoic or tact control) can come under the control of other forms of stimulus control (e.g., mand or intraverbal control) in another in the absence of direct training. Finally, the panel will discuss the role of the listener in the emergence of derived relational verbal behaviors, an area that may be viewed as under-investigated by verbal behavior researchers. |
Keyword(s): derived relations, RFT, stimulus equivalence, verbal behavior |
|
|
|
|
Ethics in ABA: Longstanding and Contemporary Concerns |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–4:50 PM |
204B (CC) |
Area: CSE |
Keyword(s): Ethics |
Chair: Robert D. Holdsambeck (Calaba) |
|
Ethics and Autism: Seven Deadly Sins and Fifty Shades of Grey |
Domain: Service Delivery |
ROBERT D. HOLDSAMBECK (Calaba) |
|
Abstract: Providing services to people on the Autism Spectrum raises some unique ethical challenges for Psychologists and for Behavior Analysts. Drawing from over 35 years of clinical experience, Dr. Holdsambeck will discuss those challenges in terms of those situations that are very clear (the deadly sins) and those that are more nuanced (fifty shades of grey). Distinctions and commonalities will be discussed in terms of Legal, Moral and Ethical codes of conduct including the guidelines for responsible conduct for behavior analysts and the APA Ethical guidelines. The seminar will conclude with some suggestions for enhancing our compliance to the ethical guidelines while meeting the unique challenges of working with children and adults with Autism. |
|
Multicultural Considerations in Applied Behavior Analysis Services |
Domain: Service Delivery |
TERRENCE BRYANT (Kaplan University) |
|
Abstract: A major challenge faced by many mental health practitioners lie in the provision of effective services to individuals from groups that are ethnically and culturally different from themselves. From an ethical standpoint, it is important for the practitioner to recognize these differences and as well as the potential for bias based on these differences. There has been a proliferation of recent research on the provision of services to culturally diverse population. The purpose of this paper is to review the research on barriers that exist for mental health professionals, particularly behavior analysts, in the delivery of effective services to culturally diverse populations. A review of traditional cultural practices, family values, and worldview of various ethnic minority groups is highlighted to facilitate understanding of cultural identities. A review of the literature on behavior analysis services with minority populations is conducted and implications for ABA practitioners are presented as well as recommendations for increasing cultural competence. In addition, a review of ethical considerations in the practice of ABA with culturally-diverse individuals and families is considered. |
|
CANCELLED: The Application of the Ethical Guidelines for Behavior Analysts to Dog Training |
Domain: Theory |
ADRIA KARLSSON (Dog Willing) |
|
Abstract: Graduate students in applied behavior analysis programs often choose to use their dogs as subjects for projects. This is a concern, due to the fact that many do not realize that the ethical guidelines should apply as stringently to animal subjects as to human subjects. Furthermore, students often lack experience in how to apply behavioral change tactics and the principles of behavior analysis to dogs. A survey of graduate students revealed a tendency towards the use of punishment and the lack of implementations of differential reinforcement of alternative behaviors. There are few research-based resources available through traditional research routes to help them learn how to create behavioral change programs for their dogs. It is vital that programs help students to generalize what they are learning about behavior to use with animal clients as well. |
|
Keyword(s): Ethics |
|
|
|
|
Delay Discounting of Different Commodities: Opportunity Costs, Fungibility, and Alcohol |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–4:50 PM |
006D (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas) |
Discussant: David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Discounting the process by which an outcome loses its value based on a number of contextual factors such as the delay to or likelihood of receiving the outcome. Further, different outcomes are discounted to different extents, especially when humans are the population under study. Much is unknown, though, regarding the extent of delay discounting of commodities other than money and the boundary conditions (e.g., fungibility) that result in different rates of discounting. This symposium will attempt to address some of these questions. The first talk examines the degree of discounting when opportunity costs are either present or absent. That is, during imposed delays to reinforcement, participants could either obtain reinforcement by doing other things or were required to complete minimal tasks. The next two talks investigate discount rates of various commodities and their fungibility, or the degree to which an outcome can be exchanged for alternatives. In these talks, both money and monetary alternatives (e.g., gift cards) and money and non-monetary alternatives are discounted to different extents, shedding light on the utility of various reinforcers. The last talk examines discount rates of alcohol and its relation to alcohol demand among college aged students using an individualized discounting assessment. |
Keyword(s): Alcohol, Delay Discounting, Fungibility, Opportunity Costs |
|
Opportunity Costs of Reward Delays and the Discounting of Hypothetical Money and Cigarettes |
PATRICK S. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Evan Herrmann (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Matthew W. Johnson (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: Humans are reported to discount delayed rewards at lower rates than nonhumans. However, nonhumans are studied in tasks that restrict reinforcement during delays, whereas humans are typically studied in tasks that do not restrict reinforcement during delays. In nonhuman tasks, the opportunity cost of restricted reinforcement during delays may increase delay discounting rates. The present within-subjects study used online crowdsourcing (Amazon Mechanical Turk) to assess the discounting of hypothetical delayed money (and cigarettes in smokers) under four hypothetical framing conditions differing in the availability of reinforcement during delays. At one extreme, participants were free to leave their computer without returning, and engage in any behavior during reward delays (modeling typical human tasks). At the opposite extreme, participants were required to stay at their computer and engage in little other behavior during reward delays (modeling typical nonhuman tasks). Discounting rates increased as an orderly function of opportunity cost. Results also indicated predominantly hyperbolic discounting, the “magnitude effect,” steeper discounting of cigarettes than money, and positive correlations between discounting rates of these commodities. This is the first study to test the effects of opportunity costs on discounting, and suggests that procedural differences may partially account for observed species differences in discounting. |
|
A Test of the Economic Concept of Fungibility: Temporal Discounting of Money and Gift Certificates |
TODD L. MCKERCHAR (Jacksonville State University), James E. Mazur (Southern Connecticut State University), Timothy Marshall (Jacksonville State University), Freeman Cumming (Jacksonville State University), Cassidy McDougale (Jacksonville State University) |
Abstract: The economic concept of fungibility predicts the utility of an outcome should be positively correlated with the amount of exchange opportunities it allows. From this view, money is highly fungible and thus should have greater value than monetarily equivalent rewards with fewer exchange options (e.g., $100 gift certificate). We conducted a test of the fungibility hypothesis with 51 college students by comparing their temporal discounting of small and large amounts ($200 and $25,000) of money, “supercenter” gift certificates (e.g., Target), and grocery store gift certificates (e.g., Publix). The discounting of all outcomes was very well described by a hyperboloid (R2 > .95). Area-under-the-curve analyses revealed that the larger outcomes were discounted significantly less than smaller outcomes. Furthermore, there was a significant effect of outcome type: money was discounted less than supercenter and grocery store certificates. These findings provide some support for fungibility as an explanation for the commonly observed differences in discount rates across outcomes. However, future work should compare the discounting of outcomes that vary more in their fungibility (as many of our participants indicated that they did their grocery shopping at a supercenter). |
|
Delay Discounting for Money and Personalized Non-Money Rewards |
Allison Stuppy (Center for Addictions, Personality, and Emotion Re), Kayla Tormohlena (Center for Addictions, Personality, and Emotion Re), RICHARD YI (University of Maryland) |
Abstract: Abundant evidence suggests primary rewards (e.g., food and drugs) are discounted more than monetary rewards. This finding is commonly attributed to money's high degree of fungibility. The purpose of the present study was to contrast, within-individual, delay discounting (DD) of monetary rewards and non-monetary non-fungible rewards. One hundred forty-six (146) undergraduate students completed all study assessments for course credit. Following a conventional DD for hypothetical money task in session 1, participants were asked about their intentions for spending all immediate and delayed money rewards. Participants returned one week later to complete a personalized DD for a non-fungible non-money task based on their stated intentions from session 1. A conventional hypothesis test revealed no significant difference between DD of money and non-money rewards. A more rigorous test of statistical equivalence indicated that while DD of money and non-money were not equivalent, this was due to lower rates of DD for non-money. Given that the DD for the non-money task assessed DD for less-fungible commodities (than money), the present results suggest that higher rates of DD for primary rewards observed in previous research are not due to the degree of fungibility. Potential interpretations will be discussed. |
|
On the Relation Between a Novel Measure of Beer Discounting, Demand for Alcohol, and Alcohol-Related Problems in College Students |
SHEA M. LEMLEY (The University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas), Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas), Alexandria Darden (University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Consumption of alcohol by college students is common and has the potential to result in a variety of problematic consequences. However, traditional behavior economic approaches to study alcohol use present some difficulties, including the cumbersome administration and scoring of many discounting tasks and the time consuming aspects of these measures. The present study examined a novel beer discounting questionnaire, and its relation to money discounting, an alcohol purchase task, and the Young Adult Alcohol Consequences Questionnaire (YAACQ), a scale assessing self-reported occurrences of alcohol-related problems in college students. Participants from a lower level undergraduate course at a large Midwestern university completed these surveys during an in class session. A total of 105 participants were included in data analysis. Orderly relations were observed between beer and money discounting, demand for alcohol, and scores on the YAACQ and several of its subscales. |
|
|
|
|
Factors Affecting Response Relapse and Resurgence |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–4:50 PM |
006C (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University) |
Discussant: Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University) |
CE Instructor: Claire C. St. Peter, Ph.D. |
Abstract: When a differential reinforcement procedure is suspended or disrupted, previously extinguished behavior often returns. This phenomenon, termed "resurgence," has been demonstrated under a wide array of conditions, including in non-human laboratories and during the treatment of challenging behavior. Despite the robust array of situations in which resurgence occurs, little is understood about the factors that may exacerbate or mitigate this relapse phenomena. In this symposium, we will explore factors that influence the extent to which responding recurs (resurges) when a differential-reinforcement procedure is disrupted. Although most the studies were typically conducted in highly controlled contexts, we will discuss the implications of these studies for treatment of challenging behavior. |
Keyword(s): differential reinforcement, relapse, resurgence |
|
Teaching Multiple Response Alternatives to Mitigate Resurgence: A Human-Operant Demonstration |
Travis Carrasquillo (Southern Illinois University), JOEL ERIC RINGDAHL (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: A common approach to the assessment and treatment of problem behavior is to a) identify the reinforcer maintaining problem behavior (a process that requires contingent presentation of that reinforcer following problem behavior), and b) placing problem behavior on extinction while providing the functional reinforcer for some alternative, appropriate response. Unfortunately, this process may result in treatment relapse if reinforcer delivery for appropriate behavior is disrupted. For example, if appropriate behavior is placed on extinction, there may be resurgence of problem behavior. The current study tested the potential of teaching multiple response alternatives to mitigate resurgence of a target response. This relapse in treatment effects can have deleterious effects for the person exhibiting problem behavior or their care providers. In the current, human operant study, two experimental arrangements were alternated. In one component, a target response was reinforced, then an alternative response was reinforced while the target response was placed on extinction. In the final phase, both responses were placed on extinction. In the second component, a target response was reinforced, then four alternative responses were reinforced while the target response was placed on extinction. In the final phase, all responses were placed on extinction. Six of nine participants demonstrated lower resurgence of the target response following reinforcement of multiple response alternatives. The results of this study suggest teaching multiple response alternatives is a possible treatment strategy to mitigate response resurgence. |
|
Effects of Initial Reinforcement Schedule and Type of Response-Reinforcer Disruption on Resurgence |
DWIGHT LASTINGER (West Virginia University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University) |
Abstract: Resurgence refers to the reemergence of previously extinguished responding when an alternative response is also placed on extinction. Resurgence may occur to varying extents based on initial reinforcement schedules and the type of disruption in the response-reinforcer dependency. The present study examines the interaction between initial reinforcement schedules (fixed-ratio 1 or fixed-interval 5”) and subsequent resurgence during fixed-time or extinction phases. We used a group design to evaluate this 2x2 interaction. Initial results indicate less resurgence occurred for participants who experienced fixed-interval reinforcement schedules than fixed-ratio reinforcement schedules, regardless of disruptor type, F(1, 7) = 6.48, P < .05. Disruptor type had no significant effect on resurgence, extinction tests did not produce greater resurgence than did fixed-time tests, F(1, 7) = 3.84, P > .05. There was no significant interaction between initial reinforcement schedule and disruptor type, F(1,36) = .34, P > .05. These results suggest that the initial schedule is the main determinant of the level of resurgence, and providing response-independent reinforcement on a fixed-time schedule dies not reduce that level. |
|
Do Shifts in the Magnitude or Quality of Alternative Reinforcement Produce Resurgence? |
Rusty Nall (Utah State University), ANDREW R. CRAIG (Utah State University), Ciara Marshall (Utah State University), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University) |
Abstract: Differential-reinforcement-of-alternative-behavior based interventions often are used to decrease undesirable behavior. When these interventions are suspended, however, resurgence of the original behavior is common. Some investigators have tried to prevent resurgence by gradually thinning alternative-reinforcer rate, but this component of treatment is not always successful. In the current experiments, we examined effects of thinning alternative-reinforcer dimensions other than rate (magnitude and quality) on response suppression during alternative reinforcement. In Experiments 1 and 2, groups of rats pressed levers for four- and six-pellet reinforcers, respectively, according to variable-interval 15 s schedules. Next, lever pressing was extinguished while chain pulling produced reinforcers of the same magnitude according to the same schedule as baseline. Finally, alternative reinforcement was suspended or decreased to one pellet in each experiment. Alternative-reinforcer magnitude was halved for an additional group in Experiment 2. Shifts to zero and one pellet produced comparable resurgence in both experiments. However, halving alternative-reinforcer magnitude in Experiment 2 produced less resurgence than the other manipulations. We investigated effects of alternative-reinforcer quality (i.e., delivery of 32%-sucrose vs. 4%-sucrose solutions) in Experiment 3. Shifts in alternative-reinforcer quality did not produce resurgence. Practical and theoretical implications of these findings will be discussed. |
|
Relations between Reinforcer Potency and the Resurgence of Problem Behavior |
PATRICK ROMANI (Munroe Meyer Institute), David P. Wacker (The University of Iowa), Nicole H. Lustig (The University of Iowa), Deva Carrion (University of Iowa) |
Abstract: We present data from one participant enrolled in the current investigation. Inter-observer agreement was assessed for 30% of sessions and averaged 90%. Phases 1, 2, and 3 were conducted within a multiple schedules design. During Phase 1, a baseline condition was conducted in the demand context. Problem behavior was reinforced with escape from demands according to a fixed ratio (FR) 1 schedule and compliance was placed on extinction. During Phase 2, compliance was reinforced with either toys with attention or toys alone according to an FR-1 schedule and problem behavior was placed on extinction. Once an 80% reduction in problem behavior occurred, a reinforcer potency analysis was conducted according to a progressive ratio arrangement and reversal design. The purpose of the reinforcer potency analysis was to evaluate the reinforcer (toys with attention or toys alone) that maintained the highest levels of compliance (i.e., most potent reinforcer). Phase 2 was re-implemented following the reinforcer potency analysis. Compliance and problem behavior were placed on extinction in Phase 3 to evaluate resurgence of problem behavior. Results will be discussed in terms of their clinical and translational implications. |
|
|
|
|
Equivalence Classes: Determinants, Neural Correlates, Meaning, and Language |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–4:50 PM |
007A (CC) |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College ) |
Abstract: The present symposium focuses on some important findings with the area of derived relations. The first paper by Arntzen and Nartey investigated the effect of the use of familiar pictures on the expansion of equivalence classes. After training to form two different sets of three 3-member classes with the linear series training structure, twenty children were then trained to connect the two middle nodes in the two different sets of classes. Participants were then tested for the formation of the expansion of these classes into three 6- member equivalence classes. Regardless of condition, when all the stimuli were familiar pictures, seven participants formed the six-member classes while only three participants formed classes using only abstract stimuli (see Figure 1). The second paper by Fields and Arntzen summarize the results of seven published experiments that have documented the effects of each of these variables. The class enhancement effects of meaningful stimuli were mimicked by an initially meaningless stimulus when laboratory training was used to establish one of the afore-mentioned stimulus control functions with that stimulus. Its subsequent inclusion in a set of other meaningless stimuli enhanced the formation of equivalence classes by that set. The third paper by Soares Filho, Clavijo-Alvarez, da Silva Barros, and Tomanari present on experiment that investigated the effects of positive and negative reinforcement on the acquisition of conditional discriminations and equivalence class formation in humans (see Figure 2). The fourth paper by Vaidya and Ortu, asked whether laboratory-generated conditional relations among stimuli would show properties commonly attributed to linguistic behavior. Investigations, both empirical and conceptual, are currently underway to further evaluate these two intriguing properties (see Figure 3). |
|
Variables Influencing Expansion of Equivalence Classes |
ERIK ARNTZEN (Oslo and Akershus University College), Richard Nartey (Oslo and Akershus University College) |
Abstract: The study investigated the effect of the use of familiar pictures on the expansion of equivalence classes. After training to form two different sets of three 3-member classes with the linear series training structure, twenty children were then trained to connect the two middle nodes in the two different sets of classes. Participants were then tested for the formation of the expansion of these classes into three 6- member equivalence classes. Using pictures as the nodes while the rest of the stimuli were abstract, half of the participants were exposed to a serialized introduction of the baseline conditional relations as the other half had the baseline conditional relations introduced on a concurrent basis. Six of ten participants formed the six-member classes following the serialized arrangement while three of ten did so following the concurrent arrangement. Thus, large equivalence classes were readily formed following serialized training of baseline relations than a concurrent training. In both conditions, those who formed the 6-member classes were then exposed to the formation of new six-member equivalence classes through the expansion of two different three 3-member classes involving only abstract stimuli while those who did not form classes attempted the formation of new 6-member classes involving familiar pictures only. Regardless of condition, when all the stimuli were familiar pictures, seven participants formed the six-member classes while only three participants formed classes using only abstract stimuli. Thus, the formation of large equivalence classes was enhanced with the use of familiar pictures as class members than when only abstract stimuli were used as class members. |
|
Behavioral functions of meaningful stimuli that enhance equivalence class formation |
LANNY FIELDS (Queens College, City University of New York), Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College) |
Abstract: The inclusion of a meaningful stimulus in a set of other meaningless stimuli enhances the likelihood of forming an equivalence class from the stimuli in that set. Typically, the enhancement is attributed to the connotative properties of the meaningful stimulus. A meaningful stimulus however, also serves a number of behavioral stimulus control functions: a simple simultaneous discriminative function, a simple successive discriminative function, and the overtraining of the successive discriminative function. It can also serve as a member of an identity conditional relation, an arbitrary conditional relation, a number of such relations, and these relations on a simultaneous or a delayed basis. Finally, a meaningful stimulus can be functioning as a member of other equivalence classes or resemblance based classes. Thus, any or all of these stimulus control functions can account for the class enhancing effect of including a meaningful stimulus as the member of a to-be-formed equivalence class. The presentation will summarize the results of seven published experiments that have documented the effects of each of these variables. The class enhancement effects of meaningful stimuli were mimicked by an initially meaningless stimulus when laboratory training was used to establish one of the afore-mentioned stimulus control functions with that stimulus. Its subsequent inclusion in a set of other meaningless stimuli enhanced the formation of equivalence classes by that set. Thus, much of the class enhancing effects of meaningful stimuli was accounted for in terms of their acquired stimulus control functions instead of their connotative functions. |
|
Do Equivalence Relations have Linguistic Properties? Behavioral and Neurophysiological Correlates of Emergent Symmetry |
MANISH VAIDYA (University of North Texas), Daniele Ortu (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: The last half of the 20th century can be described as a period of progressive growth in our understanding of language and language-related phenomena. This growth is due to important developments in key areas of language-related research. One of these developments comes from the electrophysiological study of brain activity (e.g., evoked reaction potentials or ERP) and another comes from the behavioral study of generative learning (e.g., stimulus equivalence or SE). In the current set of studies, we asked whether laboratory-generated conditional relations among stimuli would show properties commonly attributed to linguistic behavior. In Experiment 1, we documented the semantic priming effect with geometric stimuli embedded laboratory-generated equivalence relations. In Experiment 2, we documented the N400 effect with similar stimuli in laboratory-generated equivalence relations. These results suggest two intriguing possibilities: First, that laboratory-generated equivalence relations are effective models of behaving linguistically or second, that properties commonly attributed to linguistic behavior are in fact more broadly characteristic of associative relations generally. Investigations, both empirical and conceptual, are currently underway to further evaluate these two intriguing properties. |
|
|
|
|
Assessing and Teaching Academics with the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction |
Monday, May 25, 2015 |
3:00 PM–4:50 PM |
212AB (CC) |
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy) |
Discussant: Charles T. Merbitz (Behavior Development Solutions) |
CE Instructor: Kent Johnson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The Morningside Model of Generative Instruction (MMGI) is a research based protocol for teaching elementary and middle school learners. Over 140 schools and agencies in the US and Canada have successfully implemented MMGI with typically developing students who struggle in school. Recently the Haugland Learning Center has implemented MMGI with students with Autism Spectrum Disorders. In the first presentation, Andrew Kieta will present annual growth in student learning at Haugland, demonstrating its success with this new population. He will focus on writing performance. In the second presentation, Morningside Academy's school psychologist, Julian Gire, will present new approaches to monitoring the progress of writing performance throughout the school year, in order to make teaching interventions that will guarantee at least two years' annual growth. In the third presentation, Marianne Delgado and Nicole Erickson will present procedures for increasing application of newly taught vocabulary words in student writing. In the fourth presentation, Kathy Fox will present the effects of a teacher coaching protocol on both teacher and student performance. |
Keyword(s): academic skills, assessment, generative instruction |
|
Growth In Writing Performance in Children with Autism with the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction |
ANDREW R. KIETA (Haugland Learning Center) |
Abstract: Entering our 5th year of collaboration, Haugland Learning Center and Morningside Academy have transitioned from discovering whether students on the Autism spectrum could demonstrate Generativity through contingency adduction, to designing procedures to make generative learning more dynamic and efficient. This process marked the first attempted implementation of the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction with a student population in which every student is on the Autism spectrum. Past presentations indicated that generative outcomes are achievable with students with autism spectrum disorders through systematic programming, quality instruction, and population specific supports. This session will focus on how extensions in writing instruction have helped develop student repertoires more likely to be recruited into generative combinations, and will highlight what weve learned in implementing a large-scale assessment framework. Performance data will demonstrate the growth exhibited by students to underscore how we continue to develop and implement successful learning technologies with a population different from those served at Morningside Academy and in the typical public school classrooms that have previously implemented the model. |
|
Meta level assessment: Progress monitoring of written expression |
JULIAN GIRE (Morningside Academy) |
Abstract: At Morningside Academy student progress is monitored through a multi-level system of assessment and evaluation. The initial, or Macro, level consists of norm and/or criterion referenced tests. The second, or Meta, level directly deals with progress monitoring through the use of Curriculum Based Measures/Curriculum Based Assessments (CBM/CBA). The third, or Micro, level are Standard Celeration Charts that document student in class progress as well as guide instruction and intervention. The focus of this presentation will be to describe procedures, specifically, for progress monitoring of written expression. A general description of Meta level of assessment will be presented as well along with evidence supporting the importance of this type of assessment. Several different methods of writing assessment will be presented along with data and commentary on the pros and cons of each method. Participants will leave with a general understanding of progress monitoring, procedures for, and current trends in, the monitoring of writing skill progress. |
|
Vocabulary Acquisition with Both Corrective Decoding Students, and Middle School Students Performing Independent Research |
MARIANNE DELGADO (Morningside Academy), Nicole Erickson (Morningside Academy) |
Abstract: Two teachers at Morningside Academy explored the application of correctly defined words in novel situations. Students learned vocabulary with two methods. One method was SAFMEDS, a flash card memorization and fluency program. The second was student-generated definitions program, which included exploring word forms, context clues, connotations, and usage. During the baseline phase, each group was administered 3 sets of flash cards, with 8 words in each set. After definition mastery was shown, application of new vocabulary was tested using 12-minute quick writes of essays. After 3 rounds, the classes moved to 4 different student generated activities, with sets of 8 words. Nicole Erickson will be presenting the performance of her students, ages 9-12, with corrective decoding skills ranging from third through seventh grade. Marianne Delgado will be presenting the performance of her middle schoolers transitioning from teacher-directed literature classes to student-run project based learning groups. Data will be presented on Standard Celeration Charts. Pre and post versions of Pro-Eds Word Test 2 and 3 were used to determine the entry level skills of each group, and assess the acquisition of normative vocabulary skills. Substantial data have been collected in these studies to date. |
|
The Effects of Teacher Coaching on Both Teacher and Student Performance |
KATHY FOX (Haugland Learning Center) |
Abstract: Research has shown that quality instruction is an important factor in student learning. It is often shown to be more important than more commonly discussed factors such as race, socioeconomic status, technology in the classroom, and class size. Haugland Learning Center is a chartered, non-public school for students with autism spectrum disorders in Columbus, Ohio where teachers in the Aspire program are coached not only to perform traditional teacher duties such as progress reporting and data collection, but also to implement research based best practices in instruction, and The Haugland Model of Classroom Management. The Aspire program attempts to replicate The Morningside Model of Generative instruction and works closely with Morningside Teacher?s Academy to train staff in important pieces of the model, provide them with necessary support to implement the model, and develop coaching strategies that will help develop high performing teachers. All staff receive feedback weekly and may be coached several times per week based on performance data. With continued development and data evaluation, we show that behavior analytic performance management and coaching strategies can improve teacher performance and student outcomes. |